3me Keuzevakken 2010 en

Program overview
04-Sep-2013 10:53 Year Organization Education 2010/2011 Mechanical, Maritime and Materials Engineering 3mE Keuzevakken
Code 3mE Keuzevakken 2010

BM1100 BM1210 ME1100 ME1110 ME1120 ME1400 ME1590CH ME1591CH ME1592CH ME1600 ME1610-10 ME1615 MS3011 MS3021 MS3031 MS3221 MS3252 MS3401 MS3412 MS3421 MS3432 MS3442 MS3452 MS3461 MS3471 MS4011 MS4021 MS4031 MS4041 MS4051 MS4061 MS4071 MS4081 MS4091 MS4101 MS4111 MS4121 MS4131NS MS4141TU MS4151 MS4161 MS4171 MS4181 MS4191 MS4201 MS4211 MS4221 MS4232-09 MT113 MT1401 MT213 MT216 MT218 MT313 MT514 MT515 MT523 MT524 MT525 MT724 MT725 MT727
Omschrijving 3mE Electives 2010

Orthopaedic Implants and Technology Medical Instruments A: Clinical Challenges and Engineering Solutions Automotive Crash Safety; Active & Passive Safety Systems Medical Device Prototyping Space Robotics Sustainability in Transportation Engineering Separation Processes, Design & Operation Thermodynamics for Designers Process Intensification Reliability and Uncertainty Models in Engineering Mechanics Tissue Biomechanics of Bone, Cartilage and Tendon Micro-Assembly, Packaging and Test Semiconductor Principles and Devices Metals Science Computational Materials Science History of Materials Production and Usage Materials Degradation and Countermeasures Primary Metals Production Processing of Metals Developments in Production and Processing Determination of Microstructure Relation between Properties and Microstructure Total Performance Approach: Case Studies Corrosion and Protection against Corrosion Modern Analysis Techniques & Authenticity Research Mechanical Properties Structure Characterisation Waves Structure of Materials Physics of Materials Thermodynamics and Kinetics Materials in Art and Design Mechanics of Materials Material Connections From Ore to Plate: Production of Materials Thin Film Materials Practicals Materials Science Solid State Physics 2 Fracture Mechanics Recycling Engineering Materials Engineering with Materials Lifetime Performance of Materials New Trends in Materials Materials for Conventional Energy Production Art History and Archaeology Materials at High Temperature Materials for the Hydrogen Economy Biomaterials Design of Advanced Marine Vehicles Law for MT Marine Engineering C Introduction Combustion Engines Mechatronics in MT Shipping Management Ship Movements and Steering 3 Resistance and Propulsion 3 Numerical Methods for MT Hydromechanics of Special Ship Types Marine Propulsion Systems Shipfinance Inland Shipping Shipyard Process, Simulation and Strategy
ECTS
3 3 3 6 4 3 6 3 6 2 4 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 2 4 4 3 3 4 3 5 3 5 6 4 3 4 4 3 3 4 3 3 3 10 3 3 2 4 3 2 6 3 3 2 3 5 3 3 3 4 3 2 3 2 4 3
p1
p2
p3
p4
p5
Page 1 of 186
MT728 MT729 MT815 MT816 MT830 MT835 OE4601 OE4603 OE4610 OE4623 OE4624 OE4625 OE4626 OE4630 OE4630 D1 OE4630 D2 OE4630 D3 OE4630 D4 OE4651 OE4652 OE4653 OE4654 OE5662 OE5663 OE5664 OE5665 OE5670-11 OE5671 OE5672 SC4010 SC4025 SC4026 SC4032 SC4040 SC4050 SC4060 SC4070 SC4081-10 SC4081-10 D1 SC4081-10 D2 SC4081-10 D3 SC4091 SC4110 SC4120 SC4150 SC4160 SC4170AP SC4180ES SC4190CH SC4210 WB1310 WB1405A WB1406-07 WB1408A WB1408B WB1409 WB1412 WB1413-04 WB1416 WB1417-05 WB1418-07 WB1422ATU WB1424BTU WB1427-03 WB1428-3 WB1429-03 WB1433-04 WB1440 WB1441 WB1443 WB1444-07 WB1445-05 WB1450-05 WB1451-05 WB1481LR WB2301-5 WB2303-10
Salvage Maritime Business Game Construction and Strength, Special Subjects Composit Materials Applications of the Finite Element Method Hydro Elasticity Survey of Offshore Engineering Lectures Introduction to Offshore Structures Survey of Offshore Engineering Projects Drive System Design Principles Offshore Soil Mechanics Dredge Pumps and Slurry Transport Dredging Processes Offshore Hydromechanics Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 1 Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 2 Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 3 Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 4 Bottom Founded Structures Floating Structures Marine Pipelines Sub Sea Engineering Offshore Wind Farm Design Dynamic Positioning Offshore Moorings Offshore Wind Support Structures Integrating Exercise Dredging Equipment Design Dredging Laboratory Introduction Project SC Control Theory Control System Design Physical Modelling for Systems and Control Filtering & Identification Integration Project SC Model Predictive Control Control Systems Lab Knowledge Based Control Systems Knowledge Based Control Systems, Exam Knowledge Based Control Systems, Literature Knowledge Based Control Systems, Matlab Optimization in Systems and Control System Identification Special Topics in Signals, Systems & Control Fuzzy Logic and Engineering Applications Modeling and Control of Hybrid Systems Inverse Problems & Statistical Signal Processing Modeling and Control Process Dynamics and Control Vehicle Mechatronics Multibody Dynamics A Stability of Thin-Walled Structures 1 Experimental Dynamics Shell Structures - Introductory Course Shell Structures - Advanced Course Theory of Elasticity Linear & Non-lineair Vibrations in Mechanical Systems Multibody Dynamics B Numerical Methods for Dynamics Fluid-Structures Interaction Engineering Dynamics Advanced Fluid Dynamics A Race Car Aerodynamics Advanced Fluid Dynamics A Computational Fluid Dynamics Microfluidics Thermomechanical Modelling & Charact.of Polymers Eng. Optimization: Concept & Applications Engineering Optimization 2 Matlab in Engineering Mechanics Advanced Micro Electronic Packaging Mechanics of Micro Electronics and Microsystems Mechanical Analysis for Engineering Engineering Mechanics Fundamentals Dynamics and Control Space Systems System Identification and Parameter Estimation Measurement in Engineering
3 2 2 3 3 3 3 8 3 3 4 4 8 1,5 2 3 1,5 6 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 11 4 4 3 6 3 4 6 5 4 4 4 3 0,5 0,5 4 5 3 3 3 3 6 6 4 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 4 3 4 4 6 3 5 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 4 4 4 7 3 Page 2 of 186
WB2305 WB2306 WB2308 WB2404 WB2408 WB2414-09 WB2415 WB2421 WB2427 WB2428-03 WB2432 WB2433-03 WB2436-05 WB2454-07 WB2601OE WB3404A WB3415-03 WB3416-03 WB3417-04 WB3419-03 WB3420-03 WB3421-04 WB3422-03 WB3423-04 WB3424-08 WB3425-04 WB4300B WB4302 WB4400-03 WB4402 WB4403 WB4405 WB4408A WB4408B WB4410A WB4416 WB4420 WB4421 WB4422 WB4425-09TU WB4426 WB4427 WB4429-03 WB4431-05 WB4432-05 WB4433-05 WB4435-05 WB4436-05 WB4438-05 WB5400-08 WB5414-08 WB5430-05 WB5431-05 WB5435-05 WB5451-05 WBP202
Digital Control The Human Controller Biomedical Engineering Design Man-machine systems Physiological Systems Mechatronic System Design Robust Control Multivariable Control Systems Predictive Modelling Mechanical Design in Mechatronics Bio Mechatronics Humanoid Robots Bio-Inspired Design Multiphysics Modelling using COMSOL Strenght of Materials Vehicle Dynamics A Adams Course Design with the Finite Element Method Discrete Systems: MPSC Characterization and Handling of Bulk Solid Materials Introduction Transport Engineering and Logistics Automation and Control of Transport and Production Systems Design of Transport Equipment The Delft Systems Approach Production Organisation Principles Production Engineering Practical Fundamentals of Fluid Machinery Energy Conversion World of Process & Energy Technologies Project Engineering Advanced Reaction & Separation Systems Fuel Conversion Diesel Engines A Diesel Engines B Refrigeration Nuclear Engineering Gas Turbines Gas Turbine Simulation/Application Thermal Power Plants Fuel Cell Systems Indoor Climate Control Fundamentals Refrigeration Technology and Applications Thermodynamics for Process & Energy Modeling of Process and Energy Systems Process Dynamics and Control Conceptual Process Design and Optimization Equipment for Heat Transfer Equipment for Mass Transfer Technology and Sustainability Mechatronic System Design 2 Design of Machines and Mechanisms Engineering Informatics Life Cycle Engineering Machine Intelligence Student colloquia and events PME Haptic Experiment Design
3 3 4 4 3 4 6 6 3 5 4 3 3 4 1 3 3 3 5 6 5 6 5 3 3 5 2 4 1 6 4 3 4 4 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 1 4
Page 3 of 186
1.
Year Organization Education
2010/2011 Mechanical, Maritime and Materials Engineering 3mE Keuzevakken
3mE Keuzevakken 2010

Responsible Program Employee E.P. van Luik
Page 4 of 186
BM1100
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Orthopaedic Implants and Technology

Prof.dr.ir. E.R. Valstar Dr.ir. R. Happee 0/4/0/0 2 2 Different, to be announced English Most people have first hand experience with the limitations and impact of trauma of the musculo-skeletal system: a sprained ankle severely limits your mobility and causes severe pain, but will heal without too many residual complaints. However, diseases such as osteoarthritis and rheumatoid arthritis - irreversibly destroy joints, and cause severe limitation of the patients mobility and produce pain. Today, 600 million people worldwide are suffering from the limitations and pain that are caused by arthritis.
In the end, these affected joints will often be replaced surgically with an artificial joint. Worldwide 1.5 million hips and 750,000 knees are replaced with a joint prosthesis annually. After a joint replacement, patients are normally pain free again and gain in mobility. A joint replacement is one of the most rewarding surgical procedures. Ten years post-operatively, 5 to 10% of these prostheses annually 150.000 cases - have failed and need to be replaced in a demanding revision operation. For total shoulder replacement these numbers are much higher: up to 44% of the implants have failed at ten years follow-up. In this course you will learn to analyse, evaluate, and judge joint replacement prostheses with respect to their influence on the host bone, their function, fixation, and longevity based on the scientific state-of-the art knowledge. Study Goals Main intended learning outcome The student should be able to analyse, evaluate, and judge joint replacement prostheses with respect to their influence on the host bone, their function, fixation, and longevity based on the scientific state-of-the art knowledge. Sub intended learning objectives The student should be able to: LO1: Describe the function, role and organisation of the main constituents of bone tissue, and explain the bone remodelling process LO2: Describe the hip, the knee, and the shoulder from a structural and functional perspective. LO3: Describe the effects of osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis on the human body, understand the problems that patients experience. LO4: Analyse, evaluate, and judge the design of orthopaedic implants, based on design rationales, peer-reviewed scientific articles, and national registers.
Education Method
This course will be taught in a number of highly interactive sessions and a mini-symposium. In addition to that, there is a visit to the Department of Anatomy at Leiden University Medical Center (LUMC) and a one-on-one meeting with an orthopaedic surgeon from the LUMC. One of the class sessions is a hands on session in which you are going to place a real prosthesis in an artificial bone. The course is finished in a mini-symposium in which students will present the results of their assignments and there will be extensive discussions with the students and a basic researcher and an orthopaedic surgeon. The class sessions will have a highly interactive nature and will have to be prepared thoroughly by the students. All assignments are carried out by groups of three students. For several sessions there will be an assignment that the students need to hand in before the session takes place. In a larger assignment, which forms the basis for the presentations and discussions in the mini-symposium, students will focus on different controversies that still exist in orthopaedics. This course partially replaces WB2431 Bone Mechanics & implants which was last given in 2007-2008. Participation in the course ME1610, Bone and Cartilage is recommended but not required. You are assessed based on assignments that you hand in. All assignments are carried out by groups of three students. Students can pass this course only if all assignments have been handed in on time. There is no additional examination. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Course Relations Assessment
Department
Page 5 of 186
BM1210
Medical Instruments A: Clinical Challenges and Engineering Solutions

Prof.dr. J. Dankelman Dr. D. Dodou 4/0/0/0 1 1 Exam by appointment English Introduction to surgery, dissect and connect tissue Surgical instruments and their specific requirements Quality of surgical tools, quality control, sterilization Advantages and disadvantages of minimally invasive surgery (keyhole operations) Possibilities and problems of using robotic systems during surgery Task analysis of the surgical process Training of surgeons Electrical safety Operation rooms, equipment Safety issues in the operation room New materials and devices The student will be able to describe the design, function, and problems of (minimally invasive) surgical instruments. More specifically, the student will be able to: 1. formulate the special requirements for surgical instruments 2. illustrate advantages and disadvantage of minimally invasive surgery (keyhole surgery) and to sum up the limitations for the surgeon when applying this method 3. sum up instruments used during minimally invasive surgery 4. reproduce the problems with the use of electrosurgery / coagulation instruments 5. formulate criteria that surgical instruments have to fulfill in order to prevent sterilization problems 6. describe task analyses methods and how to evaluate the surgical process 7. indicate the problems with quality control of surgical instruments 8. tell the fields where robotics are used in surgery and indicate the possibilities and limitations of the use of robotics 9. classify current technology developed to train surgeons outside the operating theater 10. reproduce design considerations of the operating room 11. select information from literature related to a certain issue and evaluate new developments 12. discuss safety issues in surgery 4 hours per week Information will be provided via blackboard Oral exam 30% Design of instruments for surgery, minimally invasive interventions, and training facilities 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 6 of 186
ME1100
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Course Contents Course Contents Continuation
Automotive Crash Safety; Active & Passive Safety Systems

Dr.ir. R. Happee 0/0/0/4
4 4 4 5 English WB3404A Vehicle Dynamics A can be followed in parallel (recommended). Automotive Safety technologies are covered with a focus on potential benefits, test procedures, sensing, control and human machine interfacing. Contents as stated below may be adapted based on the interests of students and time constraints 1.The road safety problem Review of fatalities, injuries and vehicle damage in a national and international perspective. Outlook on safety in first, second and third world countries. Comparison of safety of different transport modes. Breakdown into injuries of car occupants, pedestrians, cyclists, motorcyclists and others. Breakdown of costs into life years lost, medical and rehabilitation costs, vehicle damage and congestion due to accidents. Road safety countermeasure overview: Pre-crash, In-crash and Post-crash measures (Haddon Matrix). Vehicle safety technologies, road infrastructure, enforcement of speed, alcohol and other regulations, education. 2.Accident causation Introduction of aspects like perception of speed, direction and distance, awareness, reaction times & failure to act. Illustration of loss of control due to wheel slip etc. 3.Active Safety 1 Vision and Visibility. Obstacle & vehicle detection technologies. Vehicle to vehicle communication and vehicle to infrastructure communication. Driver assistance systems. 4.Active Safety 2 The role of tyre, suspension, steering and braking system. Antilock Braking Systems (ABS) and Electronic Stability Programs (ESP). 5.Crash dummies & Injury Criteria Development and validation of crash test dummies using cadaver testing for high severity and volunteer testing for low severity loading. - Mathematical human body models. - Injury severity scales (AIS, MAIS, ) - Injury criteria and tolerances and their derivation from cadaver testing and real accidents. 6.Passive Safety 1 frontal impact Frontal car impact will be used to explain how occupant safety is enhanced by the deformable vehicle front structure, the protective vehicle compartment, belt system, airbag and seat. The mechanical interaction will be illustrated quantitatively including some practical calculation assignments. - Injuries to car occupants in Frontal Impact. - Demonstrated benefits of belts and airbags. - Full vehicle front overlap versus partial overlap impact. - Compatibility of vehicle shape and stiffness across the diversifying car fleet. - Triggering of belt pretensioner and airbag(s) - Adaptation of belt and airbag operation towards crash conditions and occupant size and position. Potential benefits of real time control of belt and airbag. 7.Passive Safety 2 other impact modes Other impact modes will be reviewed in a global manner: SIDE IMPACT: Injuries. Test procedures & dummies. Protection offered by the protective vehicle compartment, airbags and vehicle interior padding. ROLLOVER: Injuries and ejection. Test procedures & dummies. Effectiveness of curtain airbags and belts to prevent ejection. REAR IMPACT: Injuries. Test procedures & dummies. Passive and active seat systems for rear impact. PEDESTRIANS AND CYCLISTS impacted by vehicle fronts: Injuries. Test procedures & dummy subsystems representing body parts. Deformable vehicle front and bonnet structures. Compromises between pedestrian, frontal impact, durability and repair costs for marginal accidents (parking). 8.Safety from a sensing & control perspective Review of safety systems described in previous chapters in terms of: - Sensing, identification and state estimation. - Human machine interfacing. 9.Safety test procedures Review of regulated test procedures, consumer test procedures and best practice for active and passive safety as introduced in previous chapters. - Safety in the vehicle development process. - Subsystem versus full system testing. - Hardware versus virtual testing. - Gaps where accident types and injury types are not well covered. - Gaps where innovative safety systems are not well covered. - Discussion of political and financial forces driving safety enhancement including: Governments, Car manufacturers, Suppliers, Vehicle and health Insurance companies. The student must be able to analyse the potential benefits of current or future active and/or passive safety systems Lectures (4 hours per week) Plus Self-study & Exercises Written exam Register on Blackboard and mail [email protected] 10%
Study Goals Education Method Assessment Enrolment / Application Percentage of Design
Page 7 of 186
Department
3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
ME1110
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents
Medical Device Prototyping

Dr. J.J. van den Dobbelsteen Dr.ir. J.L. Herder Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg Dr.ir. G.J.M. Tuijthof 0/0/2/2
3 4 3 Exam by appointment English Previous participation in WB2436-05, WB5414-03, WB2308, WB2428-03 is considered as a pre. In the course Medical Device Design students develop and produce a sound solution to a problem in the medical field in collaboration with their supervisor, clinicians, instrument makers and production companies. The course offers students to work on a design assignment that encompasses the complete design cycle from problem analysis to actual production of the prototype. Each group has a budget of 3000 Euro for production of the prototype. The course is a logical follow-up of the course Biomedical design engineering WB2308. Students will select a design assignment from a number of options proposed by clinicians (e.g. surgeons, rehabilitation doctors). A conceptual design previously developed in WB2308 could also serve as a base for the development of a physical prototype. The students work in groups of two under close supervision of an instructor on the assignment, to end up with a working prototype. The course is finalized with a public presentation for clinicians and companies and a report. In weekly meetings of the instructors with all participating groups students are expected to present and discuss the progress in their project in an informal setting. The student must be able to: 1. Employ a design task with a multidisciplinary team to solve a real technical problem in a medical environment: translate the clinical problem as presented in the assignment into a practical, technical solution, i.e. do a problem analysis, specify design requirements, come up with a conceptual design, create a cardboard model; obtain feedback on the clinical feasibility of the concept from the medical assignor to further detail the design. 2. Realize the fabrication of a prototype medical device in collaboration with instrument makers and production companies: define economical demands; create detailed drawings, CAD model; formulate a production plan. 3. Evaluate the performance of the new prototype: test the technical functionality of the device and/or the clinical applicability of the device in a medical setting; reflect on previously made design choices based on the performance of the prototype. 4. Present the design to a multidisciplinary audience of technicians, clinicians and (medical) companies. Design project Prototype, report and final presentation 100% Specification of technical, economical and fabrication demands, development and selection of conceptual designs, CAD, Fabrication of prototype. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 8 of 186
ME1120
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ing. A. Schiele 0/0/0/2
Space Robotics
4 4 Different, to be announced English Overview to space robotics systems, design and requirements. This course will set the foundation to design space robotic systems and to understand the requirements specifically imposed on robots by application in non-terrestrial environments. The lecture provides an overview to some relevant basics about robotic manipulators in general and then prepares the students to consider particular constraints posed by temp., radiation and space robotic systems. Focus will lie on manipulator type of robotic applications, but also typical mobile robotics scenarios will be outlined. Lect. 1:Introduction Robots in space; Manipulators, Mobile robotics; Purpose, goals, difference w.r.t. terrestrial robotic systems Lect. 2:Basics I: Homogeneous coordinates Concept of homogeneous transformations, linear & rotational transforms (Euler angles, quaternions), Denavit-Hertenberg Convention, 6 DOF forward and inverse kinematics (Assignment) Lect. 3:Basics II: Link velocity Link velocity and velocity propagation, Jacobians (analytical, geometrical, numerical,), construction of Jacobian, Lect. 4:Basics III: Link forces & Redundancy Link force propagation, force transformations Manipulator redundancy, Manipulator & operational space, null space, redundancy resolution strategies, redundant inverse kinematics Lect. 5:Exercises (Basics I-III) Lect. 6:Space environmental effects Temperature Environment (effects on mechanical Systems), radiation environment (effects on electronic systems), launch and landing environments (examples), planetary surface environments Lect. 7:Tribology in space Basic effects, overview of models, selection of appropriate lubricants Lect. 8:Robotic actuators in space DC, stepper and brushless motors, bearing and bushing modification, qualified motors, selection of actuators. Lect. 9:Sensors for manipulators in space Position/Velocity Sensing, force sensors, strain gauges (layout and design), sensor electronics, Lect. 10:Testing for space mechatronics Introduction to applicable standards, mechanical, thermal and electrical testing. (I/F load calculation, thermal modeling approaches, EMC) Lect. 11:Applications I: Robotic planetary missions Mission operation, examples about mission control (MER, Nanokhod) Lect. 12:Applications II: Orbital robotics Operational modes: human-machine interfaces, examples of ERA/SSRMS, introduction to Telecontrol and Tele-operation concepts Lect. 13/14:Lab assignment (TBC): A: SRMS/SSRMS interfaces joystick (trl. Of 7 dof. Manipulators (PA.10, LBR4) B: Nullspace motion, resolution of 7 dof redundancy on LBR4 (A+B = final assignment) The students are capable: * To identify, define and analyse problems of robots, vehicles and other mechanical systems in space * To design and produce a sound solution to typical space robotics problems The following exit qualifications serve to realise this goal: The students meet the following qualifications: * Basic knowledge of the problems of mechanical systems in space, i.e. related to tribology, actuators, mechatronics, sensors, thermodynamics, etc. * Ability to set up motion equations for 3D mechanisms applicable in space and in general, calculation of kinematics and dynamics using most often used methods. * Knowledge about particular space environment requirements and testing methods. * Knowledge about the space mission operations and human interfacing requirements. * Analyze some basic problems in space robotic missions, and synthesize an adequate solution. 14 lectures, 2 assignment Basic understanding of: linear algebra, physics, analog electronics, digital & analog signal processing, mechanics (statics, kinetics, dynamics), linear control theory, Matlab, C. Assignment 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method Prerequisites Assessment Department
Page 9 of 186
ME1400
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents 0/0/2/0
Sustainability in Transportation Engineering

Ir. J.H. Welink
Study Goals
Education Method Assessment Department
3 3 3 4 English Subject of the course is the sustainability in the transportation and production engineering and logistics. The course covers: Use of material and energy resources Energy production and storage Efficiency of transport systems: Transport loss factor, effect kinetic energy, energy recuperation and transmission Product life cycle and sustainable product design Sustainable processes and supply chains Economical aspects of sustainability The student must be able to Describe and explain issues with (non-)sustainable materials and energy Calculate the use of energy resources and emissions for different uses of energy sources Devise, propose, explain and/or evaluate more energy efficient transport systems Demonstrate, analyse and evaluate life cycle analyses and devise, explain, analyse and evaluate sustainable design in relation to the life cycle of a product Explain, devise, propose, analyse and evaluate and/or explain more sustainable production processes Calculate the costs of the environmental impact of the transportation and production engineering and logistics, and the accounting of environmental costs and calculate economics for (sustainable) investments Lectures (2 hours per week) Written exam (80% of mark) and assignment (20% of mark) 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
ME1590CH
Separation Processes, Design & Operation

Dr.ir. J.H. ter Horst
Study Goals Education Method Books Assessment Department
2 2 2 English Separation processes are very important in all sectors of modern process industry. A reaction section in a chemical plant is typically surrounded by 3-6 separation units, which perform a variety of functions (e.g. feed concentration, product purification, solvent-recycling, off-gas treatment and water-recovery). Separation processes consume approximately 40% of the energy consumption and 75% of the investment cost in the process industry. Consequently, you are likely to come across the design and/or operation of separation units in your future career. Focus is given on the conceptual design of the main separation processes in the chemical industry: distillation, absorption, extraction, crystallization, adsorption and membrane separations. The main features of these processes are highlighted and illustrated with examples from industrial practice. Students are taught to select industrial separation units, to master various design methodologies and to recognize their potentials and limitations. Hands-on experience with computer-aided design is developed through instructions and homework assignments. Lectures, class assignments Separation Process Principles, J.D.Seader & E.J.Henley, John Wiley & Sons, 2nd Ed., 2006 The developed knowledge and acquired skills are tested by means of homework assignments, which can be worked out in groups of two students. An oral examination of the groups about the obtained separation technology knowledge finalizes the course. 3mE Department Process & Energy
ME1591CH
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. T.W. de Loos 0/0/0/0/x
Thermodynamics for Designers
Study Goals Education Method Assessment Department
Summer Holidays 5 5 English Data retrieval. Intermolecular forces. Prediction of ideal gas properties. Equations of state. Thermodynamics properties of nonideal fluids. Vapour pressure and latent heat. G-excess models. UNIFAC methods. G-excess mixing rules for equations of state. Algorithms to calculate phase equilibria and complex chemical equilibria. Examples. Data banks, data generators, flowsheeting. Overview of state of the art thermodynamic models used in process design, allowing the participant to make a motivated choice between models used in flowsheet programms intensive course (1 week) assignments 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 10 of 186
ME1592CH
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. A.I. Stankiewicz 0/4/0/0
Process Intensification
2 2 2 English 1. Introduction to Process Intensification(PI): - sustainability-related issues in process industry - defnitions of Process Intensification - fundamental principles and approaches of PI 2. How to design a sustainable, inherently safer processing plant - presentation of PI case study assignments. 3. PI Approaches: - STRUCTURE - PI approach in spatial domain (incl. "FOCUS ON" guest lecture) - ENERGY - PI approach in thermodynamic domain (incl. "FOCUS ON" guest lecture) - SYNERGY - PI approach in functional domain (incl. "FOCUS ON" guest lecture) - TIME - PI approach in temporal domain (incl. "FOCUS ON" guest lecture) 4. Team work on case studies - intermediate reporting, consultancy. Basic knowledge and conceptual process design experience in Process Intensification. Lectures, group project 1. Lecture notes via Blackboard. 2. Book "Re-Enegineering the Chemical Processing Plant: Process Intensification" by A. Stankiewicz and J. A. Moulijn (Marcel Dekker, 2004), also available for on-line reading via the Library of TU Delft. 3. Recommended papers via Blackboard 4. "Process Intensification Information Sheets" via Blackboard The examination on Process Intensification course lasts 2.5 hours and is divided into two parts: Part 1: Written examination, lasting 1.5 hour. Part 2: Presentation and discussion of the case-study assignment results by project groups (1 hour) 3mE Department Process & Energy
Study Goals Education Method Literature and Study Materials
Assessment
Department
ME1600
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Reliability and Uncertainty Models in Engineering Mechanics

Prof.dr.ir. M.A. Gutierrez De La Merced 0/0/0/2
Study Goals Education Method Assessment Department
4 4 Different, to be announced English This course provides an introduction to the most common computational techniques to study the influence of parameter uncertainty in the performance of mechanical systems. Rather than modelling the problem by means of stochastic differential equations, advantage is taken of existing numerical techniques for deterministic problems in order to characterise the stochastic response. The focus is in modelling the spatial variability of material and geometric properties by means of random fields and studying how this randomness propagates to the response field. The preferential techniques for this purpose belong to the family of Stochastic Finite Element Methods and are presented in this course for the purpose of both uncertainty and reliability analysis. In the former attention is paid to how characteristics of the random parameters such as the expectation and the covariance propagate to those of the response. In the latter the focus is on approximating the probability distribution of any characteristic of the structural performance. To get acquainted with the most common techniques for random field modelling and stochastic finite elements, including their range of applicability, limitations and accuracy. Lecture Assignment and oral discussion 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 11 of 186
ME1610-10
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Tissue Biomechanics of Bone, Cartilage and Tendon

Prof.dr.ir. H.H. Weinans Dr. A.A. Zadpoor Dr.ir. R. Happee 2/0/0/0
1 1 1 2 English The healing process of bone is a beautiful example of adaptive repair in a living tissue. The tissues of the musculoskeletal system such as bone, cartilage and tendon/ligament are able to adapt their architecture to changes in external loads and to repair damage. Astronauts lose bone mass during spaceflight, as their skeleton adapts to the low gravity environment. Tennis players have stronger bones in their dominant arm and high resistance training, like weight-lifting, increases bone mass. During this lecture series, a number of topics related to musculoskeletal tissues will be discussed. We will give an introduction to the development of the skeletal system, bone and cartilage biology and the remodeling and repair processes that are important during life. In addition the most important skeletal diseases will be discussed, such as osteoporosis (reduced bone mass that increases fracture risk) and osteoarthritis (degeneration of the joints). The course will also cover diagnostic methods, imaging and computer analyses that can be used to obtain information on the skeleton from novel imaging modalities. 1. know the function and role of the main constituents of bone, cartilage and tendon tissue and the organisation of these tissues at the different hierarchies 2. be able to describe the development, remodeling and repair processes of bone cartilage and tendon tissue and its response to mechanical load. Understand these concepts in terms of growth, aging and degeneration. 3. know the structure, function of bone cartilage and tendon and understand the mechanical properties of these tissues, such as e.g. anisotropy and visco-elasticity. 4. describe the effects of the major diseases of the skeletal system such as osteoporosis, osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis and tendinopathy and understand the concept behind different treatment options. 5. know the principles of tissue engineering, be able to describe the tissue engineering process in the laboratory and know advantages and disadvantages of natural and synthetic tissue 6. describe clinical study set-ups: prospective, retrospective, randomised, non-randomised; clinical scoring systems, radiological assessment techniques, national registries and explain the advantages and disadvantages of each aforementioned item Lectures written exam 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Study Goals
Page 12 of 186
ME1615
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Dr.ir. M. Tichem Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/0/4/0
Micro-Assembly, Packaging and Test
Summary
Course Contents
3 3 3 5 English Micro and Nano Engineering (specialisation within the MSc Mechanical Engineering variant PME) NOTE: This course will not be given during the study year 2010/2011. Students of the specialisation PME-MNE who want to finish their courses this studyyear can choose an extra elective of 3 EC to compensate for this course. As a replacment course WB1444-7 "Advanced Micro-electronic packaging" is advised. This course is also given in Education period 3. Assembly and packaging processes are very important for the realisation of microsysems, and determine to a high degree their technical and economic performance. The course teaches the basic principles of and technology for micro-assembly and packaging processes. The course explains the basic principles of as well as the technology for the assembly and packaging of miniaturised products/systems. The products focused on originate both from the micro-mechanical engineering domain and from the semiconductor domain (complex microelectronics and microsystems/ MEMS). More specifically, the course addresses the following topics: example microproducts and microsystems and their integration challenges; trends and roadmaps; scaling laws and the consequences for assembly; micro-part gripping; accurate part alignment; precision and micro-robots; haptic assembly; self-assembly and batch assembly; micro-assembly systems, design; general packaging flows for IC packaging and MEMS packaging; packaging architectures (including SoC, MCM, SiP); materials and processes; thermal management; hermeticity; packaging-induced failures; reliability and test. The course enables students to research, to design and to implement micro-assembly and packaging processes. More specifically, students - Gain understanding of the state-of-the-art in industrial assembly and packaging processes, as well as knowledge on the state-ofthe-art in research in the domain; - Gain knowledge and skills to develop innovative micro-assembly and packaging processes. A variety of methods will be used: lectures, guest lectures, analysis of scientific and technical papers/ mini-workshop, exercises/case studies during the lectures/ the course period. Lecture notes Micro-assembly, most recent version available upon start of the course. Scientific papers, made available during the course. Handouts with presentation slides. Written exam Assignments 25% 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Percentage of Design Department
Page 13 of 186
MS3011
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge 0/0/4/0
Semiconductor Principles and Devices

Prof.dr. B.J. Thijsse
Summary Course Contents
Study Goals
3 3 3 4 English MS3031 Computational Materials Science, MS4111 Thin Film Materials, MS4131NS Solid State Physics II. Introductory classical mechanics and electromagnetism. Basic quantum mechanics (particle-wave dualism, one-dimensional Schrdinger equation, hydrogen atom, chemical bond, free electron theory, band theory). Crystal dynamics. Elements of statistical physics (Maxwell-Boltzmann, Fermi-Dirac, Bose-Einstein distributions, phonons, photons). Basic semiconductor physics, principles of semiconductor devices, low-dimensional systems. Following up on the free electron and band theories of solids, the course focuses on the properties of electrons and holes in semiconductors and on the different ways in which semiconductor materials can be engineered into devices. Examples are diodes, transistors, leds, lasers, and solar cells. Special subjects are low-dimensional systems and the question why electrons behave independently. The student is able to use quantum mechanical models to explain the properties and behavior of electrons and holes in semiconductors and of their roles in basic electronic, and optoelectronic devices. More specifically, the student is able to: 1.Explain the band model for electron and hole energies in semiconductors. 2.Apply Fermi-Dirac statistics to calculate the number of carrier electrons and holes in conductors and semiconductors. 3.Formulate the combined roles of electron scattering and electric field on the electrical conductivity of materials in various materials. 4.Indicate the main fundamental and application-oriented differences between elemental, III-V, and II-VI semiconductors. 5.Demonstrate the effects of doping, composition, and size on energy gaps and Fermi energies. 6.Explain the biased and unbiased p-n junction, the tunnel diode, the field effect transistor, and high-mobility electron devices. 7.Formulate the operation of lasers and leds. 8.Show how and why heterostructure semiconductor lasers are built and operated. 9.Explain light detectors and photovoltaic cells as examples of optoelectronics. 10.Identify the main materials engineering aspects of device fabrication. 11.Demonstrate the role of diffusion, annihilation, and creation of electrons and holes on the dynamic behavior of semiconductors. 12.Explain the effects of low-dimensionality on device properties. 13.Identify the main materials engineering aspects of device fabrication. 14.Explain why electrons behave independently, in spite of their Coulomb interaction. 15.Apply all of the above in problems representing simplified and real cases. Lectures Course material: "Solid State Physics", 2nd edition, by J.R. Hook and H.E. Hall (Wiley, 2006). Statistical mechanics survival guide", version 24 Sep 2007, by B.J. Thijsse, available through Blackboard. Exercises and useful links on Blackboard. Making your own notes during class is highly recommended. MS4031 Waves, MS4041 Structure of Materials, MS4051 Physics of Materials, or equivalent courses. Written exam, open book Oral examination possible only in special circumstances (after two seriously attempted written exams). 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Education Method Literature and Study Materials
Prerequisites Assessment Remarks Department
Page 14 of 186
MS3021
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Prof.dr.ir. L.A.I. Kestens Ir. N. Geerlofs Dr.ir. W.G. Sloof Prof.dr. J.H.W. de Wit 0/0/4/0
Metals Science
3 3 3 4 English Specialisation Course Metals Science & Technology: - MS3412 Processing of Metals, - MS3442 Relation between Properties & Microstructure, - MS3461 Corrosion & Protection against Corrosion, - MS3452 Total Performance Approach: Case Studies Microstructure, Nucleation, Growth, Interfaces, Solid-State Transformations, Crystallographic Texture, Solidification, Diffusion, Segregation, Grain Boundary, Dislocation, Hardening, Hall-Petch Relation, Constitutional Undercooling, Precipitation. Metals represent a vital class of materials for a technological society. This course examines the structure and properties of metals across a range of length scales, addressing issues of microstructural changes and phase transformations, metals production techniques and the behaviour of metals in generic applications. The course covers microstructures, mechanical properties in relation to microstructures and solidification. In addition introductions are given to the influence of welding on microstructures and properties and on the susceptibility of metals to corrosion. Microstructural aspects include: 1)the essential characteristics of different types of interface between either grains of the same phase or grains of different phases, the formation of metastable phases, and orientation relations. 2)the classical nucleation theory for phase transformations in the solid state, and the relation to experimental observations on nucleation. 3)the basic features of phase-transformation models for diffusion-controlled, interface-controlled, and mixed-mode transformations, and the relation to experimental results. 4)diffusionless / martensitic phase transformations occurring under either thermal or mechanical driving force. 5)the origin of crystallographic texture in metallic microstructures, the representation of texture and the experimental techniques to measure texture on a macro- or microscopic scale. 6)the characteristics of the microstructure of a range of commercial steels, aluminium alloys, titanium alloys and magnesium alloys, the main features of the technological processing of these alloys and the main application areas. Mechanical properties of metals in relation with their microstructure include descriptions of dislocations, slip systems, movement of dislocations, interactions between dislocations, lattice defects and precipitates. Concepts of dislocation generation and multiplication are discussed. Strength of metals is considered including temperature and strain rate dependence of the flow stress. Strengthening mechanisms such as solute and precipitation hardening, work hardening and grain size refinement are described. The relation between strength and grain size i.e. the Hall-Petch relation is discussed. Solidification and melting describe transformations between crystallographic and non-crystallographic states of a metal or alloy. Basic phenomena during solidification are explained including: nucleation and growth, heat flow and micro segregation. The effects of major process parameters on these phenomena are described, as well as their effect on as-cast microstructures. The student is able to describe the characteristic features of metals, explain the dominant structures and mechanisms responsible for their physical and mechanical properties and describe the temperature dependence of these structures and mechanisms. More specifically, the student is able to: 1. distinguish the different types of interfaces and their characteristic properties. 2. identify the microstructural parameters that play a critical role in the nucleation behaviour of various solid-state transformation processes based on thermodynamic principles,. 3. differentiate between the different types of growth modes, to make the link with the kinetic features of the transformation, and to derive the relevance for the microstructural features. 4. identify the mechanism, including the crystallographic features, of a diffusionless transformation. 5. quantitatively describe the crystallographic texture of metals and understands the importance of the crystallographic texture with regard to the anisotropic behaviour of metals. 6. identify and read the microstructures of various common metallic systems, relate the microstructures to the corresponding phase diagram and interpret these microstructural features in terms of a selected group of material properties. 7. describe dislocations, dislocation movement, dislocation interactions with other dislocations, lattice (e.g. solute atoms, grain boundaries) defects and precipitates in fundamental terms. 8. explain plastic deformation of metals using dislocation theory. 9. illustrate the origin and multiplication of dislocations 10. describe the strengthening mechanisms for metals: solute and precipitation strengthening, work hardening, grain size effect (Hall-Petch relation) 11. explain the difference between nucleation and growth during solidification. 12. explain the different growth modes 13. formulate the effect of cooling rate on the phase transformation and the resulting microstructure. 14. explain and apply the principle of constitutional undercooling to actual solidification situations. 15. formulate the occurrence of segregation during solidification. 16. formulate the different heat transfer modes during solidification. 17. explain the occurrence of different morphologies by applying principles of heat and mass flow. 18. identify the main materials engineering aspects of solidification and casting. 19. appraise the influence of the welding thermal cycle on material structure and properties 20. recognise corrosion mechanisms and their dependence on microstructures. 21. apply all of the above in problems representing simplified and real cases. Lectures Course material: D.A. Porter and K.E. Easterling Phase Transformations in Metals and Alloys, Chapman and Hall, 2nd Edition, 1992. D. Hull and D.J.Bacon Introduction to Dislocations, 4th Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, 2001. G. den Ouden Lastechnologie, Delftse Uitgevers Maatschappij, 3rd Edition, 1993. (English translation in progress). Chapter 5 & Page 15 of 186
Study Goals
Prerequisites
Assessment Special Information Remarks Department
6 D.A. Jones Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Prentice Hall,1996 J. Beddies and M.J. Bibby, Principles of Metal Manufacturing Processes, Arnold, 1999. - MS4041 Structure of Materials, - MS4021 Structure Characterisation, - MS4061 Thermodynamics and Kinetics Written exam Laboratory project(s): 2 x 1/2 days, Casting / Solidification (5th and 6th week) 3 hours examination, closed book 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
MS3031
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Summary Course Contents Dr. M.H.F. Sluiter Dr. A.J. Bottger Prof.dr.ir. J. Sietsma 0/0/0/4
Computational Materials Science
Study Goals
4 4 4 5 English MS4131NS Solid State Physics II Undergraduate physics, mathematics, and thermodynamics. Basic familiarity with fluid dynamics and some materials science (atomic structure, defects). Computer modeling of materials. Length and time scales. Modern modeling techniques. Simulation of materials structure, change, and properties. Student computer projects. 1. Introduction to materials modeling. 2. Phase field methods. 3. Background statistical mechanics. 4. Quantum-level modeling. 5. Molecular dynamics. 6. Ising model, Cluster Variation Method, Monte Carlo techniques. 7. Finite volume methods. 8. Discrete dislocation dynamics. 9. Computer lab classes. The student is able to differentiate between the possibilities of the principal computer modeling techniques in materials science, and design and execute a modeling strategy for a given problem. More specifically, the student is able to: 1.recognize that the properties and behavior of materials are determined by interrelated phenomena on widely different time, length, and energy scales 2.explain why and how different modeling approaches (ab initio methods, molecular dynamics, Monte Carlo methods, cluster variation method, phase field modeling, discrete dislocation dynamics, finite volume methods) each have their strengths over a different subrange of these scales 3.formulate criteria for selecting the most appropriate method for a given problem 4.indicate what type of information can be obtained from the different techniques and how these pieces of information can possibly be combined 5.explain the main algorithms and the underlying theories of the different techniques 6.use these algorithms and theories to predict the behavior of modeling methods for different cases 7.implement small parts of self-designed code in an existing or new program 8.apply a number of modeling techniques to small but realistic materials problems, by executing different computer simulation projects 9.critically analyze the simulation results and give written and oral presentations of the results Lectures, computer projects. Extensive lecture notes are available on Blackboard. MS4031 Waves, MS4041 Structure of Materials, MS4051 Physics of Materials, MS4061 Thermodynamics and Kinetics, MS4081 Properties of Materials, MS4101 Production of Materials, MS3011 Semiconductor Devices and Magnetism, or equivalent courses. Written exam + project presentation. In addition to the written examination, short written reports of the computer projects are required. Also, a mini-conference will be held at which the students present the results of one of their computer projects in more detail. Students should design modelling plans. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites
Assessment Remarks Design Content Department
Page 16 of 186
MS3221
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents
History of Materials Production and Usage

Prof.dr. J. Dik Drs. N.C.F. Groot x/0/0/0
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Department
1 1 Different, to be announced English Culture, art, archaeology, history, materials This course studies the development of materials and production techniques in the visual arts. From the early stone age to the contemporary art, artists and craftsmen have been on a continuous quest for new materials and innovative production techniques to realize artistic concepts. The main focus of this course is the relation between the introduction of new materials on one hand and immaterial developments in the form of stylistic changes in the visual arts. The student is able to: - give a general overview of materials in art and archaeology; he can describe the timeline of materials used from 9000BC till present - relate between material innovation on one side and economical, social and cultural changes on the other Lecture yet to be defined Written exam 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
MS3252
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents Prof.dr. J. Dik x/0/0/0
Materials Degradation and Countermeasures
Study Goals
1 1 Different, to be announced English Culture, art, archaeology, history, materials, degradation Precious historical artefacts are subject to degradation through time. This course studies the effect of various degradation factors on artworks, including temperature changes, moisture and UV radiation. The course has a focus on the diagnosis of degradation phenomena through materials analysis. It also includes a range of (passive and active) countermeasures that can be undertaken. The student is able to: - give an overview of important inorganic degradation mechanisms on artworks - describe degradation mechanisms that have already occured but can also outline possible future threats to the artwork - relate between degration phenomena and environmental influences - formulate countermeasures and discuss and their pros and cons Lecture Literature Yet to be defined 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Page 17 of 186
MS3401
Responsible Instructor Instructor Assistent Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents Study Goals
Primary Metals Production

Prof.dr. R. Boom Dr. Y. Yang J.A. Woelders-van der Burg 0/0/0/2
4 4 4 5 English Primary metals production, primary metals refining and recycling Extractive metallurgy, production, refining and recycling of the primary metals iron and steel, aluminium, magnesium and titanium. The student is able to describe the characteristic features of production from ore and secondary sources (scrap) for the following group of technically important metals: iron and steel, aluminium, magnesium and titanium. The student can reproduce the most commonly used production methods for these metals and understands why these are industrially applied. what technologies are involved, which developments are ongoing, and what impact these processes have on energy consumption and environment. More specifically, the student is able to reproduce: - the thermodynamics of extractive metallurgy; - the chemical reactions relevant for the metals extraction from ore or scrap; - the mass and thermal balances of the most common production processes; -the slag/metal equilibria as a function of composition and temperature of slag and liquid metal; - the material flow in the iron and steel production chain; - the kinetics of steelmaking in the basic oxygen furnace (BOF); - the process control modelling of steelmaking; - the dynamic measurement of process progress in the BOF; - the removal of sulphur from liquid iron by CaO and Mg; - slag formation in the BOF and its relevance for dephosphorisation and refractory lining life; - gas/metal mixing and homogenisation by gas injection and stirring; - the secondary metallurgy of steelmaking (deoxidation, vacuum degassing, desulphurisation, calcium injection); - the electric arc furnace (EAF) process for steel scrap melting and refining; - the Hall-Heroult process of primary aluiminium production; - the important parameters for aluminium recycling; - the Pidgeon and EMF production processes for magnesium; - the Kroll process for tiatanium production; - the Fray/Cambridge development to produce titanium, aluminium and magnesium. Lecture The student will be explained and demonstrated how to use the webbased learning methods of the International Iron and Steel Institute (steeluniversity.org) in which TU Delft is being involved. Brahma Deo and Rob Boom, Fundamentals of Steelmaking Metallurgy, avilable from the lecturer Handouts of the lectures in the form of powerpoint presentations Oral exam A plant visit to a production site for iron and steel or aluminium in The Netherlands is part of the course. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks Department
MS3412
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Summary Course Contents Dr.ir. M.J.M. Hermans 4/0/0/0
Processing of Metals
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English MS4101 - Production of Materials, MS3031 - Computational Materials Science heat flow, fluid flow, dimensional analysis, boundary conditions Subjects covered include transport phenomena in metals processing. The module will focus on quantitative descriptions of processes using physical and material models in terms of fundamental and essential building blocks. Numerical approximation methods are discussed to obtain quantitative results and are related to process conditions and process performance. Microstructural evolution models are also included. These concepts are illustrated with selected case studies. The student is able to understand and to apply general principles of metals processes. More specifically the student is able to: - analyse metal process problems - apply (transport) equations to practical cases and problems - formulate a process problem in terms of mathematical equations - solve simplified problems in materials processing Lecture Course Material: D.R. Poirier and G.H.Geiger, Transport Phenomena in Materials Processing, TMS Warrendale USA, ISBN 087339-272-8: Chapters 2,3,4,7,8,10. References from literature: numerous books on Transport Phenomena MS3021 - Metals Science 50 % Written examination with problems (open book), 50 % course work, students have to pass both parts to pass the course 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering Page 18 of 186
Prerequisites Assessment Department
MS3421
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary
Developments in Production and Processing

Dr. J. Zhou Dr. J. Duszczyk 3/0/0/0 1 1 1 2 English Particular materials production, rapid solidification, compaction, sintering, powder injection moulding, full-density processing, and porous materials for biomedical applications.
Course Contents
Study Goals
The course concerns the fundamentals of the non-conventional materials production and processing technology to prepare particular metals and alloys of almost any compositions and to consolidate these materials into near-net-shape products for engineering applications or control the porosity of sintered materials for the bio-functionality of implants in the human body. It introduces the methods to produce advanced materials through atomisation, melt-spinning or spray deposition, the characterization of the initial materials such as particle size, size distribution, morphology and density, and the methods to convert the initial materials into engineered shapes such as compaction and powder injection moulding and to provide structural integration such as sintering. It details the mechanisms operating during full-density processing to enhance mechanical properties such as extrusion and isostatic pressing. It also explains the techniques to control porosity to tailor the physical and mechanical properties and allow tissues to grow into the porous implant. Qua materials, it covers a wide range of metals and alloys for engineering and medical applications. Upon satisfactory completion of the course, students should be able to: 1. recognise the capabilities and limitations of the advanced materials processing technology in comparison with the conventional technology; 2. select processing routes and process parameters for the end product meeting the specific performance requirements for engineering or medical applications; 3. predict microstructural evolution and dimensional changes occurring during each processing step and the performance of the product at the end of the processing chain, on the basis of a fundamental understanding of process physics and related metallurgy; 4. identify the faults as a result of improper material selection and processing and to propose solutions to the problem; 5. evaluate the gains in product performance against processing complexity.
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites Assessment Department
Lectures, plus a case study and plant tour Dictaat MS3421, lecture notes and recommended research articles MS3021 - Metals Science, MS4011 - Mechanical Properties, MS4101 - Production of Materials Closed-book written examination 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Page 19 of 186
MS3432
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Dr.ir. W.G. Sloof 0/0/2/2
Determination of Microstructure
Course Contents
Study Goals
3 4 3 Different, to be announced English Electron Back Scatter Diffraction, EBSD, Orientation Imaging Microscopy, Kikuchi diffraction patterns, Scanning Electron Microscopy, Texture, Misorientation, Coincidence site lattices, Grain boundaries, Sterographic projection, Pole figures, Orientation Distribution Functions. A modern technique to determine the microstructure of crystalline materials is Orientation Imaging Microscopy which is based on Electron Back Scatter Diffraction in a Scanning Electron Microscope. This technique enables to determine the microstucture of materials quantitatively in terms of: (i) spatial distribution of phases, (ii) size, shape and orientation of crystallite grains, (iii) misorientation between neighbouring grains, and (iv) texture. The course covers fundamental aspects of EBSD measurements, evaluation of collected data and analysis of results. The principles of Electron Back Scatter Diffraction and the generation of Kikuchi patterns. Methods of indexing the diffraction patterns and the determination of crystal orientation. Definitions of coordinate systems and their relation with Euler angles and space. Stereographic projection and representation of crystal orientations in pole figures. Construction of phase and Euler maps. Representation of grain orientions in Rodrgues-Frank space. Determination of misorientation between neighbouring grains. Special orientation relations: coincidence site lattice. Methods to determine grain size and shape, and texture. The student is able to use the physical principles of Electron Back Scatter Diffraction (EBSD) to explain quantitative determintion of materials microstructures. More specifically, the student is able to: Explain the principles of EBSD and the formation of Kikuchi patterens. Show how electron microscopes equipped with EBSD are built and operated. Describe how diffraction patterns are sampled, indexed and processed to crystal orientation images. Formulate how texture of materials is reperesented using pole figures. Explain the use of Euler angles and Euler space to characterize crystal orientations. Compute misorientations and orientation relations between neighboring grains. Illustrate the representation of EBSD data with the Rodrigues vector in Rodrigues-Frank space. Describe how orientation maps are constructed and how grain size and shapes are quantified Show how electron microscopes equipped with EBSD diffractometers are built and operated. Apply all the above to analyse the microstructure of a material from an EBSD measurement. Lecture and laboratory project. Operation of an electron microscope equipped with EBSD. Processing and analysis of EBSD measurement data. Instructions and guides are available on blackboard. References from literature: V. Randle, Microtexture Determination and its applications, 2nd edition, Maney Publishing, London, 2003; ISBN 1-902653-83-1. Oral exam (project, written report and oral exam). Hours per week: 2 lectures. Other hours: self study, lab project and report writing. The course includes a laboratory project (2 EC) involving an EBSD measurement of a material. Next, a set of diffraction patterns is collected. Then, the data are processed and analysed to determination the microstructure with great detail. The results of this project are presented in a written report and discussed at the oral examination. The assignments can be found on blackboard. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials
Assessment Remarks
Department
Page 20 of 186
MS3442
Relation between Properties and Microstructure

Prof.dr.ir. J. Sietsma Dr.ir. M. Janssen 4/0/0/0 1 1 1 2 English microstructure, mechanical properties, fatigue, magnetic properties The module consists of two parts: mechanical properties and magnetic properties. In the mechanical part a selection will be considered of properties such as strength, (fracture) toughness, fatigue and creep. The magnetic properties concern the following subjects: magnetic moments in materials, magnetic measurements, ferro-, paraand diamagnetism, hysteresis, Barkhausen effect, magnetostriction, domains, domain walls, kinetics of domain-wall processes, soft and hard magnetic materials, magnetic recording, magnetic methods in materials evaluation. The student is able to explain the effects of various different microstructural parameters on the mechanical and magnetic properties of metals.
Study Goals
More specifically with respect to mechanical properties, the student is able to: - describe how microstructural barriers affect the growth of short fatigue cracks and categorise the effect of crack length on fatigue limit - identify initiation sites for fatigue cracks: locations, loading conditions and development - identify the different stages in short fatigue crack growth and indicate effects of the microstructural unit size (e.g. grain size), corrosive environments and notches - illustrate the complexity of multiaxial fatigue in comparison with uniaxial fatigue and the effect of loading order on damage accumulation during mixed mode loading - explain different models for analysing short fatigue crack growth - elaborate on the significance of short fatigue cracks for lifetime predictions - explain the role of the deformation character (i.e. wavy or planar slip) on the fatigue limit and the consequences this has for various ultra fine-grained metals and metal alloys - elaborate on the microstructure of metals subjected to severe plastic deformation and on the subsequent effect of cyclic deformation (i.e. softening and hardening) - explain the nature of stress-strain hysteresis loops for ultra fine-grained metals on the basis of friction stresses and back stresses - identify the development of fatigue damage in ultra fine-grained metals, both on a macro-scopic and on a microscopic scale, and methods to delay this damage - describe current models for fatigue mechanisms in ultra fine-grained metals - interpret results from scientific journal papers, which means extracting principal ideas from extensive texts while dealing with incomplete and sometimes conflicting information More specifically with respect to magnetic properties, the student is able to: - describe the character of magenitisation of materials - explain the background and mechanism of magnetic measurements - identify the main types of magnetism - describe the magnetic processes determining the hysteresis loop and identify the main parameters describing the hysteresis loop - explain the occurrence of the Barkhausen effect - explain the characteristics of ferromagnetic domains, domain walls, and domain-wall motion - describe the most important charateristics of soft- and hard-magnetic materials, and the main applications - explain the mechanisms used for magnetic recording and storage - explain the mechanisms underlying the application of magnetic methods in materials research and characterisation Lecture Course material: - Mechanical properties: Review articles provided on demand - Magnetic properties: D. Jiles, Introduction to Magnetism and Magnetic Materials, ed. Chapman & Hall, 2nd edition, 1998, chapters 2.3-2.5, 3-8, 12-15 MS4041 - Structure of Materials, MS4081 - Mechanics of Materials, MS4011 - Mechanical Properties, MS3021 - Metals Science. Oral exam for the part on mechanical properties; written exam, open book, for the part on magnetic properties; 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Page 21 of 186
MS3452
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Summary Course Contents 2/0/0/0
Total Performance Approach: Case Studies

Dr.ir. J.M.C. Mol
Study Goals
1 2 1 2 English MS4161 (Designing (with) Materials) Materials in Design, Materials Processing in Design, Materials Selection, Process Selection case studies, Materials Processing, Materials Engineering. Materials in Design - Evolution of engineering materials - The design process - Engineering materials and their properties Materials selection charts-Materials selection: case studies; Materials processing and design - Materials Processing Selection Charts - Case studies: process selection - Data sources. The student is able to develop a systematic procedure for selecting materials and processes with best matches the requirements of a design More specifically, the student is able to: Integrate materials selection with other aspects of design Develop materials indices and/ or value functions to model design requirements Identify the main materials engineering aspects of materials and process selection. Apply all of the above in case studies representing simplified and real designs. Lecture Cambridge Engineering Selector (CES) Software Package Materials Selection in Mechanical Design, Michael F. Ashby, Butterworth-Heinemann ISBN 0 7506 4357 9 Lecture notes made available through Blackboard after class MS3021 (Metals Science); CH4011MS (Polymer science); CH4021MS (Ceramic Science); MS4011 (Mechanical Properties) - Presentation - Written report on 2 case studies (assignments) - Oral feedback session Materials and Process selection 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites Assessment
Design Content Department
Page 22 of 186
MS3461
Corrosion and Protection against Corrosion

Dr.ir. J.M.C. Mol Prof.dr. J.H.W. de Wit 4/0/0/0 1 1 1 2 English corrosion, protection against corrosion, corrosion principles, corrosion prevention, galvanic corrosion, intergranular corrosion, pitting corrosion, crevice corrosion, coatings, surface layers - Relevance of corrosion, costs to society - Definitions and electrochemical character of corrosion - General corrosion vs local forms of corrosion - Electrochemical Thermodynamics - Electrochemical Kinetics - Passivity - Galvanic Corrosion and intergranular corrosion - Pitting and Crevice Corrosion - Protection against corrosion The student is able to describe the electrochemical nature of corrosion processes, in his professional life to understand the risks hazards and costs due to corrosion phenomena and act upon it in making decisions on metals applications and to make an argumentative selection of materials classes ( steel, stainless steel, aluminium alloys, copper alloys) for given applications. More specifically, the student is able to: 1.derive and produce qualitative and semiquantitative polarisation diagrams for a corroding metal from a 1.simple set of data 2.compose polarisation diagrams for galvanic corrosion and for passive materials from a set of data 3.compose and use Pourbaix diagrams in making decisions on metals applications 4.calculate the corrosion current density of metals from quantitative polarisation diagrams 5.transform the corrosion current density into practical corrosion rates like mm/year 6.list the most important corrosion localised phenomena 7.describe the mechanisms of the most important localised corrosion phenomena 8.criticize a given description of a corrosion mechanism 9.select the technical best protection measures to prevent attack of metals in a given surrounding 10.criticize and judge a given materials application 11.discuss in a balanced way applied protective measures taking into account, risks for health, environment and costs Lectures Principles and Prevention of Corrosion, Second Edition 1996, van Denny A. Jones, ISBN 0-13-359993-0 Written exam In case of too few participants the written exam will be replaced by an oral exam. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks Department
MS3471
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents x/0/0/0
Modern Analysis Techniques & Authenticity Research

Prof.dr. J. Dik
Study Goals
1 1 Different, to be announced English Authenticity research, art objects, historical artefacts, materials analysis Precious historical artefacts have always been the subject of falsification. Forgeries can be identified as such by analysis of the materials used. This course studies the proces of materials analysis of artworks, including the sampling of the object, the analytical identififcation of materials and the historical interpretation of analysis results. The course has a highly practical orientation and usually includes a questioned art object from the art world. The student is able to: - give a general overview of archaeometric approaches in material cultural heritage - identify the archaeometric component of archaeological or art historical research questions - describe relevant analytical techniques in archaeometry - interprete analytical data in the archaeological and art historical context and discuss the findings with specialists from the cultural heritage domain Lecture Literature Presentation 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Page 23 of 186
MS4011
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Summary Course Contents Dr.ir. M. Janssen Dr.ir. L. Nicola 0/0/4/0
Mechanical Properties
Study Goals
3 3 3 4 English MS3442 - Relation between Properties & Microstructure crack growth, fracture toughness, fatigue, environmentally assisted cracking, creep, mechanical properties - Stable Crack Growth: R-curve concept, R-curve determination, J-R curve - Fracture Toughness: Ductile and brittle fracture, Microstructural aspects of fracture toughness - Fatigue: Fatigue crack growth, Fatigue crack initiation - Environmentally Assisted Cracking: Mechanisms in metals and polymers, Test methods - Creep: Creep in crystalline solids, Creep fracture in metals The student is able to identify a number of common mechanical phenomena that cause material failure in terms of the mechanisms that underly these phenomena and the conditions for which such behaviour can be expected. Moreover for a number of phenomena the student can identify experimental techniques for determining material behaviour and / or can make simple failure predictions. More specifically, the student is able to: 1. explain the rising R-curve concept and the methods for R-curve determination 2. compute the maximum amount of stable crack growth and the critical K, G or J value 3. distinguish the microstructural aspects of brittle and ductile fracture mechanisms 4. identify the principal toughening mechanisms in metals, ceramics and polymers 5. explain the effect of anisotropy on toughness 6. explain the effect on toughness of the cleanliness of a number of specific metal alloys 7. illustrate effective toughening strategies for a number of ferrous alloys, non-ferrous alloys, ceramics, polymers and composites 8. identify the effects of delta K and load ratio (crack closure) on fatigue crack growth rate 9. predict fatigue lifetime for constant amplitude loading 10. illustrate the effect of peak loads on fatigue crack growth rate 11. explain methods to predict fatigue lifetime under variable amplitude loading 12. describe the relation between the fatigue limit and the fatigue threshold 13. describe the effect of notches on the growth of short fatigue cracks 14. describe the square root area parameter model for predicting fatigue limits 15. list the principle models for environmentally assisted cracking of metals 16. illustrate the mechanisms for physical and chemical environmentally assisted cracking in polymers 17. explain the principle of time-to-failure testing of environmentally assisted cracking 18. explain crack growth rate testing of environmentally assisted cracking and identify experimental pitfalls 19. calculate lifetime of environmentally assisted cracking under constant load 20. indicate the practical significances of the threshold stress intensity and growth rate data for environmentally assisted cracking 21. select the relevant experimental data and use this to calculate a creep activation energy 22. identify the different mechanisms by which creep can occur in crystalline solids, including the conditions that lead to this creep 23. explain the conditions for which superplastic deformation can occur 24. explain the principle and the use of deformation mechanism maps 25. perform extrapolations of creep rupture data Lectures - Fracture Mechanics, M. Janssen, J. Zuidema and R.J.H. Wanhill, 2nd edition, DUP (2002) - Collection of Exercises on Fracture Mechanics, available on Blackboard - Reader based on the book Deformation and Fracture Mechanics of Engineering Materials, R.W. Hertzberg, available on Blackboard and the online ordering system - Slides (including notes) on Blackboard MS4081 - Mechanics of Materials Written examination during which the book Fracture Mechanics, the reader and the hand-outs provided may be consulted. Other forms of information, such as notes or worked-out problems, are not allowed! 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Page 24 of 186
MS4021
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Dr.ir. W.G. Sloof Dr. A.J. Bottger 4/4/0/0
Structure Characterisation
Course Contents
1 2 1 2 3 English Crystallography, Composition and Microsctructure, X-ray diffraction, electron diffraction, electron microscopy, X-ray microanalysis, Auger electron spectroscopy, X-ray Photoelectron Spectroscopy, Secundary Mass Spectroscopy, Rutherford Backscattering Spectroscopy. Microstructure characterization of materials through interaction between x-ray photons, electrons and ion beams and solids. Emission of element characteristic x-ray radiation. Auger electrons and photoelectrons. Phenomena such as: absorption, elastic and inelastic scattering. Sputtering with ions and depth profiling. Concepts such as depth, spectral and lateral resolution and detection limits. Various analytical techniques and their applications: electron microscopy, x-ray microanalysis, Auger electron spectroscopy, photoelectron spectroscopy, ion scattering spectroscopy, mass spectrometry and Rutherford backscattering spectroscopy. X-ray and electron diffraction to determine the crystallographic structure and lattice defects of materials. Laue equations and Braggs Law. Real and recipical space. Structure factor. Wave propagation of electrons. Methods to determine microstructure and chemical composition of materials from diffraction data and emission spectra.
Study Goals
The student is be able to apply the physical principles of diffraction and X-ray, electron and ion spectroscopy to explain materials analysis techniques. More specifically, the student is able to: Explain X-ray and electron diffraction methods to determine the crystal structures of solids. Formulate the relation between the lattice structure in real space and recipical space. Describe the elastic and inelassic interaction between X-ray, electron, and ion beams with solids. Formulate how X-rays, electrons and ions are generated from a solid. Demonstrate how the enery, wavelength or mass of the paricles generated from a solid is used to characterize the chemistry and microstructure of materials. Show how electron microscopes, diffractometers, and X-ray, electron and mass spectrometers are built and operated. Apply all the above to practical cases inwhich analysis the chemical composition and microstructure of materials are determined. Lecture Operation of surface analysis instruments and data acquisition and processing. Extensive lecture notes are available on Blackboard. References from literature: T.L. Alford, L.C. Feldman, J.W. Mayer, Fundamentals of Nanoscale Film Analysis, Springer New York, 2007, ISBN 13: 978-0-387-29260-1 Written exam. Two parts written exam (you may use your book during the exam). Mean of the marks for both parts; lab classes reporting should be sufficient. Hours per week: 4 lectures, practicals in 2nd education period. Other hours: self study. Course includes lab classes (1 EC). 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Assessment Remarks Department
Page 25 of 186
MS4031
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Course Contents Prof.dr. I.M. Richardson 4/0/0/0
Waves
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English A knowledge of differential equations and methods for their solution. Vibrations, waves, reflection, refraction, diffraction, tranmission, propagation, damping, fourier analysis An introduction to wave behaviour is given focusing on important physical aspects of relevance to materials science. The course is mathematically based and covers aspects of wave structure, propagation and attenuation in different media. The transmission of energy and mass are discussed. Reflection, transmission refraction, and diffraction are addressed and an introduction to electromagnetic waves is given. The course provides a grounding in the basic concepts employed in wave descriptions of physical phenomena. The student is able to recognise and describe the properties and behaviour of vibrations and waves and where appropriate, to relate thee descriptions to material properties and behaviour. More specifically, the student is able to: 1. recognise and describe the essential features of vibratory systems 2. describe the influence of damping on wave and vibratory behaviour 3. indicate the validity of approximations for light and heavy damping of wave and vibratory systems 4. recognise and reproduce the essential features of wave equations 5. derive general solutions for the wave equation and specific solutions subject to prescribed boundary conditions 6. recognise and explain the physical meaning of functional components of such solutions 7. apply Fourier analysis to the components of a periodic disturbance 8. describe electromagnetic waves and their features 9. explain reflection, refraction and diffraction phenomena 10. recognise vibratory and wave descriptions in material behaviour Lectures / self study Iain G Main, Vibrations and Waves in Physics, 3rd Edition, Cambridge University Press, 1994, ISBN: 0 521 44701 1. Course assignments (50%) and written examination (50%). Students must pass both the examination and the assignments to pass the course. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Page 26 of 186
MS4041
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Summary Dr.ir. S.E. Offerman 4/0/0/0
Structure of Materials
Course Contents
1 1 2 3 English Properties of Materials (MS4081), Production of Materials (MS4101) The module provides fundamental and emperical knowledge about the characteristics of the structure of materials and the evolution of the structure during the production process and the application of the materials that are part of the material classes of metals, polymers, and ceramics. Furthermore, the module concerns the application of this knowlegde to the design of new materials and the optimization of the production route of materials. The contents of this course related to the three material classes of metals, polymers, and ceramics is as follows: Contents Metals: * The theories describing the nucleation, growth, and coarsening kinetics of grains during diffusional phase transformations and during the precipitation reactions in metals. * The application of these theories to describe the evolution of the structure of steel and aluminium during the production process and the application. Contents Polymers: * Polymerisation - free radical and condensation polymerisation, Shultz-Flory distribution, Mol. weight averages * Characterisation - solution properties, Flory-Huggins equation, chain statistics, endpoint distance, persistence length and chain stiffness, viscometry, intrinsic viscosity, osmotic pressure, GPC * Structure - amorphous and crystalline structures, DSC, DMA, volume temperature diagram, Glass transition and melting point, lamellar thickness, crystallisation kinetics, relation to molecular structure Contents Ceramics: * Structure of crystalline ceramics and glasses * Electronic structure - metals, semiconductors, insulators * Optical transitions, doping, charge carrier statistics * Point defects in ceramics, defect reactions and equilibria * Transport and mobility of electrons and ions in solids * Synthesis methods for ceramics and thin films The student is able to identify the governing physical principles of the formation of the structure of materials, and is able to apply these principles in the design and optimisation of the processing routes for the production of materials. This includes identifying the most important quantities describing the structure of a material, the basic mechanisms for (micro)structure formation, and the relation between the structure and selected properties. For the Structure of Metals the student is able to: 1.formulate expressions for the activation energy and rate of nucleation during homogeneous and heterogeneous nucleation processes for different geometries of the critical nucleus. 2.determine the driving pressure for nucleation and the equilibrium concentrations of the phases from a molar Gibbs free energy diagram. 3.formulate expressions for the diffusion-controlled growth rate of a grain depending on the shape of the grain and the type of interface, i.e. (semi-)coherent or incoherent 4.apply the concepts of the molar Gibbs free energy, phase diagrams, nucleation mechanisms and growth mechanisms to the phase transformations kinetics during the processing of a metal, and use Temperature-Time-Transformation diagrams and Continuous-Cooling-Transformation diagrams in relation to phase transformations. 5.describe the principle of the Gibbs-Thompson effect and apply it in calculating the phase transformation kinetics 6.apply the physical concepts for phase transformations to the microstructural formation processes that take place during the production and heat treatment of steel 7.apply the physical concepts for precipitation reactions to the microstructural formation processes that take place during the production and heat treatment of aluminium alloys For the Structure of Polymers the student is able to: 1. understand the possibilities and limitations of various polymer synthesis techniques. 2. know and recognise some of the standard polymer chemical structures. 3. be able to explain what impact synthesis and chemical structure has on polymer material properties & selection for application. 4. gain insight in the characterisation of polymers via various methods and the relation with the underlying polymer chain statistics. 5. be able to explain how crystalline and amorphous structures are formed, how this can be modified and controlled, and to relate this to the thermo-mechanical properties of polymers. For the Structure of Ceramics the student is able to: 1. identify and draw hcp- and fcc-based crystal structures of ionic materials and perform simple geometric calculations 2. formulate defect-chemical reaction equations for ionic solids using the Krger-Vink notation 3. calculate reaction equilibria and discuss the factors that affect these equilibria 4. describe the differences between the electronic structures of metals, semiconductors and insulators 5. explain how defects affect optical properties, mass transport and charge transport 6. discuss pros and cons of various synthesis methods for ceramic materials Lectures D.A. Porter, K.E. Easterling, and M. Sherif, Phase transformations in metals and alloys, Chapman & Hill, 3rd edition, 2009, chapter 5 Introduction to Polymers, R.J. Young and P.A. Lovell, 2nd Ed., Chapman & Hall 1997 Y.-M. Chiang, D.P. Birnie and W.D. Kingery, Physical ceramics: Principles for ceramic science and engineering, Wiley & Sons, 2nd edition, 1996, ch. 1 except pp. 52-67, ch. 2.1, ch. 3 (only parts treated in class, up to pag. 236) Slides used during ceramics classes and handout "An Introduction into the Electronic Structure of Semiconductors" Thermodynamics and Kinetics (MS4061) Written exam. Open book. Lecture notes may be used during the exam, but not worked out examples or old exams 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Study Goals
Page 27 of 186
MS4051
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Summary Course Contents Study Goals Dr. M.H.F. Sluiter 4/4/0/0
Physics of Materials
1 2 1 2 3 English MS3011 - Semiconductor Principles and Devices physics of materials, Schroedinger equation, operators, uncertainty relations, transitions, atoms, bonds, metals, magnetism Introduction quantum mechanics, particle-wave dualism, Schroedinger equation, operators, uncertainty relations, hydrogen atom, chemical bond, free electron theory, Maxwell-Boltzmann and Fermi-Dirac distributions, magnetism The student is able to understand the basic principles of quantum mechanics and to apply these basics to the physics of materials. More specifically, the student is able to: 1. set-up and solve the Schoedinger equation for simple cases (amongst others for a free particle and a particle in a square well) 2. describe the underlying principles that lead to electron configurations (atoms) 3. understand the relation between operators, physical properties and uncertainty relations 4. determine density of states for systems of identical and non-identical particles 5. predict selected properties of metals on the basis of the free electron model (for instance specific heat of electrons, Fermi level) 6. describe selected processes on the basis of the free electron model (for instance Schottky effect, thermionic emission) 7. understand physics behind magnetism (macroscopic, microscopic description): paramagnetism, (anti)ferromagnetism, domains, hysteresis loop Lecture Textbook: J.R. Hook and H.E. Hall, Solid State Physics, 2nd Edition, John Wiley & Sons. MS4031 - Waves Written exam 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites Assessment Department
Page 28 of 186
MS4061
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Prof.dr.ir. J. Sietsma 4/0/0/0
Thermodynamics and Kinetics
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English Structure of Materials (MS4041) Properties of Materials (MS4081) Production of Materials (MS4101) thermodynamics, Gibbs free energy, binary alloys, phase diagram, chemical potential, diffusion, Fick's laws, (semi-)coherent interfaces, incoherent interfaces The module introduces concepts of thermodynamics and kinetics in materials that are essential for understanding the formation and behaviour of materials. Thermodynamical subjects are, a.o.: Gibbs free energy, chemical potential, ideal and real solutions, phase diagrams, Gibbs phase rule, Gibbs-Thomson effect, ternary systems, phase transformations. Kinetics subjects are, a.o.: atomic mechanism of diffusion, substitutional and interstitial diffusion, high-diffusivity paths, diffusion in ternary alloys. Related subjects that are treated are crystal interfaces and microstructural phenomena. The student is able to explain the essential features of thermodynamic quantities, kinetic phenomena and interface characteristics relevant to metallic microstructures, and to apply these to the processes that determine the microstructure. More specifically, the student is able to: 1. formulate the essentials of the concepts of Gibbs free energy and chemical potential, and to formulate their relevance to the atomic behaviour in crystalline structures 2. apply the models for ideal and regular solutions to problems concerning the behaviour of binary alloys 3. read binary phase diagrams and to explain the relation between phase diagrams and free energy vs. composition curves 4. apply the Gibbs phase rule 5. identify the main features of ternary phase diagrams 6. formulate the process of atomic diffusion in a crystalline structure 7. apply Ficks first and second laws, formulated either in terms of concentration gradients or in terms of chemical-potential gradients to diffusion- and transformation-related problems 8. formulate the essentials of interdiffusion in substitutional binary alloys, and relate these to the Kirkendall effect 9. identify the significance of high-diffusion paths for the kinetics processes in metallic microstructures 10. formulate the essentials of different types of interfaces between grains of either the same of different crystalline structures 11. involve the effects of local strains in the description of the characteristics of interfaces 12. apply the characteristics of interfaces to the formation of second-phase particles 13. formulate the role of interfaces in the kinetics of mixed-mode phase transformations Lectures D.A. Porter and K.E. Easterling, Phase transformations in metals and alloys, Chapman & Hill, 3rd edition, 2009, chapters 1,2,3 Written exam, open book 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Page 29 of 186
MS4071
Responsible Instructor Instructor Assistent Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents
Materials in Art and Design

Prof.dr. J. Dik Drs. N.C.F. Groot J.A. Woelders-van der Burg 4/0/0/0
1 1 1 2 English Culture, art, archaeology, history, degradation, authenticity In recent years materials science is increasingly applied to the study of art and archaeological objects. This field is known as archaeometry and it includes three research directions. First of all, authenticity studies on art objects rely on material analysis of the object. Second, artworks suffer from degradation studies that need to be understood at a materials science level. Third, stylistic developments in art history can often be related to the development of new materials or production techniques. The main challenge in this field is to bridge the interface between the humanities and the sciences. Interpreting the findings of materials science in a non-scientific, historical context is the crucial skill in this course. Besides literature study and lecturing, the course includes excursions to art and archaeological collections. The students is able to: - give a general overview of archaeometric approaches in material cultural heritage - identify the archaeometric component of archaeological or art historical research questions - describe relevant analytical techniques in archaeometry - interprete analytical data in the archaeological and art historical context and discuss the findings with specialists from the cultural heritage domain Lecture After an introductory part, the class will work on a case from the cultural heritage field, usually provided by a museum conservator or curator. Presentation Laboratory work: depending on the case different analytical techniques may be applied (light microscopy, electron microscopy, x-ray powder diffraction). 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Study Goals
Page 30 of 186
MS4081
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Summary Course Contents Dr.ir. M. Janssen Prof.dr. S.J. Picken Dr.ir. L. Nicola 2/2/0/0
Mechanics of Materials
1 2 1 2 3 English MS4011 - Mechanical Properties of Materials Elasticity, plasticity, viscoelasticity, strain rate, fracture mechanics, orientation, melt, entanglement, ageing, polymer glass, liquid crystallinity, mechanical properties, polymer properties, material properties Part on Mechanical Properties - Multiaxial stress and strain, elastic and plastic material behaviour, strain hardening, plastic instability, effects of strain rate and temperature, super plasticity - Lineair-elastic fracture mechanics: stress intensity, effects of crack tip plasticity and stress state, energy release rate, determination of critical values - Elastic-plastic fracture mechanics: J integral, crack tip opening displacement, determination of critical values Part on Polymers - Mechanical Properties: modulus, strength, Time-temperature superposition, WLF equation, Maxwell, Kelvin-Voigt and Burgers' model, Bolzmann superposition principle, brittle-ductile behaviour, DMA, secondary relaxations - Introduction to processing: injection moulding operation window, extruder-diagram, thermal conduction Part on Mechanical Properties The student is able to employ mechanical quantities such as stress, strain and basic fracture mechanical quantities to describe elastic and plastic deformation and the onset of crack growth in solids. Furthermore, the student is able to calculate basic elastic and plastic material response and fracture behaviour based on the relevant material properties and understands how to experimentally determine these material properties. More specifically, the student is able to: 1. explain the concepts of stress and strain, distinguishing normal and shear components on the one hand and principal components on the other 2. transform multiaxial stress and strain states to a rotated set of axes, both analytically and using Mohr's circle 3. formulate the concepts of engineering stress and strain and true stress and strain 4. quantify the relation between stress and strain for an elastically deforming isotropic material 5. predict the stress state that leads to the onset of plasticity and calculate the subsequent direction of plastic strain for isotropic material using the flow criteria of Tresca and Von Mises 6. formulate the concepts of effective stress and effective strain 7. explain experimental methods to quantify plastic material behaviour for different stress states, more specifically the strain hardening behaviour of the material 8. predict plastic instability for uniaxial and biaxial stress states 9. identify the principles and limitations of the fracature mechanical concepts stress intensity, energy release rate, J integral and crack tip opening displacement 10. explain the effects of crack tip plasticity and stress state on fracture behaviour 11. explain accepted experimental procedures to obtain critical values for fracture mechanics parameters 12. analyse a basic fracture mechanical problem on the basis of material properties, geometry and mechanical load Part on Properties of Polymers The student is able to: 1. describe the complex mechanics of polymers and how this is based on polymer dynamics 2. explain the ingredients of the Maxwell, Kelvin-Voigt and Burgers model and their application for modelling of polymer mechanics 3. explain the principles of dynamic mechanical analysis, and how the obtained results are related to the underlying polymer dynamics and structure 4. apply time-temperature superposition, and to explain how this arises from free-volume considerations 5. apply the Boltzmann superposition principle to describe polymer behaviour under complex loading situations 6. understand the specific nature of polymer processing, how this is related to viscosity, molecular mass, thermal conduction, and how it relates to the mechanical properties of the resulting product Lectures (including exercises) - Chapters 1 - 4 of Metal Forming by W.F. Hosford and M. Caddell. provided as a reader - Fracture Mechanics by M. Janssen, J. Zuidema and R.J.H. Wanhill, 2nd edition, DUP (2002) - Collection of Exercises on Fracture Mechanics, available on Blackboard - Introduction to Polymers, R.J. Young and P.A. Lovell, 2nd Ed., Chapman & Hall 1997 Suggested additional literature on polymers: - Materials Science of Polymers for Engineers by T.A. Osswald and G. Menges, Hanser Publishers, Mnchen - Gert Strobl, The Physics of Polymers, 2nd ed. Written examination during which the study material may be consulted. Other forms of information, such as notes or worked-out problems, are not allowed! 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Study Goals
Assessment Department
Page 31 of 186
MS4091
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Course Contents Prof.dr. I.M. Richardson Dr.ir. M.J.M. Hermans 4/0/0/0
Material Connections
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English Basic knowledge of the structure of metals. Welding, NDT, Adhesive bonding, Mechanical Fastening, Joining, Fusion Welding, Heat Flow, Arc Joining technologies are of critical importance to construction and assembly of virtually all components, and structures found in modern society. This module provides an introduction to the engineering aspects of joining techniques including mechanical fasteners, fusion welding, brazing and soldering and adhesive bonding. The influence of joining on material properties and the suitability of the choice of joining techniques for selected applications is addressed. Methods for assessing the quality of joints are also discussed, with a focus on the non-destructive methods most commonly employed for welded and adhesively bonded structures. The student is able to describe the basic principles, advantages and limitations of different joining processes, indicate appropriate testing techniques and describe the influence of welding thermal cycles on common structural materials. More specifically, the student is able to: 1.describe available joining methods including welding, brazing, soldering, mechanical connections and adhesive bonding 2.tell on common engineering applications for joining technologies 3.describe common none destructive testing techniques and assess their suitability for a range of joining related tasks 4.describe the main features of common joining methods 5.identify advantages and limitations pertaining to different joining methods and apply such an appraisal to process selection 6.identify and explain the influence of thermal and mechanical actions pertaining to the joining of common engineering materials 7.describe common types of joining defects and be able to describe potential influences on the resultant connection 8.identify causes and describe the affects of residual stresses generated during fusion welding 9.explain the variable nature of common thermal joining methods and identify factors contributing to process variance 10.describe the basic chemistry of common adhesives and recognise the influence of surface condition on bond formation Lectures / self study lecture notes for the course are available through blackboard den Ouden, G. and Hermans, M.J.M. Welding Technology, VSSD, Delft, 2009. References from literature: Kou, S. Welding Metallurgy, Wiley & Sons, 2nd Edition. ISBN 0-471-43491-4 AWS Welding Handbook, American Welding Society, Volumes 1 to 5. Norrish, J. Advanced Welding Processes, IOP Publishing Ltd., 1992, ISBN 0-85274-326-2 Lancaster, J. The Physics of Welding, 2nd Edition, Pergamon Press, 1986, ISBN 0-08-034075-X 50% by project 50% by examination (written exam) The examination will be 2 hour closed book. Students must pass the examination to pass the course. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Assessment
Department
Page 32 of 186
MS4101
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Summary Course Contents Study Goals
From Ore to Plate: Production of Materials

Prof.dr. I.M. Richardson Dr.ir. R.H. Petrov 0/4/0/0 2 2 2 3 English MS3021 (Metals Science), MS4011 (Mechanical Properties), MS3412 (Processing of Metals) Aluminium, steel, aluminium production, steel production, aluminium alloys , hot rolling, casting, casting technology. Casting Technology of (semi)-continuous casting of aluminium alloys; Hot rolling technology of steels; Insight in metallurgical processes during casting of aluminium alloys and hot rolling of steels. The student is able to understand and to explain general principles of metals production processes More specifically, the student is able to: 1. describe relationships between process parameters and microstructure and their properties 2. apply those relationships 3. link the relationships to material models 4. identify steps to optimise process conditions with regard to quality, properties and energy consumption Lecture Course material: Syllabus Continuous Casting of Aluminium Alloys (made available on Blackboard) Selected papers and review articles from literature (made available on Blackboard) Lecture notes made available through Blackboard after class References from literature: J.Beddoes, M.J. Bibby, Principles of Metal Manufacturing Processes, Arnold, ISBN 0340 73162 1 MS4081 (Properties of Materials) Written examination. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Page 33 of 186
MS4111
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents Prof.dr. G.C.A.M. Janssen 0/0/0/4
Thin Film Materials
4 4 4 5 English thin films, coatings, low friction coatings, film deposition, film microstructure, film stress, microelectronic structure, MEMS structure The course Thin Film Materials consists of 14 lectures: 1.Introduction, PVD 2.CVD, reactive sputterdeposition 3.Adsorption 4.Thermodynamics 5.LEED, RHEED etc. 6.Surface diffusion 7.STM hands on (lab class) 8. AFM- nano indenter demo (lab class) 9. Thin film growth 10. In-situ diagnostics 11. Hard coatings + assignments 12. Low friction coatings +assignments 13. Semiconductors 14. Stress in coatings The student is able to discuss the relations deposition parameters - microstructure and microstucture - properties. More specifically, the student is able to: 1. reproduce the various vacuum deposition technologies 2. apply thermodynamics to surface tension and adsorption 3. explain nucleation and film growth in UHV 4. describe the various techniques used for surface characterization 5. reproduce, and comment on the prevailing ideas on hardness of coatings 6. list several low friction coatings and the measurements on these coatings 7. describe the fabrication techniques used in micro-electronics and MEMS and explain the needs and limitations of these techniques 8. reproduce the prevailing theories on size effects in thin films 9. reproduce the prevailing theories on stress in thin films and is able to discuss the research literature on stress in thin films Lectures for information retrieval Chapter 2 of "Thin Film Materials" by L.B.Freund and S.Suresh, pp 1-85. Key references quoted by Freund and Suresh will be anounced on Blackboard prior to the course. written exam Includes a visit to the thin films deposition lab. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Study Goals
Page 34 of 186
MS4121
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents Dr.ir. M.J.M. Hermans x/x/0/0
Practicals Materials Science
Study Goals
1 2 1 2 Different, to be announced English materials science, characterisation techniques A research-like subject involving techniques such as microscopy, XRD, SEM, temperature measurements, dilatometry, welding and corrosion. Sample Preparation and Metallographic Microscopy; 4 hrs. Introduction in the use and application of Scanning Electron Microscopy and Energy Dispersive X-ray Spectroscopy in materials research; 8 hrs, lab report. Microstructure evolution during welding of unalloyed steel (Welding, temperature measurement, dilatometry, microscopy, microstructure evaluation, CCT diagrams); 16 hrs, written report. Corrosion, electro-chemistry and materials selection Case studies; 28 hrs, lab report, presentation. X-ray diffraction; 24 hrs, lab report. The student is able to select techniques for materials/process characterisation, can describe those techniques, specify the physical principles and can interpret the obtained results. More specifically, the students is able to: use light microscopy for materials characterisation. This includes sample preparation and selection of appropriate etching agents, describe the principles and justify the use of scanning electron microscopy and energy dispersive x-ray spectroscopy in materials research and is able to analyse the data, describe the principles of the x-ray diffraction technique and analyse the data, describe a number of joining techniques, perform temperature measurements during welding and extract cooling rates. He/she is able to relate this data to the microstructure of the material, derive information on phase transformations from dilatometry experiments, compare the results to CCT diagrams and correlate the data with the observed microstructure and the phenomena occurring during welding and heat treatments, identify corrosion mechanisms and quantify parameters which influence the corrosion rate. Practicals Computer use for data evaluation of XRD, control of experimental set-ups, reports. Manuals of the lab classes will be made available on Blackboard. The manual should be studied before the start of the classes. Various (see 'Course Contents') 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Department
Page 35 of 186
MS4131NS
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Dr. M.H.F. Sluiter x/0/0/0
Solid State Physics 2
Course Contents
Study Goals
1 1 Different, to be announced English Computational Materials Science MS3031 or equivalent (1st year MSc level courses covering quantum mechanics, statistical physics, and solid state physics). Computer modelling of materials. Quantum mechanical basis for materials properties and behaviour. Explanations for trends in materials properties. Modern modelling techniques. Simulation of materials structure, change, and properties. Student computer projects. 1. Universal equation of state for metals. 2. structure maps. 3. The diatomic molecule. 4. Real space tight-binding electronic structure models. 5. Band gaps: origins and consequences. 6. s-p bonding and a case study in silicon. 7. Free electron theory; Properties of free electron metals. 8. The transition metals; Structural stability of compounds. 9. Modern quantitative theory; Where band theory breaks down. 10. Individual computer lab. The student is able to predict and explain basic physical properties of solids based on real space electronic structure models. More specifically, the student is able to: 1.reformulate the equation of state in terms of dimensionless parameters, and relate to each other the cohesive energy, bulk modulus, and volume per atom for the elemental solids 2.explain the interatomic bonding in terms of tight-binding Hamiltonian and relate it to the concepts of covalency, ionicity, and bond order 3.explain and derive the Bloch theorem for the linear chain and ring configurations 4.derive the band structure and density of states of simple crystals in terms of tight-binding parameters 5.relate band energy to bond energy and stability, such as relevant for Jahn-Teller and other distortion effects in molecules and crystals 6.apply the moment theorem to predict whether ordering or clustering will occur in solid solutions 7.explain Friedel oscillations and relate these to the RKKY model for magnetic coupling and the occurrence of long period superstructures in certain alloys 8.explain and predict the occurrence of band gaps in crystalline solids 9.apply the free electron model for the prediction of the properties of "normal" metals 10.apply the Friedel tight-binding model to the properties of transition metals and alloys 11.use the basic properties of s-p-d hybridization to explain and rationalize the occurrence and stability of compounds and their most likely crystal structures 12.identify situations in which band theory is likely to fail Note: The grade is the average of homework assignments that test the learning objectives. Lectures and computer projects. Extensive. Some of the exercises will benefit from the ability to use a computer algebra program of your choice (maple, mathematica, octave, etc.) or some low-level programming (C, fortran, basic, etc.) Some lecture notes are available on Blackboard/hand-outs. References from literature: "Electronic Structure of Materials", by A.P. Sutton (Oxford Science Publishers 1996), ISBN 0-19851754-8. Oral exam + project presentation (oral examination, short written reports of the computer projects, one short presentation in front of fellow students for effectively communicating the results of one of the computer projects). Students should design modeling plans. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Design Content Department
Page 36 of 186
MS4141TU
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents Dr.ir. M. Janssen Dr.ir. L. Nicola Non, self study
Fracture Mechanics
None (Self Study) 1 Exam by appointment English Stress Intensity Factor, Energy Release Rate, J integral, Crack Tip Opening Displacement, Fatigue, Sustained Load Fracture, Fracture behaviour Linear-elastic fracture mechanics: Concepts Stress Intensity Factor K and Energy Release Rate G; Test Methods Elastic-plastic Fracture Mechanics: Concepts J integral and Crack Opening Displacement; Test Methods Crack growth concepts: Fatigue, Sustained Load Fracture, Stress Corrosion Fracture Mechanics in Metals: Effect of Material Behaviour The student is able to select a suitable approach for a basic fracture mechanical problem and can analyse this problem on the basis of material properties, geometry and mechanical load. Furthermore, he is able to interpret results of accepted fracture mechanical test procedures. More specifically, the student is able to: 1. formulate the significance of fracture mechanics 2. identify the principles, application ranges, limitations and interrelations of the fracture mechanical concepts stress intensity, energy release rate, J integral and crack tip opening displacement 3. explain standardised experimental procedures to obtain critical values for the fracture mechanics parameters stress intensity, energy release rate, J integral and crack tip opening displacement 4. select stress intensity solutions for basic geometries, taking finite specimen size and free surface corrections into account 5. explain the effects of crack tip plasticity and stress state on fracture behaviour 6. explain the rising R-curve concept and the methods for R-curve determination and compute the maximum amount of stable crack growth and the critical K or G value 7. explain the Feddersen concept for plane stress testing and compute plane stress residual strength 8. analyse a basic fracture mechanical problem on the basis of material properties, geometry and mechanical load 9. identify the effects on fatigue crack growth rate of load, load ratio and load variations 10. predict fatigue lifetime for constant amplitude loading and explain methods to predict fatigue lifetime under variable amplitude loading 11. explain the principles of time-to-failure and growth rate testing for environmentally assisted cracking, identify experimental pitfalls and indicate the practical significance of this testing 12. predict lifetime for environmentally assisted cracking under constant load This module should be done by self study, i.e. no lectures are scheduled. Contact the lecturer if you have any questions. -) The book "Fracture Mechanics" by M. Janssen, J. Zuidema and R.J.H. Wanhill, 2nd edition, DUP (2002), available at VSSD. This course covers chapters 1 to 7, 9 and 10, with the exception of: - The Weight Function Method (p. 52); - Section 7.5: The KIc Specimen Size Requirement; - Stress Ratio Effect on Fatigue Threshold Stress Intensity Range (p. 221-222); - Section 9.8: Fatigue Crack Initiation. -) A collection of "Exercises on Fracture Mechanics", available on Blackboard Written examinations are scheduled twice a year. During the examination the book Fracture Mechanics may be consulted. Other forms of information, such as notes or worked-out problems, are not allowed! 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Study Goals
Page 37 of 186
MS4151
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Dr. Y. Yang 0/4/0/0
Recycling Engineering Materials
Course Contents
Study Goals
2 2 2 3 English General knowledge of materials science and engineering Inorganic chemistry Engineering materials, materials cycle, materials scarcity, sustainability, secondary resources, materials recycling, recycling technology and processes, metals, metal scrap, polymers and plastics, composites, ceramics, glasses, end of life (EOL) products, waste, waste management, environment. Recycling of engineering materials from secondary resources is important both for environment protection and for a sustainable materials supply, and it closes the loop of the whole materials cycle. The main objective of this module is to give students with both engineering and science background a proper understanding of recycling as part of complete materials production and supply chain, and a general overview of available technologies and current practice. This module will cover the recycling issues of the common engineering materials such as metals (ferrous and nonferrous metals, alloys), polymers/plastics, composites, ceramics, and glasses. In the module five aspects of materials recycling will be discussed: (1) overview of common engineering materials, (2) resources and pre-treatment technologies, (3) recycling processes and best available technologies, (4) product quality, energy consumption and economic analysis, (5) environmental impacts and waste management. The students are able to obtain an overview about the importance and key steps for recycling of major engineering materials, and to explain in general why and how to recycle major engineering materials. In particular the students should be able to: (1) understand the loop of the materials cycle and the role of recycling to close the loop of the cycle. (2) describe how major engineering materials are recycled: the best available technologies and industrial practice. (3) identify the sources and destinations for materials recycling. (4) analyse the economics and social and environmental impact of recycling. Lectures complemented by case studies and industrial excursion to a Dutch metals recycling company. Compilation of selected books chapters and papers, handouts. Compilation of various book chapters and journal/web articles in digital pdf form. 70% written exam and 30% case studies and an industrial tour. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Reader Assessment Department
MS4161
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Prof.dr. I.M. Richardson x/x/0/0
Engineering with Materials
10
Study Goals
Education Method Assessment
Department
1 2 1 Different, to be announced English Wiskunde: analyse, differentiaal vergelijkingen, lineaire algebra Mechanica: sterkteleer, statica Natuur- en Scheikunde: VWO-niveau Materiaalkunde op "Callister niveau" Materials: properties, structure, processing, selection and application, in the context of an assignment. Assignments are carried out in groups of 2 to 4 students. Projects can involve any aspect of materials science and engineering, including material design, the link between structure and properties, material characterisation and/or material application, with emphasis on design or engineering applications. The assignments begin in the first period and run concurrently with subjects which provide necessary background information. Assignments are designed to stretch the knowledge and understanding of important aspects of materials science and engineering. Aspects cover materials under extreme conditions, such as high temperatures (e.g., power generation), low temperatures (arctic and cryogenic materials), bio materials or materials with special properties (e.g. fire resistant or light weight). Projects and groups are assigned based on the background of students. Groups may change projects with the agreement of others and the project supervisors. Each project group is expected to deliver a report describing the project content, execution and outcomes, highlighting material science and engineering aspects of the project. The reports represents 80% of the course assessment and will be marked by the project supervisor. In addition, each group will be expected to make a short (~5 minute) presentation at the start of the second period and a longer (~15 minute) presentation at the end of the study. The presentation will be assessed by MSE staff and rep-resents 20% of the assessment. Upon successful completion of the course, students should be able to: determine appropriate materials and selection procedures for a specific application, on the basis of material structure and property criteria. relate knowledge gained to material structure and properties, material selection methods and, where applicable, applications to a specific function. describe relevant material production routes and the factors influencing material suitability for their chosen application. explain material treatment(s) necessary for the chosen application understand the environmental impact of the production and recycling of relevant materials. Project - Presentation (20%) - Written report (80%) - Oral feedback session 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering Page 38 of 186
MS4171
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. J.M.C. Mol Dr.ir. M. Janssen 4/0/0/0
Lifetime Performance of Materials
1 1 1 2 English This course comprises several aspects that negatively affect strength, appearance, function and/or integrity of material classes metals, polymers and ceramics. Relevant phenomena are described such as: - Corrosion - Degradation - Fatigue - Creep Introduction (4 lectures) Definitions of sustainability and durability in context of materials application Materials as part of a system From design to end of life Energy, raw materials, safety, costs and environmental issues. Degradation of materials: various physical and chemical phenomena Focus on increasing life time of materials in constructions Materials classes (2 lectures) Special issues for the four groups Metals: e.g. sensitivity to corrosion Polymers: e.g. UV influence Ceramics: e.g. brittleness Combinations : incompatibility (example automotive) Degradation of materials (2 lectures) Loss of function Integrity of constructions, corrosion and mechanical issues Reliability of devices Appearance, esthetics, gloss, colour in architecture and automotive etc Prevention, self-healing and retarding of degradation processes. Optimised design of construction New materials, thermomechanical treatment Surface treatment Coatings Cathodic protection Corrosion and durability (8 lectures) Introduction A need for mechanistic information on corrosion Retard the corrosion process by thermal and surface treatments Retard the corrosion process by coatings and Cathodic Protection Forms of corrosion, phenomena and mechanisms General corrosion vs local coorsion Local corrosion forms : pitting, crevice, galvanic. High temperature corrosion and oxidation including ceramics Blistering and adhesion of coatings, filiform corrosion Electrochemical mechanisms of corrosion phenomena Polarisation diagrams Passivity, anodic protection Cathodic protection Coated materials 1.Metallic layers 2.Conversion layers 3.Polymer layers Mechanical properties and durability (8 lectures) Fatigue Introduction: S/N curves, fatigue limit Metals: cyclic deformation, low and high cycle fatigue, initiation and propagation, types of S/N curves, effect of inclusions, methods to avoid fatigue damage Polymers and polymer composites: S/N curves, mechanisms of initiation & crack growth, thermal softening, polymer composites Creep Introduction: strain vs. time, stress vs. rupture time Metals & ceramics: extrapolation procedures, suitable materials Polymers: effect strain rate and temperature on stress-strain behaviour, creep compliance, Poisson's ratio, creep rupture Environment-assisted cracking Introduction: definition Metals: hydrogen embrittlement, stress-corrosion cracking, liquid-metal embrittlement, neutron embrittlement Polymers: physical EAC, chemical EAC yet to be defined Lecture Handouts Written exam 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Study Goals Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Department
Page 39 of 186
MS4181
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. L. Nicola 0/4/0/0
New Trends in Materials
Study Goals
2 2 Different, to be announced English In this course the students are actively involved to discover the new technological horizon in the field of applied mesoscopic materials. Fundamental physical and mechanical aspects involved in these new technologies shall be addressed. Examples of the topics are: self-healing materials, photonic crystals for optical communication, solar cells, holographic data storage, single electron electronic devices, biomedical materials and drug delivery systems. The student is able to: - have a basic understanding of the physics and mechanics of mesoscopic materials - extract and order information from open literature and the internet - write concise reports - communicate orally and give a presentation - generate new creative ideas to innovate current technological developments Project based learning in small groups. Students will be helped in finding the relevant journal papers and material from the literature when necessary. The assessment will be based on oral presentations, a progress written report and active participation of students in the discussion of the topics during classes. 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
MS4191
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Study Goals Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Department x/x/x/x
Materials for Conventional Energy Production

Prof.dr. I.M. Richardson
None (Self Study) 1 Exam by appointment English Assessment of materials for conventional energy production. This may include hydrocarbon recovery, refining, transport, or power generation. Materials for nuclear power generation may also be examined. Focus on materials requirements for a selected aspect of conventional energy production. Self study Review of open literature Written report 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
MS4201
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents Prof.dr. J. Dik Drs. N.C.F. Groot x/0/0/0
Art History and Archaeology
Study Goals
1 1 Different, to be announced English Culture, art history, archaeology, history, materials This course provides a general overview of art history and archaeology. It is intended for students with a technical background. Prior knowledge in the humanities is not required. The course is an introduction to the main style periods of the visual arts, ranging from the early Stone Age to Contemporary Art. The course also covers the main themes of artistic representation in different periods. The student is able to: - give an overview of the cultural heritage of mankind from the Early Stone Age to Contemporary Art and name crucial moments in its development - globally describe the main style periods in art and archaeology, define their visual charactertistics and approximately date important style periods - perform a basic stylistical analysis of a given artefact and classify the object into major style movements of art history and archaeology - identify the main topics of artistic representation in the period of Prehistory, Classical Antiquity and Christian Art Lecture Yet to be defined Written exam 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Page 40 of 186
MS4211
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Dr.ir. W.G. Sloof Dr.ir. M. Janssen 0/x/0/0
Materials at High Temperature
Summary
Course Contents
Study Goals Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Department
2 2 Different, to be announced English Specialisation Course Materials for Energy and Environmental Impact MS3021 Metals Science MS4011 Mechanical Properties WB4438 Energy, Society and Sustainability WB4422 Thermal Power Plants This module gives a thorough introduction to the use of materials in systems for energy conversion. The pivotal role that materials play in the efficiency with which primary energy can be converted into electricity or other energy carriers and hence on the environmental impact. The role of materials in the life time expectancy of energy conversion systems will be elucidated so that the student will be able to use this knowledge for the design of new systems and for maintenance and repair of existing installations. Also the consequences of changes in operational modes of the energy systems can be assessed. This module presents the role that materials play in energy systems on the basis of fact sheets, figures and tables. The following subjects are treated: First an overview will be given of the materials used in - conventional systems such as steam boilers, turbines and combustion turbines - advances steam systems operating under extreme conditions, new designs such as externally fired gas turbines and high temperature fuel cells - nuclear systems both fission and fusion, covering radiation damage to fuels and structural materials The systems and components will be analyzed in terms of the processes that have influence on the behavior of the materials. The most important influences for short term and long term behavior will be treated. Processes such as creep, fatigue, thermomechanical fatigue, corrosion and the methods for assessment, avoidance and repair of the effects of these processes will be treated. Insight into the role of materials in design and operation of conventional and advanced energy conversion systems involving elevated temperatures Lectures, presentations by students Search of information on the Internet Lecture notes and sheets Active participation during all lectures and to give a presentation 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering 3mE Department Process & Energy
MS4221
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Dr. A.J. Bottger 0/0/2/0
Materials for the Hydrogen Economy
Course Contents
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Enrolment / Application Department Contact
3 3 3 4 English Basic knowledge of materials science i.e. microstructural features (grain, texture, defects), materials transport (diffusion processes), crystal structures. Thermodynamics basics. New technologies require new materials. This course starts with a brief overview on renewable energy sources. Within that framework the effect of a hydrogen economy on production processes, transportation and storage will be discussed. In particular materials' requirements and behaviour are addressed: how do materials interact with a hydrogen containing environment, microstructural stability, membrane technology for gas separation from molecular sieves to atomic separation, and the state of the art of hydrogen storage materials. After following this course students should 1.have insight in the available renewable energy sources and their pro and cons 2. have insight in the role of hydrogen in view of energy supply 2.have knowledge on the main failure mechanisms evoked by a hydrogen containing environment 3.be able to describe processes and principles used to produce hydrogen gas 4.know the principles and mechanisms used to separate hydrogen molecules from a gas mixture 5.know the materials used for H-gas separation and and their behavior (lifetime) 6.know the principles and mechanisms used to store hydrogen 7.know the materials used for storage and their behavior (lifetime) Combined class room teaching and self study Handouts, recent papers The assessment consists of two parts a written exam (open book) and a presentation about selected topics. Please enroll through Blackboard 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering Questions or more info? Contact dr. A.J.Bttger email: [email protected]
Page 41 of 186
MS4232-09
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. E.L. Fratila-Apachitei Dr.ir. I. Apachitei Dr. J. Duszczyk 0/0/4/2
Biomaterials
3 4 3 4 5 English MS3421-Developments in production and processing In improving patient care, especially in relation with tissue loss or dysfunction, the use of proper biomaterials plays a key role. The shift from tissue removal to tissue replacement and at present, tissue regeneration is driven by the (i)evolution of biomaterials from bioinert to bioactive and bioresorbable associated with advances in molecular biology, and (ii) the increasingly complex biomedical problems of an aging and more active population. As an example, the existing total joint replacements have a 75 - 85 % survivability at 15 years. However, since they were first introduced in the 1960s, average life expectancy increased by at least ten years impacting on the quality of the bone and implants survivability that deteriorate with age. As a consequence, improved implant survivability by 10 - 20 years and alternative treatment methods that delay or eliminate the use of prostheses are badly needed. The Biomaterials course covers in an interdisciplinary approach (biomaterial engineering and biology) the background information on type, composition, processing and properties of biomaterials along with their evolution. Metallic, polymeric and ceramic materials are included and their properties are described and compared with those of biological materials. The main methodologies for biomaterials characterization are covered as well as the procedures for biomaterials standardization and regulation. Further, the interactions between biomaterials and specific biological environments are explained and used for defining the specific requirements and selection principles for biomaterials. Here, biomaterials and medical devices for orthopedics, cardiovascular system, tissue engineering, regenerative medicine are covered. Finally, the research directions and approaches for development of novel biomaterials are outlined. Next to lectures, the students will be involved in mini-research projects where they will have to solve biomaterials related problems for various biomedical devices/applications. In this respect, they will interact with producers and suppliers of biomaterials/devices or with clinicians. At the end of the course the students will be able to: 1. List and identify the type of biomaterials used in biomedical applications that include: orthopedics, cardiovascular system, tissue engineering, regenerative medicine 2. Define the properties of biomaterials and their property map (range of property values) 3. Describe structure-property relationships for various biomaterials 4. Describe the methodologies for biomaterials characterization and regulation 5. Compare and contrast biomaterials and biological materials 6. Explain the main interactions between a biomaterial and a biological environment 7. Describe the principles for biomaterials selection and design 8. Describe the processes and approaches used for functionalization of biomaterials 9. Identify, analyse and describe a biomaterial problem 10. Set biomaterials requirements for a specific medical device based on communication with clinicians 11. Search, judge, find and present sound and innovative materials solutions to biomedical problems Lectures, case studies and mini-research projects Written exam together with oral presentation and written report from research projects 3mE Department Materials Science & Engineering
Study Goals
Page 42 of 186
MT113
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Design of Advanced Marine Vehicles

Ir. J.W. Frouws Dr.ir. J.A. Keuning Prof.ir. D. Stapersma Prof.dr.ir. T.J.C. van Terwisga 0/0/0/4
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department
4 4 4 5 English An introduction in advanced marine vehicle types. The basic principles of the different types of advanced marine vehicles will be explained, supported by data of recently build vessels. Several types of propulsion systems such as but not limited to waterjets, cavitating and non cavitating propellors. Energy supply by means of high speed diesels and gasturbines. A basic introduction in the application and aspects of normal and advanced materials in designing and building these vessels. Hydrodynamic aspects, the contradiction between resistance and propulsion and on the other hand ships movements will be dealt with. Safety aspects and possible fault aspects in the design and building processes. Design strategies in the design of advanced marine vehicles. Ship owner requirements and the economical evaluation of these vessel types, future development expectations looking to the different types. The student must be able to: 1.list characteristics of advanced, fast and unconventional vessels 2.describe resistance and powering aspects of fast vessels 3.describe and explain selection of power generation options on board of advanced and fast vessels 4.describe the basics of the behaviour of fast vessels in a seaway 5.describe design aspects and principles of advanced and fast vessels Lectures 0/4/0/0 J.W. Frouws, "Design of advanced marine vehicles.", 2000, including appendices. mt112, mt215 Written exam 25% Design strategy of advanced marine vehicles and design methods for the basic components. Synthasis of the total design. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
MT1401
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.ir. J.J. Hopman 0/0/4/0
Law for MT
3 3 3 4 English The course aims to provide students of Maritime Technology with an introduction into the basics of Maritime Law and Shipping Law. The following topics are discussed during the course: - Defining the ship and ship components and and the legal implications involved. - Regulating the ship. International and national law, Registration of ships, Ship Nationality, - Supervision of ships. Flag-State and Port-State Control. Role of Classification Societies. - Ship-building contracts - Operation and commercial exploitation of the ship. Charter-parties, contracts of carriage. - Maritime Casualties. Collision, salvage, limitation of liability. - Risk management and insurance - Case study: The Otapan. The aim of the course to raise the awareness of the students of main legal issues in maritime law, to enable students to access legal sources independently, to foster a basic understanding of how maritime law is structured and what it entails and to enable students to access sources of maritime law directly. The Course is taught in Lecture-format with active particaption from students being required in preparation in advance and participation during the lecture. Legal sources will be made available through a reader, additional materials will be made available through Blackboard. Students will be required to write a paper on a subject to be announced within a fixed time-frame. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Education Method
Page 43 of 186
MT213
Marine Engineering C
Nabestaanden van H.T. Grimmelius
Study Goals
3 3 3 4 English Maintenance: Maintenance as part of the ship's life cycle Maintenance cost evaluation Risk based maintenance Reliability and availability: Failure mode and effect analysis Failure rate and fault distributions Make a graphic estimate of a Weibull fault distributions Reliability and maintainability Calculation of availability Event trees & fault trees: operational approach to systems Fault & event tree analysis Condition Monitoring: Concept of (intelligent) Condition Monitoring Some techniques for intelligent condition monitoring Condition monitoring of diesel engines The student must be able to: 1.explain the different maintenance concepts: preventive, corrective, condition based. 2.explain the impact of different maintenance concepts on a ship's Life Cycle Costs 3.explain the difference between an fault tree and an event tree 4.perform a fault and event tree analysis 5.perform and interpret a Failure Mode and Effect Analysis 6.calculate reliability and availability from simple failure rate distributions 7.use and interpret Weibull distribution applied to failure rates 8.explain several suitable techniques for conditions monitoring of diesel engines 9.interpret condition monitoring concepts Lectures 0/2/0/0 Course material: H.T. Grimmelius: Reader EuroMTEC (on BlackBoard). Selected papers. References from literature: Vuini, B.: "MA-CAD, Maintenance Concept Adjustment and Design", PhD thesis Delft University of Technology, ISBN 90370-0112-2, Delft, 1997. mt219 Written exam 10% System lay-out optimisation with regard to maintenance and reliability 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Prerequisites Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 44 of 186
MT216
Introduction Combustion Engines

2 2 2 3 English Basic thermodynamic principles. Piston engines both Diesel and Otto principle. Working & construction principle: 4 stroke, 2 stroke, trunk piston, crosshead construction, low/medium/high speed Indicator diagram: work, mean indicated and effective pressure Ignition and combustion: mixture formation, ignition methods, ignition delay, premixed and diffusive combustion Performance: efficiency, power and torque, fuel consumption, air consumption Pressure charging: turbocharging, single stage and two stage Operating envelope: naturally aspirating, turbocharged engines Power density Thermodynamic analysis: air standard cycles, Otto, Diesel and Seiliger cycle Gas turbines Working principle Ideal simple Brayton cycle with and without losses Regenerative cycle Advanced cycles Operating envelope Construction and installation Fuel characteristics Emissions Source Methods to reduce emissions: internal & end of pipe The student must be able to: 1.describe the main characteristics of diesel and otto engines and gas turbines 2.describe the main characteristics of fuels 3.describe the working principles of the 2-stroke engine and of the 4-stroke engines and sketch the associated indicator (p-V) diagram 4.define and apply the thermodynamic concepts power, work, heat, mean effective pressure and efficiency 5.define compression ratio, stroke-bore ratio, specific fuel consumption, air-fuel ratio, air excess ratio and mean piston speed 6.explain the purpose and working principle of turbocharging and to distinguish the different types 7.explain the limits of the operating envelope of a diesel and otto engine and the influence of turbocharging 8.explain methods to broaden the operating envelope 9.explain the limits to power and power density 10.describe the pollutant emissions of combustion engines, the measures to reduce these and methods of exhaust gas cleaning 11.describe for Otto engines the methods of mixture formation (carburettors and fuel injection), the requirements with regard to afr, the advantages of injection systems compared to carburettors 12.describe for diesel engines the differences between direct injection (DI) and indirect injection (IDI) systems with their advantages and disadvantages 13.explain the influence of design parameters to engine performance by using air-standard cycles 14.apply the Otto cycle to calculate/predict Otto engine performance 15.apply Seiliger cycle, also called dual cycle, to calculate/predict diesel engine performance 16.describe the working principles of the gas turbine 17.apply the Brayton cycle to calculate/predict gas turbine performance for simple and advanced gasturbine cycles 18.explain the influence of the pressure ratio and of the temperature ratio on efficiency and power density 19.explain the influence of compressor, turbine and heat exchanger losses on gas turbine performance (efficiency and power density) 20.explain the operating envelope of a twin-shaft gas turbine and the influence of power on sfc 21.describe the effect of ambient conditions and intake and exhaust losses on power and fuel consumption 22.describe the necessary measures for installation on board: acoustical enclosure, air filtration, up- and down-takes and fuel treatment Lectures 0/2/0/0 wb4408A, wb4408B, wb4420, wb4421 Marine Engineering. Design of Propulsion and Electric Power Generation Systems. J. Klein Woud and D. Stapersma. Institute of Marine Engineering, Science and Technology, London, 2003. ISBN 1-902536-47-9. The book can be obtained from Gezelschap Leeghwater with a considerable discount. Some prints will be provided. wb4100 Written exam 50% Application and installation of piston engines and gas turbines 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Education Method Course Relations Literature and Study Materials
Prerequisites Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 45 of 186
MT218
Responsible Instructor Instructor Exam Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Mechatronics in MT
Nabestaanden van H.T. Grimmelius P. de Vos E.H.M. Ulijn 0/0/4/0 3 3 3 English Theoretical background: Signal conditioning * Analogous and digital signal processing, amplifiers, filtering Measurements techniques * Analogue and digital equipment, applicability, implications of sampling, D/A and A/D conversion Sensors * Working principles, interpreting sensor specifications Actuators * Working principles DC drives, servo acuators, determine and interpret characteristics Dynamics * Modelling manoeuvring of ships, control requirements for weather vaning dynamic positioning and dynamic tracking Practical application: Determine characteristics of available sensors and actuators and the available scale model. Design and implement a weather vaning DP/DT controller for use on the scale model in the towing tank. Demonstrate the controller in the towing tank. The student must be able to: 1.describe the basic principles of mechatronics: the combination of mechanical, informatical, electronical aspects into one system 2.describe sensors principles and to apply sensors for suitably measuring position (6 d.o.f.), speed, acceleration, force, torque, rpm, flow speed, sine/cosine, acoustics etc) by different means (electrical, optical, acoustical etc.) 3.describe actuator principles and to apply actuators for marine purposes (load characteristics, response speeds, geometrical parameters, durability) 4.apply the basics of signal processing relevant to mechatronical systems (sampling, filtering, transformation, functional processing, A/D and D/A conversion) 5.apply the basics of computer based measuring and control 6.analyse and interpret the performance of a simple mechatronical system 7.apply the ergonomical aspects of mechatronic systems (safety, operation, access) and the organizational impacts (working conditions, lay-offs, educational requirements etc) 8.evaluate the strength and weakness of a mechatronical system Lectures 0/0/3/0, laboratory projects Matlab / Simulink, Humusoft real time toolbox Course material: 'Dynamic positioning of vessels at sea'; Pinkster 'A Study on Weather Vaning Dynamic Positioning System`; Pinkster, Hagiwara, Shoji, Fukuda Additional material to be determined References from literature: `Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems`; Franklin, Powell, Emani-Naeini `Onboard Experiments on Weather Vaning Dynamic Positioning System`; Pinster, Hagiwara, Shoji, Fukuda Written report, practical results The project assessment is based on: * Theoretical analysis and solution (report) * Practical results of the controller (from experiments conducted in flume tank) Laboratory project(s): Implementation of the DP/DT controller in a real-time environment to control a model in the towing tank. Experiments in the towing tank to demonstrate the solution.
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks
Department
In order to participate you should enrol as soon as possible for mt218 (typically round Christmas). In preparing the assignments we need to know total number of participants. Also the number of participants is limited by available hardware and if you did not register in time you might have to wait several weeks before you can actually start! 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Page 46 of 186
MT313
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents E. Vandevoorde H. Meersman Ir. J.W. Frouws 0/0/2/0
Shipping Management
3 3 Exam by appointment English Shipping management Maritime economics In this course an individual assignment will be carried out on a subject chosen by the student in consultation with the professor. At the start of the course the student will be guided by the professor and supplied with bibliography and links with (international) research on the subject. During a few "hearing" classes problems can be discussed. A written report and an oral presentation will conclude this assignment. The student is able to make a sound judgment of various problems in shipping management from economical point of view and to propose feasible solutions at minimum cost and at maximum efficiency. More specifically, the student is able to: 1.demonstrable knowledge and understanding of the most important comprehensions of maritime economics 2.apply managerial concepts in a shipping company or a related maritime business environment 3.find, gather and work on maritime-economic databases 4.carry out economical analyses of empirical applications 5.interpret correctly maritime-economic data and results of related research Assignment Course material: Suggested by the professor depending on the subject References from literature: Suggested by the professor depending on the subject
Study Goals
Presentation Professors will be available on the day of the course as given in the schedule. For further contact phone or email us. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
MT514
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Study Goals 0/0/0/4
Ship Movements and Steering 3

Prof.dr.ir. R.H.M. Huijsmans
4 4 4 5 Dutch (on request English) See Dutch description The student is able to determine, analyse and evaluate the motion of a ship or any other floating structure in waves and also the maneuvering of a ship in calm water. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.apply the equations of motion to a single rigid non-elastic body in order to describe the motion of a ship sailing in waves or maneuvering in calm water 2.deduce the relevant linear equations of motion in the frequency domain for a ship lying still or sailing in waves 3.deduce the linear, time domain equations of motion for a body floating in waves 4.analyse the motions of a ship in irregular waves and predict the probability of extreme values of ship motions and forces working on the ship 5.determine the motions of a ship when executing different maneuvers, eg. turning circle, crash stop etc 6.select, on basis of motion criteria, ways and means to reduce extreme roll motion of a ship in waves 7.explain the different non-linear hydrodynamic effects that play an important role in the motion response of floating structures moored at sea 8.explain the main theoretical backgrounds regarding linear and non-linear wave forces acting on floating structures 9.Explain the main theoretical backgrounds regarding hydrodynamic calculation methods such as the strip-theory for ships sailing in a seaway and the 3-dimensional diffraction theory for stationary, floating structures in waves Lectures 0/0/0/4 See Dutch description mt513 Written exam See Dutch description 25% 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Department
Page 47 of 186
MT515
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Study Goals 0/2/2/0
Resistance and Propulsion 3

Prof.dr.ir. T.J.C. van Terwisga
2 3 2 3 Different, to be announced English Cavitation nuisance and propulsors, Propellers in service conditions, Drag reduction through air lubrication The student must be able to: 1.reproduce the main lines in a selection of the latest developments in the field of Prop & Res. Hydrodynamics, where the current selection of Propulsion and Resistance topics includes unsteady hydrodynamics of the flow over a foil, cavitation forms, problems and tools for analysis and design, propulsion systems in a service environment and ship drag reduction by air lubrication 2.analyse a hydrodynamic problem in the propulsion and resistance area, into well defined subproblems that can be analysed with state of the art knowledge and tools 3.select the appropriate theory or tool (either numerical or experimental) for an analysis of the identified problem 4.reproduce and present to an audience, the main lines in a contemporary publication from the field of Propulsion and Resistance hydrodynamics 5.understand, interpret and react to questions from the audience and the lecturer and in doing so, stimulate the scientific debate Lectures Course notes, distributed during classes Presentation Attendance during lectures is compulsory, marks on presentation, no written examination 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Page 48 of 186
MT523
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents
Numerical Methods for MT

Dr.ir. H.J. de Koning Gans Ir. T.N. Bosman 0/4/0/0
2 2 Exam by appointment English Requirements: all BSc-courses Analysis, Linear Algebra and Differential Equations plus mt518, mt519 and mt520 Explanation of several flow models and their fluid mechanics properties (pressure, velocity, mass and volume flow, momentum, energy flow etc.) and fluid domain in contrast with aerodynamics Modeling flow models into numerical flow models. Elementary solutions for potential flow and how to use them for panel codes which used these elementary solutions. Greens' function theory. Grid generation techniques and how to use them. Several numerical error in the developing stage, desing and applications stage Application for numerical method: Viscous flow Diffraction, Wave making pattern. The student must be able to: 1.explain the description of a mesh of a ship hull and to produce a file which is readable for computational tools 2.describe different type of griding techniques and several spacing distributions 3.describe the Greens function and the Greens identity 4.use elementary solutions for potential flow in the Green function and how to use the elementary solutions to transform the Greens identity to a Fredholm equation of the second kind 5.use the Fredholm equation for a potential flow model and to discretise it into panel codes 6.define which numerical application has to be used for a specific problem (e.g. a given flow around ships with or without free surface flow (pressure distribution, constant velocity, area's etc.) 7.define which simplifications or linearization have to be used and which physic phenomena is used 8.define which boundary conditions have to be used 9.explain the numerical models based on potential flow with or without free surface flow and it's linearization 10.indicate when a specific application is used, what kind of flow model it is based on 11.determine the range of the most important parameter(s), which for the method is used 12.determine the grid size for the specific problem 13.make a grid 14.analyse the output data which the specific program has generated 15.describe the higher order method and truncation error and the von Neumann condition Lectures 0/4/0/0 Three different numerical tools (Navier-stokes, Delffrac and Delkelv) have to be used. Course material: Koning Gans, Dr. Ir. H.J. de "Numerical Methods in Ship Hydromechanics" Koning Gans, Dr. Ir. H.J. de "Manual of Numerical Methods in Ship Hydromechanics" References from literature: Katz, J. & Plotkin, A."Low Speed Aerodynamics from Wing Theory to Panel Methods" Presentation Entry requirements: All courses mathimatics, fluid dynamics and Resistance and Propulsion of ships of MT01,MT02,MT03 10% Optimalisatiom of hull forms. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 49 of 186
MT524
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents 0/0/2/0
Hydromechanics of Special Ship Types

Dr.ir. J.A. Keuning
Study Goals
3 3 3 English Basic B.Sc (Naval Architecture) or equivalent Hydromechanics of Special Shiptypes, such as fast ships, advanced marine vehicles, (sailing) yachts. Topics calm water resistance, side force production and induced resistance, aerodynamics of sails, Velocity Prediction, (nonlinear) motions in waves, operability of fast ships, maneuvring, motion control and large motions. The student is able to understand, determine and analyze the particular points of interest and the differences in the hydromechanics involved between regular ship types and special ship types such as in particular sailing yachts and fast ships. More specifically, the student is able to: 1.list the various computational techniques ranging from CFD to regression based empirical formulas that are being used for the determination of the forces and moments involved in the equilibrium of a sailing yacht under way 2.apply the various methods and techniques that are being used for the determination of the specific problems encountered with sailing yachts in in-stationary conditions (i.e. motions and added resistance due to wind waves) 3.describe the differences between linear and non linear approaches to ship motion calculation techniques for both sailing yachts and fast ships 4.describe the special conditions, forces and moments that come into play when dealing with fast ships sailing in calm water and waves 5.apply the different calculation techniques used on the fast ships with their strong non linear behavior and to understand and analyze their differences 6.describe (the need for) the various different experimental techniques used in fast ship towing tank experiments 7.explain the special problems associated with fast ships in waves with respect to; the strong non linear behavior, high encounter frequencies and vertical accelerations, large motions and special events like surfing and broaching in following waves 8.describe the various aspects with fast ships with respect to safety 9.apply the various aspects with respect to ultimate stability Lectures 0/0/2/0 Course material: WEGEMT Courses on Advanced marine Vehicles, Sailing Yacht Design and other Course notes are distributed during the classes (lectures) In addition a number of relevant publications on the subjects discussed during the lectures will be handed out. Other references to public literature: See course material A limited number of assignements (commonly 2) must be made by the students. These have to be submitted in english on paper to the teaching staff. When found of sufficient quality no further examination is required and a mark will be awarded. Attendance during lectures is compulsory, Final marks are given on basis of the handed in results from the assignements. No further written examination necessarry. Laboratory project(s): Possibly towing tank workshops with yachts and fast ships. 25% Application of shiphydrodynamics in the design of these special types of ships is prominent 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Assessment Remarks
Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 50 of 186
MT525
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Marine Propulsion Systems

Prof.dr.ir. R.H.M. Huijsmans T. van Beek 0/0/0/2 4 4 4 5 English Subject: This course describes the main properties of marine propulsions systems. After the course students have to be able to select a suitable propulsion system, define the main criteria, evaluate interfaces and dynamic behaviour. A rough cost review will be included. Contents: 1. Introduction to propulsion systems 1.1Introduction 1.2 Ship types and propulsors 1.3 Design and selection of fixed pitch propellers 2. Design and application of CP Propellers 2.1 Application of CP propellers 3. Design and application of steerable thrusters and pods 3.1 Steerable thruster 3.2 Podded propulsors 4. Design and application of waterjets and tunnel thrusters 4.1 Waterjets 4.2 Tunnel thrusters 5. Hydraulic systems and controls 5.1 Hydraulic systems and its characteristics 5.2 Controls for propulsion system 6 General topics: class requirements, rudder interaction and material aspects 6.1 Class requirements and service experience 6.2 Interaction with the rudder 6.3 Material aspects 7 Cost effective propulsion and system integration 7.1 Cost driving factors in propulsor systems 8 System integration and package optimisation After the course the student should have profound knowledge of the propulsion systems described in the course. They should understand the mian working principles, the critical design issues, the cost drivnig factors and be able to make comparison of various types and make for desing purposes. Lectures (2 hours per week) Course material: readers will be available prior to every course References from literature: references will be presented per course Written exam. 80% Content is design related using normal laws of physics. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 51 of 186
MT724
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Ir. J.F.J. Pruyn Dr.ir. R.G. Hekkenberg E. Stroo-Moredo 0/0/2/0
Shipfinance
3 3 3 English For academic students: 3rd year Shipbuilding courses : mtp302, mtp305; For INHolland-students: completed 3rd year of studies. The course consists of the following elements: 1) Classes by (mostly) guest lecturers; 2) Several group and individual assignments during the classes; 3) An individual exam; Course subject The course is organised by the Delft University of Technology (DUT) together with Stichting Nederlandse Scheepsbouw Export Centrale (NESEC), a high-end financer of dutch shipbuilding projects. The subject of the course is such that a high level of expertise is needed and this is achieved by inviting a large number of speakers from the industry. These are chosen in such a way that the whole spectrum from pre-financing by the shipyard till the repayment of a loan by the ship owner is treated, albeit not chronological. Any ship that is build is financed two times; Firstly the yard will need to finance the production of the vessel, to ensure a positive cash position during its construction. Secondly the owner needs to finance the purchase of the vessel including the payments made to the yard before delivery. While both types of financing differ greatly, a lot of elements are shared between them as well. This course will treat the view of the yard, the ship owner and the bank on this, as well as provide the students with tools to assess the financial status of a company. 1.The student will be able to understand and explain the similarities and differences in financing for a shipyard and a ship owner. 2.The student can qualify and quantify the effects of financing on: a. the contract price of a shipyard. b.on the future cash flow of the ship owner 3.The student can analyse the health of the balance of a company by using at least the following indicators: solvability, liquidity, rentability, working capital, quick ratio, current ratio and debt ratio. 4.The student will be able to construct a simple new year statement consisting of a year result and balance based on cash flow data and the previous statement 5.The student can explain the effects of changes on the balance and year result. 6.The student can evaluate an investment by constructing cash flows for the investment and applying Pay-back, Net Present Value, Discounted Cash Flow and Internal Rate of Return techniques to that. 7.The student will be able to identify which costs are present in the contract-forms used in shipping (time charter, voyage charter, bareboat charter). 8.The student can quantify the effects of market movements in exchange rates, freight rates and second hand value on the financing of ships, cash flow prognoses and the balance. Lectures report assignments Course material: To be supplied during the course. References from literature: General literature on finance (terminology, definitions, main concepts) and methods for evaluating investments.
Study Goals
Specific publications on ship finance. Books by Peter Stokes, Sloggett, Stopford and others. Report on UNAS (UNiforme Administratie in de Scheepsbouw), etc. Sources such as accountants and banks, e.g. KPMG, PriceWaterhouse, ArthurAndersen, ING, NIB Capital, etc; Shipping consultants such as Drewry, Ocean Shipping Consultants, etc; Sector representatives such as KVNR and VNSI; Internet;
Assessment
Material of Cambridge course on Ship Finance. Complete the questionnaires at the end of each guest lecture Complete the group and individual assignments during the lectures A written Exam Grading is a weighted average of the following: - Presence and participation of each student in class; - Quality of the assignments; - Written exam, partly multiple choice and partly ship finance cases. Remarks 1.Students must register at least two weeks before start of the course. Registration only by means of BlackBoard. INHolland students may register with the secretary of the Ship Production Department, Mrs A. Nieuwland-Jobse, [email protected]. 2.In view of the guest lecturers a minimum number of participants may also apply. If the number of registered participants is below this number the course may be canceled. 3.Since the course is organised in co-operation with the NESEC and Dutch industry and banks, preferential admittance is given to students of Marine Technology. 4.The NESEC awards a price to the best student (over-all), this consist of a paid international course in ship finance at Cambridge University, England. 5.Classes are obligatory and each student is expected to follow all of them. To promote participation by the students, they will receive an extra 0.5 point for following all courses and lose half of that for each of the missed courses. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Remarks
Department
Page 52 of 186
MT725
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Dr.ir. R.G. Hekkenberg 0/0/0/2
Inland Shipping
4 4 4 English The student is introduced to inland shipping in Europe, it's position in the intermodal transport chain and the complications of intermodal transport compared to road transport. Emphasis is put on the special challenges posed by the inland waterway infrastructure, which often pose limitations and/or requirements on the type of ship used. Also various ship types and the latest technological developments in inland navigation will be discussed. The course consists of a single 2-hour lecture, after which students will be asked to complete an assignment related to specific aspects of inland navigation and/or the economic feasibility of providing inland waterway transport. research questions in recent years have included: " What is the smallest inland ship that can still compete with trucks?" "How far can scale enlargement of inland ships be taken?" "What options do the latest improvements of the infrastructure on the danube offer inland navigation?" "Which European cities can be supplied by inland waterway from which seaport?" Assignments will be carried out in groups of 2 or 3. Grading will be based on a written report, oral presentation and discussion of the contents of the report.
Course Contents
The student is introduced to inland shipping in Europe, it's position in the intermodal transport chain and the complications of intermodal transport compared to road transport. Emphasis is put on the special challenges posed by the inland waterway infrastructure, which often pose limitations and/or requirements on the type of ship used. Also various ship types and the latest technological developments in inland navigation will be discussed. The course consists of a single 2-hour lecture, after which students will be asked to complete an assignment related to specific aspects of inland navigation and/or the economic feasibility of providing inland waterway transport. research questions in recent years have included: " What is the smallest inland ship that can still compete with trucks?" "How far can scale enlargement of inland ships be taken?" "What options do the latest improvements of the infrastructure on the danube offer inland navigation?" "Which European cities can be supplied by inland waterway from which seaport?" Assignments will be carried out in groups of 2 or 3. Grading will be based on a written report, oral presentation and discussion of the contents of the report. 1.The student shall be able to explain the position of inland shipping in the logistic chain as well as the advantages and disadvantage of inland shipping in relation to rail and road transport, taking into account the properties of the inland waterway infrastructure 2.The student shall be able to apply the knowledge from learning objective 1 to a specific problem, related to logistics and/or (semi-)technical aspects of inland shipping by generating possible solutions and assessing these solutions, using methods and criteria that are commonly used in the field Lecture Assignment oral presentation discussion of results wordprocessing and spreadsheet if necessary Course material: S.Hengst, "Binnenvaart in beeld" (in Dutch) Delft University Press C.J. de Vries Goederenvervoer over water, Van Gorkum en Comp. , Assen References from literature: C.J. de Vries, Goederenvervoer over water (in Dutch), van Gorcum, 2000 written report, oral presentation and discussion of report 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Education Method
Computer Use Literature and Study Materials
Page 53 of 186
MT727
Responsible Instructor Assistent Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Parts
Shipyard Process, Simulation and Strategy

Ir. A.A. van der Bles E.H.M. Ulijn 0/0/0/2 4 4 Different, to be announced English Modelling is integral part of the project work, but may start from other existing models. The deliverable will be the documentation of a mathematical model and the interpretation of results. The instructor will specify typical functional requirements of a working model. Examples of functional requirements could be: Change the available resources (e.g. personnel) and determine the consequences; Change the delivery time for certain objects of the specified structure and determine the consequences; Change some of the product parameters and determine the consequences; Change the logic linking the activities by means of specifying different scenarios; Change the parameters of the available facilities and determine the consequences, e.g. of a crane with smaller lifting capacity; To this end the students must structure the model to describe the activities involved and investigate (part of) these activities in terms of necessary preconditions, resource usage, work time and product parameters. Subsequently the student is expected to model them in suitable relationships and integrate the model into a working simulation program. This course is directly linked to the ongoing research programme of the Chair of Ship Production and covers capita selecta of this subject. The binding theme is that of simulation, notably that of engineering and production processes. In view of the link with research, guest speakers will present (part of) their research. This also implies that the subject material may vary with the progress of that research. This set-up of the course requires an active interest on behalf of the student and a willingness to be exposed to new and sometimes still experimental developments.
Course Contents
Classes: Contents and order of lectures are indicative and subject to change without notice. Subjects are taken from: Introduction to course, introduction to planning of the course, expected deliverables, evaluation criteria, learning goals, introduction to project work, group division; Introduction to process simulation, introduction to process modelling tools (EM-Plant), activity trees, modelling; Production simulation at Flensburger Schiffbaugesellschaft, introduction, demonstration Robotisation, introduction to subject, robot technology and corresponding requirements, analysis of cost and benefits, capacity balancing, discussion; Engineering processes, introduction to subject, process modelling techniques (e.g. IDEF0), engineering process simulation, problems in concurrent engineering, relationship between product & process; Data reuse in design and engineering, standardisation and modularisation in ship engineering, problem statement, past achievements, analysis of engineering processes, pros and cons of standardisation and modularisation based on case studies; Data exchange in shipbuilding, integral product modelling, different forms of ship representation such as functions, zones, system, etc; international standards, shortcomings and current developments. Project work: The project comprises work of the students in groups of 2 to 4 students. They will all work on a similar project although on completely different parts of the shipbuilding process. These parts may e.g. cover pipe fitting, accommodation assembly, steel pre-fabrication or section assembly. Objective of the project is to analyse and model the specified part of the shipbuilding operation. The goal of such a model would be: To be able to analyse and visualise the specified shipbuilding process in terms of cost, throughput time, employed resources and corresponding risks. Data provided for the project case could be a drawing of a (limited) part of the ship with corresponding product parameters. Alternatively it may cover a set of production drawings with relevant parameters. The team may further receive constraints relative to the available resources (personnel and equipment). The students will have to analyse the activity tree, the required resources, the corresponding events, etc. The student must be able to: 1.Understand, analyse, investigate and evaluate the cause and effect relations which influence the building process and logistics for (a part of) the production and assembly process; 2.Model (part of the) shipyard building process in terms of tasks, activities and events; and in terms of task duration, resource use and logical relations; and expressed as functions of product parameters, available facilities and resource constraints; 3.Devise a simulation model or part thereof on the basis of the developed shipbuilding production process model; 4.Understand the potential of robots for welding and evaluate the pros and cons of robots for ship production; 5.Understand the role of engineering for ship production and qualitatively analyse potential improvement options offered by standardisation and modularisation; 6.Understand the background to and evaluate the use and limitations of integral product modelling. Project work To be supplied during the course. Report + presentation + participation 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Page 54 of 186
MT728
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents Ing. J.C. van der Wagt E. Stroo-Moredo 0/0/x/0
Salvage
3 3 Different, to be announced English Ship salvage, emergency responce, damage repair Salvage is an uncertain business and requires an organisation which can bring together the required material and expertise in a very short time. Sometimes unconventional technical solutions have to be applied. Environmental issues do play an important role. Damage repair is a highly competitive business with strong fluctuations in contracted work and requires a high level of flexibility of the organisation. The course consists of: 1. Case study carried out by groups of 3-4 students 2. In depth study 3. Lectures on salvage and emergency response Student is able to apply knowledge of the Marine Salvage business in order to know how to approach a salvage job, taking into account international contract procedures, technological aspects, planning and logistics of equipment and personnel and cost. For a limited amount of students damage repair can be addressed, requiring the student to gain knowledge of the Ship Repair business. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.indicate the activities of marine salvage in terms of market, world wide competition, contractual and legal matters, salvage technology, organization, planning and logistics 2.interpret the differences between shipbuilding and ship repair in terms of market, world wide and regional competition, facilities, organization and working methods 3.analyse a specific practical problem either on marine salvage or ship repair (technique, organization, planning and logistics) 4.generate possible solutions for the problem defined in learning objective number 3 5.evaluate the possible solutions and to give an underpinned recommendation for the final solution Case study and lectures Course material: To be supplied during the course Written report, presentation Blackboard enrollment 2 weeks in advance as well as presence at first lecture (kick off) are mandatory 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Page 55 of 186
MT729
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Ir. J.F.J. Pruyn 0/0/0/4
Maritime Business Game
4 4 Different, to be announced English Strategy, investment decisions, product mix, international differences, exchange rates, interest rates and market prediction are all elements you will encounter in this course. You will find yourself at a management position in one of the companies present in the game and represent either a shipping company or shipyard. Youll fight with competitors for orders in a market that can turn around completely in a single month. Long term strategy, is hard to follow in an environment as dynamic as this. At the end of at least five years of management, youll have to confront the General Assembly and defend your course of action over these years and give some insight into the future of the company. Course Contents Contents and order of lectures are indicative and subject to change without notice. Typical contents are: Introduction to course, expected deliverables, evaluation criteria, learning goals, work division into functional areas, introduction to maritime business game, explanation of game procedures, introduction to the gaming system, group division and company assignment, designation of cross-reading students Familiarization with game procedures, trial rounds Fundamentals of financial reporting, explanation of financial reports generated during the game Preparation for game, development of own strategy, formulation of long-term goals including 1 A4 with summary statements Fundamentals of strategy in the maritime context Playing the Maritime Business Game (at least 80% of the time) Preparation of annual report and outlook Grand Annual Meeting and completion of course Game Content The game comprises an interactive effort of all participating students: they will all work in the same situation. The participants will be divided in teams of one to three students, representing shipyards and ship owners. Each team will be supplied with a relevant initial situation stating such matters as financial structure, products, organisational structure, market information, etc. Within the teams the tasks may be split along functional lines, e.g. finance; production; commercial or similar. Objective of the game for each team is to optimise the companys performance. Typically the teams can do any of the following to that end: Set the price for offered ships, supplies or financing; Hire & fire personnel; Set the offered delivery time for any ship or its components; Invest in facilities (docks, slipways, quays, cranes, ships, etc); Negotiate with clients; Request market surveys to be performed; Assess his/her business results. The MBG is played in a number of rounds. The environment may change, e.g. by: Changing exchange rates; Altering labour costs; Introducing subsidies; Affect the macro-economical developments; Seasonal fluctuations in trade; Changing the base interest rates; Changing material prices (fuel, steel, port fees). During each round, each team is expected to analyse the market, analyse their own financial position, determine the course of action, negotiate, perform litigation, formalise binding agreements and adjust company parameters online. Each round of the game thereby results in a new financial position with corresponding information on e.g. market, product and clients. Everything is to be reported by means of an Annual Report at the end of the game, over the entire length played. The game period (the "round") is a 1-month period which is variable in real team, due to experience of the participants. It will range between 30-60 minutes of gaming per round. The game is set to run continuously from 8:30 in the morning to 17:30 in the evening. Decisions may be made continuously but will be registered as final at the end of the round. Study Goals The student must be able to: 1. develop and execute a sound company strategy 2. analyse and interpret financial statements 3. synthesise a consistent marketing plan and modify and execute it under changing circumstances 4. negotiate with potential clients and formalise agreements 5. describe the procedures and obstacles in litigation 6. evaluate investment possibilities and make sound decisions relative to their adoption 7. evaluate the dynamics and regional differences involved in the maritime business environment and optimise decision making accordingly 8. make rational evaluations of business opportunities and decide accordingly, e.g. relative to the product mix, order book filling, pricing, etc. 9. describe the conflicts between short-term and long-term objectives and mediate between them 10. describe the workings of the maritime business dynamics and the interactions between different stakeholders Lectures Business game/Computer Use/Simulation Game simulation tool, based on business process simulation tool To be supplied during the course Annual report + presentation Remarks A maximum number of 50 students applies for this course. Admittance will be in the order of registration by means of BlackBoard. Assessment will be on the basis of: Annual report. Page 56 of 186
Course Contents
Study Goals
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment
The report must include a survey of the financial results, a discussion of the most relevant decisions taken during the game and their outcomes, a projection for the near future of the company and the resulting strategy and strategic changes, if any. The report to be submitted in threefold, in the English language: One for the lecturers present during the Grand Annual Meeting Two for designated fellow students from other teams Presentation at the Grand Annual Meeting Each team gets 10 minutes (depending on the number of teams) to present its companies views relative to strategy, competition, market, results and future outlook. After this the audience gets 5 to 10 minutes for Q&A. The cross-reading students are expected to each pose one critical question. Remaining Q&A-time is available to the floor and the lecturers. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Grading is done in the following way. 10% of the grade is based on the average Return on Equity over the last five periods of the game, calculated in a standard way. The maximum RoE receives maximum credit, the minimum RoE gets minimum credit. Cooking the books or other types of criminal behaviour, when discovered, results in negative credit, the severity of which is to be decided by the Game Administrator. 10% of the grade is based on the judgement of the fellow students relative to the future plans of the company. This is based on the number of shares bought of your company by the other participants. The remaining 80% of the grade is based on the judgement of the lecturers. Department 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology (20% presentation, 30% report, 30% participation during the game)
Department Judgement
MT815
Construction and Strength, Special Subjects

X. Jiang Ir. T.N. Bosman 0/2/0/0 2 2 2 English Probability and statistics analysis, computational method or equivalent. The course aims at establishment of methods for probabilistic modeling and analysis of structural behavior and safety applying to ships, offshore platform, pipelines and other marine and/or civil engineering structures. Different methods for calculating reliability of components, including FORM and advanced FORM, SORM and Monte Carlo simulation methods are discussed. Systems reliability method and updation of reliability based on inspection and maintenance are introduced. Properties of and solution to different reliability problems, ultimate strength reliability and fatigue reliability are illustrated. After successfully completing the course, students will be able to: 1.To explain theoretical basis for reliability analysis of structures. 2.To identify properties and applicability of different reliability methods. 3.To choose and apply reliability methods properly 4.To analyze real time engineering reliability problem Lectures, in class exercises and discussions, homework assignments. Course materials R.E. Melchers: Structural Reliability Analysis and Prediction (second edition), John Wiley&Sons, New York, 1999. References from literature: Journal of reliability engineering &system safety, Journal of engineering failure analysis among others. 50% assessment report and 50% home assignment. 50% Reliability analysis of a real time engineering structure 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Page 57 of 186
MT816
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. M.L. Kaminski Ir. T.N. Bosman 0/0/0/2
Composit Materials
4 4 4 5 Dutch (on request English) The course aims primarily at the possibilities and limitations of fibre reinforced plastics (FRP's) in ship structures. The pros and cons of FRP's with respect to conventional materials are discussed and related to current applications. Fabrication, supply and properties are discussed with respect to basic components (matrix, reinforcement and core material) as well as with respect to the final product (laminate and sandwich). The course deals with the relevant production methods and structural concepts of maritime structures and structural components. Attention is given to the mutual relationship and the effect on costs and properties of the final product. Subsequently the course continues with structural design and the response and capability of structure and components under appropriate loadings. Special attention is given to the effect of structural design concept and of composition and properties of material components on the response and capability. Also the influence of time and environment will be considered. Lastly rules and regulations of classification societies are considered with respect to structural design, choice and application of materials, dimensioning of scantlings, maintenance, repair and daily use. The course is designed as an introduction on the structural properties of composite materials and their possibilities and limitations in their application in primary and secundary structural parts of maritime structures. Lecture Course material: Summaries; course-book in preparation. References from literature: Composite Materials in maritime structures, edited by R.A. Shenoi and J.F. Wellicome, Vol. I and Vol. II, Cambridge Ocean Technology Series 4 and 5, Cambridge University Press 1993, ISBN 0 521 45153 1, ISBN 0 521 45154 X, combined ISBN 0 521 458765. Case Please contact the lecturer for an English alternative, whenever needed. 50% Inter-relationship between material properties, structural design concept and the response and capability (strength and stiffness) of maritime structures and components under appropriate loading. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
MT830
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents X. Jiang Ir. T.N. Bosman 0/2/0/0
Applications of the Finite Element Method
Study Goals
2 2 2 3 English Structural Mechanics, Material Mechanics, Computational Methods or similar. The course gives the theoretical framework for the finite element method, formulates elements for beams, plates, shells and assembly structures. Element properties, symmetric and asymmetric issues, convergence requirements and modeling errors are discussed. The course emphasizes rational modeling, choice of element type, discretization, introduction of loads and boundary conditions and results control. Further, an introduction to geometric modeling of simple two- and three-dimensional structures and typical structural details is given. After successfully completing the course, students will be able to: 1.To identify different finite element types and properties 2.To explain structural behavior of finite elements 3.To establish and validate a FEM model 4.To analyze simple two- and three-dimensional real life structures Lectures, in class exercises and discussions, homework assignments. computer demonstrations and exercises during the course, assignment to be completed and reported Course material: Finite Element Modeling for Stress Analysis, Cook,R.D., ISBN 0-471-10774-3 References from literature: Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, Cook, R.D. et al, ISBN 0-471-50319-3 70% Assessment report and 30% homework assignment. 70% finite element analysis of structures 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Page 58 of 186
MT835
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Ir. T.N. Bosman 4/0/0/0
Hydro Elasticity
Study Goals
1 1 1 English Contents planned for the course: o Response superposition in view of hull girder bending stresses in regular waves. o Local response due to outside pressures at the shell, intermitted wetting. o Stress responses due to regional structural response. o Combining local response and global hull responses. o Long term distribution of stresses in view of fatigue damage of structural components. o Integral structural finite element model of ship to determine stress response functions. o Hydroelasticity: Working definition. Springing o Hydrodynamic interaction between floating structures and mechanical coupling: MOBs. o Vortex induced vibrations, VIV. The student must be able to: 1.apply response superposition in view of hull girder bending stresses in regular waves 2.calculate local response due to outside pressures at the shell, and assess pressures in the splash zone, using output of a Diffraction calculation for a ship hull in regular waves 3.derive a mathematical model to assess variations of internal pressures on tank walls due to ship motions for tanks which are 100% filled with liquid 4.identify the problems in combining global hull response with response from local in- and external pressures 5.illustrate the principles of a two-step stress response analysis with a FEM-model for rigid ship hulls, based upon ship motions and external hull pressures as calculated with 3D-diffraction methods 6.explain the phenomenon of hydrodynamic coupling/interference between floating rigid bodies, to formulate the relevant matrix equation, to apply it for simple cases, make a simulation of the resulting motions in regular waves and evaluate the results 7.formulate the additional transformations in the matrix equation for hinge linked rigid bodies including hydrodynamic coupling (MOB), to apply it for simple cases, make a simulation of the resulting motions in regular waves and evaluate the results 8.describe the phenomenon of Hydro-elastic response of relatively elastic floating structures, e.g. VLFSs, to explain the differential equation for e.g. a flexible thin plate in regular waves, to apply it for a flexible barge composed of 12 segments and evaluate the results 9.explain the phenomenon of springing of ships in regular waves 10.explain the differential equations for the transient response of a flexible beam (hull girder) due to impact, e.g. slamming, whipping etc 11.describe the phenomenon of Vortex Induced Vibrations (VIV) and apply engineering solution methods to simple cases Lectures, weekly exercises Course material: Hand outs will be available for each subject References from literature: Ship Hydromechanics, part I, Journee, Pinkster Ship Hydromechanics, part II, Offshore Hydromechanics, Journee, Massie, DUT Structural design and Strength 2, Boon, Vink Structural Design and Strength 3, Boon, Vink Hydroelasticity in Marine Technology, Proceedings of conference 1994, Trondheim Written report Mark will be based upon results of weekly exercices. 50% Advanced topics for response evaluation and structural design to judge viability of unconventional concepts og floating structures 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Page 59 of 186
OE4601
Survey of Offshore Engineering Lectures

Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English This course consists of a number of familiarization classes on Monday and Thursday afternoons during the first quarter. Individually, the classes provide the minimum technical knowledge base for a specific subject. Collectively, the series of classes form a general, fairly broad introduction to the oil and gas industry and to the offshore engineering master studies in particular. In total the classes cover, in addition to a general course introduction, some 14 15 different subjects. A major portion of these subjects are delivered by specialists from renowned firms or companies from the offshore industry. Lecture notes from all speakers are made available, normally after the delivery of the classroom sessions. Materials and classroom discussions will be in English. This group of classes is scheduled universally in the first three hours of each Monday and Thursday afternoon during the first quarter (7 weeks), while the 4th hour of the afternoon is generally used to amplify information presented by videos / DVD. Participants successfully completing this course can expect to: Be aware of the diversity and range of building blocks potentially applicable in the offshore field development of hydrocarbon reservoirs and the facets thereoff involved in the design of structures for offshore production. This includes key parameters and other essential criteria applicable to dredging engineering and renewable energy developments well. Additionally, students will know how and where to find more information on any of the topics covered and will able to make motivated choices for additional relevant courses necessary to collate their course requirements in support of their industrial practice phase and thesis selection. lectures recommended other materials: Several (15 - 20) note segments that complement the first quarter Tuesday and Thursday afternoon classes, made available via Blackboard. "Glossary of Offshore Terms" by Prof.dr.ir.J.H. Vugts et al. Available at BookShop Civil Engineering. Written multiple choice-type exam in the examination period at the end of the first quarter, with a re-sit / 2nd change in a similar period at the end of the second quarter. Summary Survey of a variety of topics from Petroleum Engineering, Chemical Engineering, Geodesy, Marine and Steel Technology through Subsea and Dredging Engineering that contribute to the development of an offshore oil and gas field or land reclamation. The course is taught by a team of roughly 16 teachers led by the Offshore Engineering Curriculum Leader. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Grades are assigned upon the result of a written exam.
Assessment
Remarks
OE4603
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Study Goals Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks
Introduction to Offshore Structures

Prof. C.A. Willemse Prof.dr.ir. C. van Rhee 0/4/0/0
2 2 2 3 English The course explains design principles of jacket platforms, gravity structures, offshore ships, spars, TLP's and semi-submersibles, as well as the basics of dredging equipment. The level is introductory. Understanding of which type of offshore and dredging structures exist and how their preliminary design is achieved. lectures obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): Syllabus for OE 4603; syllabus for OE 4651 by prof Vugts; written exam (open questions) Summary Review of design principles of Offshore and Dredging Structures 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Single mark based on written examination
Page 60 of 186
OE4610
Survey of Offshore Engineering Projects

Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema Ir. G. Tol 0/0/0/x 4 4 Exam by appointment English The course OE4610 is applying the knowledge of most preceeding courses; in order to join / sign-up, it is mandatory to have followed the lectures for OE 4601 and OE 4603 including participation of at least one (written) examination. This course in its full form is divided into a number of elements that are fully integrated with the Project work. These elements include the following: -A series of classroom sessions (mandatory attendance for all participants). -Frequent project team plenary meetings, virtually daily. Team meetings with the coach held (often) at weekly intervals. - Occasional methodology activities in conjunction with the lectures.. -Project Team presentations.
The participating student population is divided into teams of 4 5 people max, consisting of a mix of various disciplines, backgrounds and cultures. Each team will be assigned with a senior university staff member or PhD student, who will act as their coach for the duration of the Project. Each team works with the same general information and each serves as a design consultant to the same external company on the same project. A bit of good-natured competition between the teams makes their activities even more interesting! The Project is designed into 3 phases during which the teams have to transfer a hydrocarbon discovery somewhere in the world into a field development plan defined by a number of technical and economical parameters. The teams will work with the same general information during this process which is provided in a number of lectures delivered by the Curriculum Leader on the topics of Project Management and Field Development, spiced up by talks on effective meetings, communication and working as a team in addition to dedicated lectures including a training session on oil & gas economics. The immediate overall objective of these sessions is to increase the effectiveness of each participants project work activity and to paint the big picture thereby assisting the student in putting more specific material from the informational classes in a proper perspective for adaption into their project. Specific field data is provided by an external company from the oil & gas industry. Each Project team (as a group) is required to hold scheduled meetings with the coach, usually no more than once per week starting. These sessions serve as fixed point in the Project teams activities. It is here that subgroups within a team can exchange information and the coach can discuss activities and progress with the team. An occasional session can be devoted to a methodology topic; additionally, students are free to use any source for data, expertise and / or experience gathering. Participants successfully completing this course can expect to: -Be aware of the diversity of facets involved in the development of an offshore hydrocarbon discovery, the wide range of issues governing decision making including a focus on the major building blocks requiring design of structures for offshore oil and gas production. -Know how and where to find more information on any of the topics involved. -Be able to make a motivated choice for future career including the graduation specialism and for additional relevant (elective) courses prior to graduation. -Have experienced how conflicting requirements must be accommodated in an offshore design environment. -Be somewhat skilled with the use and integration of knowledge gained from this and companion OE curriculum courses. -Be a more affective worker in teams and individually. -Be able to utilize simple project analysis and management techniques. -Be more actively involved in one's own learning process. -Be aware of the economic constrains imposed on industrial projects. Classroom lectures, exercises, training and preparing & delivering presentations. recommended other materials: A PC or laptop running a recent, Englisch Language version of EXCEL will be needed for QUE$TOR computations at home - if so desired. Much project background material will have to obtained from the university library system and internet. recommended lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): Software: QUE$TOR - All of this information is or will be made available when needed via the Curriculum Leader. Team reports including presentations (3 off) followed by an individual oral exam. Summary: Application of a variety of topics from Petroleum Engineering, Chemical Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, Civil Engineering, Geodesy and Marine Technology for the conceptual development and evaluation of an offshore hydrocarbon (oil and gas) discovery. Participants work in multi-background teams. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Each phase of the Project is concluded by a team report which in its turn is defended by a (team) presentation. Grades are assigned to both components by a panel, resulting in one team grade for such a phase. While for the first 2 phases one single reward for each phase is determined, for the third and final report & presentation two separate grades will be established. By applying a predetermined weight distribution to the 4 obtained grades, an average grade is established for each team reflecting some 90% of the final grade. The final individual grade will be established by the Curriculum Leader after an oral exam rounding off the obtained team grade. This grade is assigned to the entire 8 credits.
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks
Page 61 of 186
OE4623
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema
Drive System Design Principles

4/0/0/0 (in 2nd master year) 1 1 1 2 English MSc Offshore Engineering None An overview of possible drive systems: Diesel, gas-turbine, electromotors, generators, nuclear energy, fuel cells, transmissions, etc. An overview of drive systems used in offshore & dredging applications. The Multi Criteria Analysis Assignment in groups of 2 or 3. Learn to choose the optimal drive system for an offshore application based on arguments Make a global design of a drive system Learn to use the Multi Criteria Analysis A Powerpoint presentation showing the results of the assignment Get an overview of possible drive systems Learn to choose the optimal drive system for an offshore application based on arguments Make a global design of a drive system Learn to use the Multi Criteria Analysis Lectures/Assignment Powerpoint H. Klein Woud & D. Stapersma, Design of Propulsion & Electric Power Generation Systems K. v/d Werf, Aandrijfsystemen Powerpoint presentation of a global drive system design The Powerpoint presentations will be converted to websites and published on www.drivesystemsdesign.org. 60% Global design of a drive system 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema
Study Goals
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department Contact
Page 62 of 186
OE4624
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Ir. J.P. Oostveen Prof.dr.ir. F. Molenkamp 0/4/0/0
Offshore Soil Mechanics
2 2 2 3 English OE4624 uses CT2090 OE4624 uses CT4399 This course brings successful participants to a superior knowledge level in the following geomechanics areas for application to offshore structures: Soil investigations: All kind of site observation as well as soil investigationsmethods to support the topics below are discussed. Pore pressure enhancement: The build-up of pore pressures under large foundations subject to cyclic loads as well as in the sea bed as a response to ocean surface waves is derived. Lateral and vertical support of pipelines: Bedding of pipelines and their protection are discussed. Axially loaded piles: The behavior of piles under alternating tension and compression. Non-linear responses as well as numerical solutions are handled. Laterally loaded piles: The behavior of piles under alternating horizontal forces is handled. Non-linear responses as well as numerical solutions are provided. Large spread footings: The behavior of spread footings using the Brinch Hansen theory are discussed. Suction achorage: The behavior of suction anchorages are discussed based on the theory.
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks
Offshore Soil Mechanics extends ones basic knowledge of soil mechanics so that successful participants are prepared to design offshore foundations for fixed offshore structures at a superior knowledge level. They also become aware of the geotechnical problems associated with pipelines and other seabed structures. lectures exercise obligatory lecture note(s)/textbook(s): Offshore Soil Mechanics by prof.dr.ir. A. Verruijt. Also avialable on the internet: geo.verruijt.net Available at BookShop Civil Engineering. recommended other materials: Lecture notes will be provided. Written exam Summary Successful participants can design offshore foundations at a superior knowledge level. This course makes this possible by extending ones basic knowledge of soil mechanics to include a number of typical offshore applications. Topics include: Axially and laterally loaded piles: linear and nonlinear behavior and computations, Shallow spread footings for large structures: linear and nonlinear behavior and computations, Influences resulting from cyclic pore pressure in the sea bed. Field (at sea) and lab studies. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology grade is determined on the basis of a written examination. The exercises must be finished before this can take place
Page 63 of 186
OE4625
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Dredge Pumps and Slurry Transport

Dr.ir. A.M. Talmon Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema 0/0/4/0
3 3 3 4 English The purpose of this course is to convey knowledge of the various physical processes associated with slurry handling and transport during dredging. This knowledge is needed for the design of dredging equipment and for planning efficient equipment operations. The various processes are discussed and theories and simulation models that describe the processes are presented and compared during the course. The course can be broken down into four elements: 1. Pumps and engines a. Pump characteristics and cavitation b. Influence of particles on pump characteristics. 2. Hydraulic transport in pipelines a. Two-phase (solid-liquid) flow through pipelines b. Newtonian slurries c. Non Newtonian slurries d. Inclined and long pipelines. 3. Pump and pipeline systems a. Operation point and areas b. Production factors. 4. Case studies To gain knowledge about the two-phase flow, pipeline transport and pumping of sand water mixtures. lectures obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): Dredge Pumps and Slurry Transport by V. Matousek, edited by Dr.ir. A.M. Talmon. Blackboard (downloads) recommended other materials: book Slurry Transport Using Centrifugal Pumps by K.C. Wilson et al, ISBN 0 7514 0408, 1997 written exam (open book) Summary After a short overview of dredging as a whole, this course concentrates on principles of pipeline transport of slurries and on the design of a transportation system comprised of pipelines and slurry pumps. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Dr.ir. A.M. Talmon
Assessment Remarks
Department Contact
Page 64 of 186
OE4626
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema 0/4/0/0
Dredging Processes
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks
Department Contact
2 2 2 English OE4626 uses CT4399 The course focuses on 3 main dredging processes: The cutting of sand, clay and rock; The sedimentation process in hopper dredges; The breaching process. These are explained in detail. Exercises allow participants to apply the knowledge gained in practical situations. Understand and reproduce the Mohr circle; Understand and reproduce the theory of passive and active soil failure; Understanding the soil mechanical parameters important for cutting processes; Understanding and make calculations regarding the 2-D cutting theory in water-saturated sand; Understanding and make calculations regarding the 2-D theory in clay; Understanding and reproduce the settling of grains in water; Understanding and reproduce the loading cycle of a hopper dredge; Being able to determine the loading cycle of a hopper dredge, base on the modified Camp model by Miedema and Vlasblom; Understanding and reproduce the basic cutting theory of rock cutting; Understanding and reproduce the breaching process. lectures obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): The course material is downloadable from: http://www.dredgingengineering.com and from Blackboard Available at as download from blackboard . Written exam (open book) Summary The course focuses on 3 main dredging processes: The cutting of sand, clay and rock; The sedimentation process in hopper dredges; The breaching process. Participants succesfully completing this course will be equipped to make predictive quantitative determinations related to these processes. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema
OE4630
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period
Offshore Hydromechanics
Dr.ir. P. de Jong Ir. P. Naaijen Prof.dr.ir. R.H.M. Huijsmans Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema Ir. G. Tol 8/4/4/0
Course Language Course Contents Study Goals Education Method Assessment
Department
2 3 2 2 3 4 English See respectivily modules D1 - D4 See respectivily modules D1 - D4 See respectivily modules D1 - D4 See respectivily modules D1 - D4 Module D1 is not required for students with a Maritime background (BSc). All modules D1-D4 have to be passed ( grade larger than 5.5) in order to get a final mark of OE4630 through a weighted average of the modules D1-D4 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Page 65 of 186
OE4630 D1
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Dr.ir. P. de Jong 2/0/0/0
Offshore Hydromechanics, Part 1
1.5
1 1 1 2 English CT4320, CT5316 and basic fluid mechanics Summary Offshore Hydromechanics includes the following modules - all of which are normally required for OE MSc Degree participants: Hydrostatics, static floating stability, constant 2-D potential flow of ideal fluids, and flows in real fluids. Introduction to resistance and propulsion of ships. Review of linear regular and irregular wave theory. One lab session accompanies this module in combination with module 4. Analytical and numerical means to determine the flow around, forces on, and motions of floating bodies in waves. One lab session and a few exercises accompany this module. Higher order potential theory and inclusion of non-linear effects in ship motions. Applications to motion of moored ships and to the determination of workability. One exercise accompanies this module. Interaction between the sea and sea bottom as well as the hydrodynamic forces and especially survival loads on slender structures. One lab session accompanies this module along with module 1. One exercise is also involved. Basic principles: Hydrostatics, constant flow phenomena and waves The treated theory includes : Stability computations for all sorts of floating structures - including those with partially filled water ballast tanks, etc. Bending of a free-hanging drill strings Constant 2-D potential as well as real flows and the forces which they can exert on structures Wave theory and wave statistics Module 1 (text chapters 1 trough 5) provides basis knowledge for all the succeeding modules. Classes on this module are held during the first three weeks of the course; this is usually soon followed by a quiz covering this module Course Objectives: Participants who have successfully completed the course will be able to carry out computations at a superior knowledge level involving: Module 1 (1,5 EC): Hydrostatics, floating stability and 2-D potential flows, as well as regular and irregular waves and their spectra. Module 2 (2 EC): Computations relevant for first order forces on and resulting motions of ships. Module 3 (3 EC): Nonlinear forces on and resulting ships motions; workability prediction. Module 4 (1,5 EC): Hydrodynamic forces on slender structures including marine pipelines. In addition, successful participants completing module 1 will have a basic awareness of ship propulsion systems and their computations. Those completing module 4 will have an advanced knowledge of sea bed morphology. Lectures, exercise obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): "Offshore Hydromechanics" by Journee and Massie "Offshore Hydromechanics" Exercises by Journee Both are available by P.W. de Heer (3mE room 7-0-117, besides towing tank) or may be downloaded off the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl "SEAWAY" by Journee available at teacher and the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl Prerequisite All participants are required to have succesfully completed a basic university-level course in Fluid Mechanics before starting on Offshore Hydro-mechanics Written exam (open questions) Written assignments Practice(s) Quizzes Offshore Hydromechanics Module 1 is not required for students with a Maritime Engineering Bachelor. However, these students need to compensate the ECTS with (an)other subject(s). 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Course Contents
Study Goals
Prerequisites
Assessment
Remarks Department
Page 66 of 186
OE4630 D2
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Ir. P. Naaijen 0/4/0/0
Course Contents
2 2 2 3 English Summary part 2 of offshore hydromechanics (OE4630) involves the linear theory of calculating 1st order motions of floating structures in waves and all relevant subjects such as the concept of RAOs, response spectra and downtime/workability analysis. Floating Structures 1: Wave forces & motions Upon completion of this segment participants will have superior knowledge of: Application of linear (wave) potential theory to ships and other floating structures for the computation of external and internal forces as well as ship motions. Module 2 covers chapters 6, 7 and parts of chapter 8. It prepares the student for the further development of this project in module 3. A few computational exercises as well as a lab session complement this module. Course Objectives: Participants who have successfully completed the course will be able to carry out computations at a superior knowledge level involving omputations relevant for first order forces on and resulting motions of floating strucures. knowledge / know-how is obtained on: -definitions of ship motions in 6 DOF -RAO's and phase angles of harmonic properties (motions, forces, wave elevations, etc) -General motion equation: how to determine all the terms in the equation, how to solve the equation in order to obtain RAOs/phase angles -potential flow due to undisturbed wave -numerical potential flow due to wave radiation and diffraction -combine motion RAOs and derive RAOs of related properties -calculate probability of exceedence -carry out downtime/workability analysis Lectures, exercise obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): "Offshore Hydromechanics" by Journe and Massie "Offshore Hydromechanics" Exercises by Journe Both are available by the teachers or may be downloaded off the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl Prerequisite All participants are required to have succesfully completed a basic university-level course in Fluid Mechanics before starting on Offshore Hydro-mechanics Knowledge obtained in module 1, especially on hydrostatics (ch 2) and wave theory (ch 5) is frequently used in module 2 Written exam (open questions) 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Prerequisites
Page 67 of 186
OE4630 D3
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary 0/0/4/0 3 3 3 4 English Summary

Offshore Hydromechanics includes the following modules - all of which are normally required for OE MSc Degree participants: Hydrostatics, static floating stability, constant 2-D potential flow of ideal fluids, and flows in real fluids. Introduction to resistance and propulsion of ships. Review of linear regular and irregular wave theory. One lab session accompanies this module in combination with module 4. Analytical and numerical means to determine the flow around, forces on, and motions of floating bodies in waves. One lab session and a few exercises accompany this module. Higher order potential theory and inclusion of non-linear effects in ship motions. Applications to motion of moored ships and to the determination of workability. One exercise accompanies this module. Introduction to the use of Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) for the determination of extreme loads on moored FPSO in extreme seas. Interaction between the sea and sea bottom as well as the hydrodynamic forces and especially survival loads on slender structures. One lab session accompanies this module along with module 1. One exercise is also involved. Floating Structures II: wave forces & motions, nonlinear problems, applications Participants completing this segment succesfully will have a superior knowledge of and be able to predict the motion of floating bodies in the sea. They will be familiar with first order ship motions in irregular waves as well as drift forces, resulting from nonlinear phenomena. They can also apply this to applications such as station keeping and the determination of offshore workability. Module 3 (text chapers 9 through 11) builds upon knowledge gained in modules 1 and 2. One computational exercise is related to this module. Course Objectives: Participants who have successfully completed the course will be able to carry out computations at a superior knowledge level involving: Module 1 (1,5 EC): Hydrostatics, floating stability and 2-D potential flows, as well as regular and irregular waves and their spectra. Module 2 (2 EC): Computations relevant for first order forces on and resulting motions of ships. Module 3 (3 EC): Nonlinear forces on and resulting ships motions; workability prediction. Module 4 (1,5 EC): Hydrodynamic forces on slender structures including marine pipelines. In addition, successful participants completing module 1 will have a basic awareness of ship propulsion systems and their computations. Those completing module 4 will have an advanced knowledge of sea bed morphology. lectures, exercise obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): "Offshore Hydromechanics" by Journe and Massie "Offshore Hydromechanics" Exercises by Journe Both may be downloaded off the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl "SEAWAY" by Journe available on the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl Prerequisite All participants are required to have succesfully completed a basic university-level course in Fluid Mechanics before starting on Offshore Hydro-mechanics Written exam (open questions) Written assignments Practice(s) Quizzes 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Course Contents
Study Goals
Prerequisites
Assessment
Department
Page 68 of 186
OE4630 D4
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema 4/0/0/0 1 1 1 2 English Summary
1.5
Offshore Hydromechanics includes the following modules - all of which are normally required for OE MSc Degree participants: Hydrostatics, static floating stability, constant 2-D potential flow of ideal fluids, and flows in real fluids. Introduction to resistance and propulsion of ships. Review of linear regular and irregular wave theory. One lab session accompanies this module in combination with module 4. Analytical and numerical means to determine the flow around, forces on, and motions of floating bodies in waves. One lab session and a few exercises accompany this module. Higher order potential theory and inclusion of non-linear effects in ship motions. Applications to motion of moored ships and to the determination of workability. One exercise accompanies this module. Interaction between the sea and sea bottom as well as the hydrodynamic forces and especially survival loads on slender structures. Slender Cylinder Hydrodynamics and Sea Bed Morphology This module gives succesful participants a superior knowledge of: The Morison equation and its extensions as well as with methods to determine its coefficients and approximate methods for predicting the survival loads on an offshore tower structure. The computation of hydrodynamic forces on pipelines. In addition, these persons will also have an advanced knowledge of the morphology interaction between the sea bed and pipelines and other small objects. The erosion process of particles at the sea floor is covered extensively. Module 4 covers text chapters 12 through 14; module 1 provides the necessary prerequisite knowledge for this. Study Goals Course Objectives: Participants who have successfully completed the course will be able to carry out computations at a superior knowledge level involving: Module 1 (1,5 EC): Hydrostatics, floating stability and 2-D potential flows, as well as regular and irregular waves and their spectra. Module 2 (2 EC): Computations relevant for first order forces on and resulting motions of ships. Module 3 (3 EC): Nonlinear forces on and resulting ships motions; workability prediction. Module 4 (1,5 EC): Hydrodynamic forces on slender structures including marine pipelines. An advanced knowledge of sea bed morphology. In addition, successful participants completing module 1 will have a basic awareness of ship propulsion systems and their computations. lectures obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): "Offshore Hydromechanics" by Journee and Massie "Offshore Hydromechanics" Exercises by Journe Both are available by the teachers or may be downloaded off the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl "SEAWAY" by Journee available at teacher and the internet address: www.shipmotions.nl Additional lecture notes by Miedema on the erosion processes. Prerequisite All participants are required to have succesfully completed a basic university-level course in Fluid Mechanics before starting on Offshore Hydro-mechanics Written exam (open questions) 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Course Contents
Prerequisites
Page 69 of 186
OE4651
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Prof. C.A. Willemse Prof.dr.ir. J. Wardenier 0/0/3/3
Bottom Founded Structures
Course Contents
3 4 3 4 5 English OE4651 uses CT4130 OE4651 uses OE4601 OE4651 uses OE4624 OE4651 uses OE4603 This course includes several related segments as follows: General introduction and general design considerations such as material choice in relation to design, loads and relevant load combinations, construction and later inspection as well as removal of the structures at the end of their economic life. Fixed steel support structures are given the most significant attention in this course. Quantitative design of steel structures including the dimensioning of individual members strength as well as stability is covered as is the design analysis for joints in such structures. Dynamics and fatigue is being discussed as well. Participants become familiar with construction, transport and installation aspects to the extent that these factors dictate the design. More limited atttention is given to inspection, and repair of existing structures. Compliant Towers and their specific design characteristics are also discussed . Structural design aspects of decks to provide space the drilling, production, power generation and life-support systems are discussed. The analysis modeling of elevated jack-up rigs is discussed in relation to that for fixed steel tower structures. The failure modes and design codes for fixed steel offshore structures are discussed briefly. Platform decommissioning and removal is given special attention. Various guest lecturers from the industry are invited to present some practical cases.
Study Goals
Education Method
Literature and Study Materials
The objective of this course is to integrate knowledge from hydromechanics, probabilistic design, dynamics and structural design so that participants are albe to carry out the design and related analysis of fixed steel structures in the sea at a superior knowledge level. An exercise enhances each participant's skill and understanding. lectures exercise site visit (compulsory) obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): Books: "Handbook of Bottom Founded Offshore Structures" by prof.dr.ir. J.H. Vugts is available via the OE offices in the Civil Engineering building. Specific notes: Handouts for exercises are available in class and on Blackboard; powerpoint presentation slides of all lectures are posted on Blackboard. Software: Participants may check their exercise computations using SESAM on a university computer. recommended other materials: English-language EXCEL software will be convenient for carrying out some of the exercise computations. Grades are based upon a combination of a grade for the written examination as well as grades earned for the exercise work. The combined exercise grades provide 30% of the final grade; the remaining 70% is from the exam. Summary Treatment at an advanced to superior knowledge level of fixed steel structures ad complaint towers and their superstructures as well as jack-up platforms in their working (elevated) position. The course covers the entire range of the design cycle from concept evaluation through abandonment, although primary attention focuses on those factors most important to the structure's design. Design analysis steps are applied primarily to fixed stell platforms in the sea. Participants complete a series of exercises during the course in order to reinforce their understanding and skill with the use of the concepts taught. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Grades are based upon a combination of a grade for the written examination with open questions as well as grades earned for the exercise work. The combined exercise grades provide 30% of the final grade; the remaining 70% is from the exam Secretariat of OE, Mrs. Marysa Dunant (3mE)
Assessment Remarks
Department Judgement Contact
Page 70 of 186
OE4652
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Ir. A.M. van Wijngaarden 0/0/4/0
Floating Structures
Course Contents
Study Goals
3 3 3 4 English OE4652 uses OE4601 OE4652 uses OE4603 OE4652 uses OE4630 This course first surveys the various hull forms and types of floating structures in relation to the functional requirements placed upon them. A major portion of the course focuses on a specific type of floating structure - such as a FPSO production platform for deep water - and its design. This design is then discussed in some detail in such a way that the classroom sessions augment the series of steps within the design exercises. Participants in this course will become capable - at an advanced knowledge level - of leading the design of a floating offshore structure. They will be familiar with the (potentially) conflicting requirements resulting from safety, topside processes, deadweight capacity, floating stability, response to waves, structural strength and fatigue, positioning as well the available margins for compromise needed to achieve a feasible and responsible design. The exercises integrate the course topics and reinforce the concepts learned. Lectures in theme blocks including industry guest lectures. Integrated exercises Recommended textbook: Floating Structures, a Guide for Design and Analysis, ISBN: 1-870553-357 Opportunity will be given to acquire the textbook at student discount through ODE staff. 5 individual excercises and written exam (open questions) Summary Design - at an advanced knowledge level - of floating offshore structures and elements thereof: ships, semi-submersibles, FPSOs, spar platforms, hybrid jack-up structures and elements such as mooring sytems and risers. Importance of functional design parameters and adaption of these over the lifetime of a floating offshore structure. Application of methods of analysis and criteria in design: wave loading and motion in waves, floating stability, (dynamic) positioning, structural strength and fatigue. Safety assessment and codes in relation to design. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Student grades are determined on the basis of the exercise work and a written examination. The exercises contribute 50% of the grade. Total course grade is only valid when both the exercises and the exam are undertaken in the same semester. Secretariat of ODE, Mrs. M.C. Dunant
Assessment Remarks
Contact
Page 71 of 186
OE4653
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Prof. C.A. Willemse 0/0/4/0
Marine Pipelines
4 3 3 4 English Knowledge from the following courses is applied in this course (OE 4653): CT 4130, OE 4601, OE 4630, OE 4654 Marine Pipelines concentrates on three aspects of subsea pipeline design: Pipeline Design: The internal and structural design of pipelines for oil, gas and multi-phase (liquid gas) flows. Pipelines are dimensioned based upon flow in relation to properties of the transported material as well as capital expenditure and operating costs involved. The need for and means of providing thermal insulation is discussed including the measures of assuring flow in pipelines. Pipeline Route Selection: Routing of pipelines through the sea as well as their shore approaches are covered. Special attention is given to sub-sea tie-ins, pipeline and cable crossings, pipeline protection from fishing gear, shore approaches and pipeline trenching. The consequences of pipeline temperature changes and upheaval buckling are integral aspects of this topic as well as the on-bottom stability (pipelines on or in the sea bed). Pipelines Installation / Construction: This segment presents current and new technologies for the installation of pipelines in varying water depths, ranging from a few meters to depths measured in kilometers coupled with the role which installation plays in the design of a pipeline. Special attention is given to supporting finite element analysis (FEM) calculations, construction start-up, sea-bed lay-down, tie-ins and to welding technology. A classroom exercise is included as an integral aspect of the knowledge gained. Participants completing this course successfully will be able to function at an advanced to superior knowledge level productively and quantitatively in marine pipeline design teams. Classroom lectures. recommended materials: Lecture material will be made available through the lectures. Students may want to use English language EXCEL for pipeline design computations. recommended lecture note / textbook: Subsea Pipeline Engineering, by Andrew C. Palmer and Roger A. King; 2nd edition ISBN 978-1-59370-133-8 Written exam (open questions) Summary: Marine Pipelines includes three aspects of subsea pipeline design: Flow assurance in pipelines, the internal design and dimensioning of pipelines for oil, gas and multi-phase flow, and the route selection. Pipeline route selection includes both deep sea and shore approach routing as well as design for on-bottom stability. Pipeline installation / construction methods and their effect on pipeline design. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Participants are assigned one final grade based upon the results of a written examination that covers all three aspects of the course. Secretariat of OE, Mrs. M. C. Dunant.
Assessment Remarks
Page 72 of 186
OE4654
Sub Sea Engineering
2 2 2 3 English Knowledge from OE 4601 and up to a certain extent from OE 4603, is applied in OE4654. The course Subsea Engineering includes the following elements: -Introduction and historical survey -Engineering aspects of subsea wells -Subsea oil and gas pumping -Risers and subsea control -Diver less methods of intervention and deep water systems -Subsea installation, maintenance and repair -Subsea exploration -Reliability engineering in relation to subsea work These elements will be integrated and linked to a subsea field development scenario via a series of short in-class exercises carried out by teams of participating students. Participants completing this course successfully will be able to function at a advanced knowledge level productively and quantitatively in subsea engineering / marine pipeline design teams. Classroom lectures. Specific notes: "Subsea Engineering" by J. Preedy Available at OE secretariat. recommended other materials: Some students may want to use a laptop computer with English language EXCEL for classroom design computations. Written exam (open questions) Summary: Subsea Engineering is concerned with how the need to work in or under the sea affects operations being carried out there. Topics include drilling and hydrocarbon well maintenance activities as well as control systems, remotely operated vehicles and their capabilities, installation of hardware on the sea bed, and how all of these are affected by concerns for safety and reliability. A series of short exercises will be carried out during the classes. Because of the breadth of topics covered, only a routine to advanced knowledge level will be achieved providing a solid base for further individual development. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Grades are assigned based on the results of a written examination.
Assessment Remarks
OE5662
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Ir. N.F.B. Diepeveen 0/0/4/0
Offshore Wind Farm Design
Study Goals
Education Method Assessment Remarks
3 3 Different, to be announced English This course makes students familiar with the design of offshore wind farms in general and focusses on the foundation design in particular. The course is based on actual cases of real offshore wind farms that have been built recently or will be built in the near future. The course gives a general overview to make the student familiar with the different components, equipment and parties involved. It focusses on general wind farm economics, environmental impact, permit acquisistion, layout, grid connection, installation methodology and support structure design for a specific wind turbine for a specific offshore location. Lectures plus exercise Exercise report and presentation Combining knowledge from the design of bottom founded structures and wind energy conversion systems, the course concentrates on the design of an offshore wind farm. Installation and maintenance logistics are discussed as well as the transportation of electric power to shore. Economics and environmental impact play deciding roles. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Based on quality, pace and reporting of the exercise work
Page 73 of 186
OE5663
Dynamic Positioning
Nabestaanden van H.T. Grimmelius Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema 3/0/0/0 (course in 2nd master year) 1 1 1 English Dynamic Positioning System Design includes the following subjects, each to be dealt with in 3 hours of class: Introduction: definition of Dynamic Positioning, short history of its development, areas of application, normal system composition, special devices for special purposes. Physical options for position measurement and their inherent strengths/weaknesses, equipment involved in position measurement, reliability of the position signal, redundancy in equipment and principles, dead reckoning modes. The importance of measuring oscillatory ship motions. Design implications of the selected measurement systems.
Design of the control algorithms: basic PID controls, signal/noise ratios and their effect on filter design, consequences of applying digital computers, Kalman optimal control routines, redundancy on the control system side. Ergonomics in the operator interface design. Systems available on the market. The 3-D case of ROV control. Physical options for generating thrust on a floating vessel: Tunnel and azimuthing thrusters. Rudder/propeller interaction. Available thruster sizes. Thruster efficiency. Response times of thrust changes. Mechanical limitations and reliability. Thrust feed-back modes. Hydromechanical aspects of DP: wave and current load characteristics. Aspects of thruster allocation. Thruster-hull interaction. System performance analysis in the design phase and in operation. Shipboard consequences of the installation of a DP system: Central or distributed controls. Interfaces with the power plant. Placing the position reference sensors. An exercise in capability calculation, demonstration of DP interface and simulation, modelbasin demonstration. The objective of this course is to prepare participants to understand (at a routine knowledge level) and to participate in teams doing the design of dynamic positioning systems for a variety of offshore and subsea engineering applications. Successful participants will also be able to work fruitfully with those more expert in supporting disciplines to come to an optimized dynamic positioning system for a given application. exercise lectures syllabus: Dynamic Positioning System Design Written exam (open questions) Summary: This course unites the disciplines of: Control theory and system design Hydromechanics Mechanical Engineering Position monitoring to present theory needed to design a dynamic positioning or tracking system for offshore applications such as work ships on the sea surface and autonomous as well as towed underwater vehicles. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Written examination with open questions dr.ir. H.T. Grimmelius
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks
Page 74 of 186
OE5664
Offshore Moorings
1 1 1 2 English OE5664 uses CT4399 and OE4630 The classroom activities are structured around the following 8 elements each taking roughly 3 hours of classroom time: Anchors: Soil properties are reviewed to the extent that they are important to anchor behavior in the soil. (Note that a significant number of participants usually come from Marine Technology - and outside the IOE MSc curriculum; they have no background in soil mechanics.) Special attention is given to specific anchor-related soil properties such as dilatency. The behavior of a number of different anchor types is demonstrated in a laboratory session. Anchor Line Mechanics: Catenary line theory is reviewed along with practical ways of solving the resulting equations in an effective way. Anchor Line Materials and Components: The materials and accessories that make up a mooring system are presented along with their relative merits. Exercise Introduction: The exercise requirements are explained along with a suggested approach to achieving an optimum mooring design. The most important economic evaluation steps are touched upon. The classes are set up to give the student practical insight - supported by applied theory - in the design and optimization process for an offshore mooring system. The exercise forces each student to integrate the knowledge gained and to make practical engineering and economic compromises in a realistic engineering situation. Successfull completion prepares one to function qualitatively and quantitatively at a superior knowledge level in a mooring design team. lectures (to introduce the excersise) exercise obligatory lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): Books: Vrijhof Anchor Manual Available at the section secretariat. recommended other materials: Handy background information comes from: OE4652 Design of Floating Structures OE5663 Dynamic Positioning System Design recommended lecturenote(s)/textbook(s): Deep Water Fiber Moorings Barge Mooring The website www.offshoremoorings.org The students have to create a website on a specific topic in groups of 4. In the last lecture planned these websites will be presented to all the students, the lecturer and guests. After making corrections, the websites will be published on the internet on www.offshoremoorings.org Summary The course treats the design of offshore mooring systems literally from the ground up: Starting with the anchor and its soils mechanics in the sea bed, via the mechanics of a single mooring line and system of lines. The course concludes by touching on other mooring concepts and the dynamic behavior of the moored object as a non-linear mechanical system. 40% 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Grades are assigned based on the contents of the website created, based on the presentation, but also based on the technology used to create the website, such as easy navigation, user interface, etc. Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema
Study Goals
Assessment
Remarks
Design Content Department Judgement Contact
Page 75 of 186
OE5665
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Study Goals Education Method Assessment Department Ir. W.E. De Vries
Offshore Wind Support Structures

4/0/0/0 (course in 2nd master year) 1 1 1 2 English This course focuses on the design of support structures for offshore wind turbines. It deals with the entire process of design for extreme and fatigue load, soil-structure interaction as well as fabrication and installation issues. Understand the design process of support structures up to the detailed design. The student will be able to make an optimised design of a structure using the current industry standard software and methodologies The course consists of 10 lectures and an assignment in which the students will individually develop a complete support structure design Grading based on the process of the assignment, the assignment report and the final presenation of the assignment. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
OE5670-11
Responsible Instructor Exam Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Study Goals Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema Prof.dr.ir. C. van Rhee 0/x/0/0 (2nd master year)
Integrating Exercise
11
Education Method Assessment Remarks
None (Self Study) 2 none English Integrated exercises This curriculum element is provided in order to allow a participant to: Further develop his or her skill level in some area of offshore engineering by getting additional practice with the application of methods learned from (other) classes. Polish up his or her research and reporting skills (in a broad sense) as preparation for a thesis project. Some participants find industrial sponsors for this mini-thesis work. This is fine as long as the overall scope can be fit into a time period of about 8 weeks. The integrating exercise can be used as a part of the MSc thesis. For instance literature survey or preliminary investigation, but should be reported seperately. Exercise Based on exercise report and oral presentation summary Further skill development in a particular area of offshore engineering. Often performed in-house at the TUD, sometimes sponsored by industry. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Based on exercise report and oral presentation Secretariat of OE, Mrs. M.C. Dunant
Page 76 of 186
OE5671
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. C. van Rhee 4/0/0/0
Dredging Equipment Design
1 1 1 2 English dredging equipment, mechanical dredgers, hydraulic dredgers, boundary conditions, design criteria, instrumentation and automotion Problem definition Boundary conditions Processes of excavating, transport and deposities Energy consumption and power requirement Technical design Special subject. Wear, instrumentation and automation The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledge of the dredging processes. Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment. Study Goals The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledge of the dredging processes. Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment.
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Design Content Department Contact
Study Goals The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledge of the dredging processes. Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment. Project Lecture notes Prof.ir. W.J. Vlasblom and Prof. Dr. ir. C. van Rhee Report + Oral Exam 60% 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema
OE5672
Course Contents
Dredging Laboratory
dredging equipment, mechanical dredgers, hydraulic dredgers, boundary conditions, design criteria, instrumentation and automotion Problem definition Boundary conditions Processes of excavating, transport and deposities Energy consumption and power requirement Technical design Special subject. Wear, instrumentation and automation The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledge of the dredging processes. Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment. The goal of the lecture is to get insight in the procedure for designing dredging equipment based on the knowledge of the dredging processes. Special aspects during design and use of dredging equipment. Project Lecture notes Prof.ir. W.J. Vlasblom Report 60% 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Design Content Department Contact
Page 77 of 186
SC4010
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. A.J.J. van der Weiden Dr. P.S.C. Heuberger 6/0/0/0
Introduction Project SC
Study Goals
1 1 none English To achieve good controller designs it is necessary to connect theory with problems of practical interest. In this project the concepts and theory of the basic program concerning Control Systems and Signal Analysis will be reviewed. Implementation issues of e.g. PID controllers via continuous-time techniques on real experimental servo-systems are treated. The laboratory sessions use a digital signal processing controller. These controllers are programmed via the Simulink block diagram language which is part of the Matlab control system design software. The goal of this project is to refresh and apply theoretical knowledge gained in previous classical control courses and to get the ability to tune mechanical servo systems. The concepts and tools to be used include modelling mechanical systems, measurement of the frequency responses and controller design in the time and frequency domain. The designed controllers have to be implemented on a real experimental servo-system and their performances have to be analysed. Project combined with theoretical lectures to support the students during the exercises Lecture notes Undergraduate curriculum, experience with MATLAB could be useful but is not required. The results of the exercises and experiments must be summarized in a short report, and will be discussed and examined during an oral examination. The deadline for handing in the report is November 15, 2010. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites Assessment
Department
Page 78 of 186
SC4025
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. P.M.J. Van den Hof Dr. P.S.C. Heuberger Prof.dr.ir. P.M.J. Van den Hof T. Keviczky 6/0/0/0
Control Theory
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English State-space description of multivariable linear dynamic systems, interconnections, block diagrams Linearization, equilibria, stability, Lyapunov functions and the Lyapunov equation Dynamic response, relation to modes, the matrix exponential and the variation-of-constants formula Realization of transfer matrix models by state space descriptions, coordinate changes, normal forms Controllability, stabilizability, uncontrollable modes and pole-placement by state-feedback LQ regulator, robustness properties, algebraic Riccati equations Observability, detectability, unobservable modes, state-estimation observer design Output feedback synthesis (one- and two-degrees of freedom) and separation principle Disturbance and reference signal modeling, the internal model principle The student is able to apply the developed tools both to theoretical questions and to simulation-based controller design projects. More specifically, the student must be able to: Translate differential equation models into state-space and transfer matrix descriptions Linearize a system, determine equilibrium points and analyze local stability Describe the effect of pole locations to the dynamic system response in time- and frequency-domain Verify controllability, stabilizability, observability, detectability, minimality of realizations Sketch the relevance of normal forms and their role for controller design and model reduction Describe the procedure and purpose of pole-placement by state-feedback and apply it Apply LQ optimal state-feedback control and analyze the controlled system Reproduce how to solve Riccati equations and describe the solution properties Explain the relevance of state estimation and build converging observers Apply the separation principle for systematic 1dof and 2dof output-feedback controller design Build disturbance and reference models and apply the internal model principle
Lectures and Exercise Sessions The exercises will be partially based on a Matlab in order to train the use of modern computational tools for model-based control system design. B. Friedland, Control System Design: An Introduction to State-space Methods. Dover Publications, 2005 K.J. Astrom, R.M. Murray, Feedback Systems: An Introduction for Scientists and Engineers, Princeton University Press, Princeton and Oxford, 2009 http://www.cds.caltech.edu/~murray/amwiki/index.php?title=Main_Page Written mid-term examination (15%) and written final examination (85%). For the resit examination (January 2011) there will be a written examination (100%) for which the mid-term result will not count. Simulation-based state-space approach to model-based control system design 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Assessment Design Content Department
Page 79 of 186
SC4026
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. A. Abate Dr. P.S.C. Heuberger
Control System Design
4/0/0/0 (2 hours lectures and 2 hours exercises) 1 1 1 2 English State-space description of single-input, single-output linear dynamic systems, interconnections, block diagrams Linearization, equilibria, stability, Lyapunov functions and the Lyapunov equation Dynamic response, relation to modes, the matrix exponential Realization of transfer function models by state space descriptions, coordinate changes, canonical forms Controllability, stabilizability, uncontrollable modes and pole-placement by state-feedback Application of LQ regulator Observability, detectability, unobservable modes, state-estimation observer design Output feedback synthesis and separation principle Reference signal modeling, integral action for zero steady-state error By taking this course, the student - will be able to master the introduced theoretical concepts in systems theory and feedback control designand - will be able to practically apply these concepts to design projects and tasks - will be capable to implement these concepts into model-based controller synthesis procedures through Matlab and Simulink - and will be able to relate the learned concepts and techniques to other more specialized ones, to potentially integrate them by taking adjacent courses. More specifically, the student will be able to: - Translate differential equation models into state-space and transfer function descriptions - Rationalize differences between state-space and transfer function approaches - Linearize a system, determine its equilibrium points, analyze directly its local stability, leverage Lyapunov theory to study general stability properties - Describe the effect of eigenvalue/pole locations to the dynamic system response in time/frequency domain. Contrast step and impulse responses. Analyze transients and steady-state - Investigate model controllability. Formulate and apply the procedure of pole-placement by state-feedback, as well as LQ optimal state-feedback control - Derive observability properties. Formulate and apply the procedure of state estimation and build converging observers - Formulate the separation principle and employ it for the design of output feedback - Build reference models and achieve zero steady-state error using integral control. Lectures 2/0/0/0 and exercise sessions 2/0/0/0 The exercise sessions and homework assignments will be in part based on Matlab and Simulink, in order to train the student in the use of modern computational tools for model-based control system design. Textbook (its use is strongly recommended): K.J. Astrom, R.M. Murray, Feedback Systems: An Introduction for Scientists and Engineers, Princeton University Press, Princeton and Oxford, 2009 Available online for download: http://www.cds.caltech.edu/~murray/amwiki/index.php?title=Main_Page Successful completion of - three homework sets (30%) during the course and - a final written examination (70%) Simulation-based state-space approach to model-based control system design. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Study Goals
Assessment
Page 80 of 186
SC4032
Physical Modelling for Systems and Control

Nabestaanden van O.H. Bosgra Dr. P.S.C. Heuberger 0/4/0/0 2 2 2 3 English SC 4032 Physical Modelling for Systems and Control Contents 2010/2011
1.Formulation of dynamic models for physical plants and equipment. Role of System boundary, choice of input- and output variables. Causality and properness of input-output behaviour. Microscopic versus macroscopic conservation laws. Linearization around steady-state operating conditions or around trajectory. Linear parameter-varying versus nonlinear and linearized models. Frozen behaviour versus time-varying behaviour. 2.Simple process models. Role of residence-time distribution. Distributed-parameter models versus compartmental models. Characterization of flow behaviour with respect to mixing and backflow. Series connection of flow systems. 3.Bilateral coupling between subsystems. Causality, exchange of power between subsystems.2-port behaviour. Relationships with choice of boundary conditions in distributed-parameter systems. Hydraulic transmission line, heat conduction as examples of bilateral coupling 4.Time scales of dynamic phenomena. Equation ordering and scaling of model equations. Modal approximation, time moments and Pade approximation. Singular perturbations. 5.Model reduction by projection and residualization Model reduction through ba;lancing and truncation. Role of Hankel singular values. Closed-loop relevant model reduction. Examples, finite dimensional approximation of distributed-parameter systems. Realization theory, approximate realization as model reduction step. 6.Rosenbrock's system matrix. System equivalence, interconnection of subsystems. Models in differential-algebraic equations for interconnected subsystems Index problems as result of interconnection of state variables. Nonproper internal or external behaviour, use of Kronecker-Weierstrass form Study Goals The student must be able to formulate dynamic models on the basis of an understanding of underlying physical principles. In addition, understanding major system properties must enable the student to manipulate the models, make them simpler (if desired) and bring them in a suitable format that allows implementation in a software platform. The student must be able to explain properties and behaviour of the system models under study. There will be handouts of course notes, also available electronically, in addition to copies of the course slides. A set of Matlab/Simulink/theory exercises will be available. Solving the exercises constitutes the basis for the assessment. The results of the exercises must be summarized in a short report, and will be discussed and examined during an oral examination, during which also the contents of the course notes will be the subject of discussion. The report on the exercises has to be handed in ultimately April 15, 2011. The exam can in principle be executed throughout the year, both individually as well as in groups of 2 students. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Education Method Assessment
Department
Page 81 of 186
SC4040
Filtering & Identification

Prof.dr.ir. M.H.G. Verhaegen Dr.ir. J.W. van Wingerden 0/4/0/0
Study Goals
2 2 2 3 English BSc-degree in Engineering or Mathematics with basic knowledge of linear algebra, stochastic processes, signals and systems and control theory. The objective of this course is to show the use of linear algebra and its geometric interpretation in deriving computationally simple and easy to understand solutions to various system theoretical problems. Review of some topics from linear algebra, dynamical system theory and statistics, that are relevant for filtering and system identification. Kalman filtering as a weighted least squares problem. Prediction error and output error system identification as nonlinear least squares problems. Subspace identification based on basic linear algebra tools such as the QR factorization and the SVD. Discussion of some practical aspects in the system identification cycle. See also: http:/www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4040. At the end of the course the student should be able to: Derive the solution of the weighted stochastic and deterministic linear least squares problem. Proof the properties of unbiasedness and minimum variance of the weighted stochastic and deterministic linear least squares problem. Use an observer to estimate the state sequence of a linear time invariant system. Use the Kalman filter to estimate the state sequence of a linear time invariant system using knowledge of the system matrices, the system input and output measurements, and the covariance matrices of the uncertainty of these measurements. Describe the difference between the predicted, filtered and smoothed state estimates. Formulate and solve the Kalman filter problem as a weighted stochastic least squars problem. Use the Kalman filter theory to estimate unknown inputs of a linear dynamical system in the presence of noise perturbations on the model. Use the Kalman filter theory to design filters for detection (sensor, actuator or component) failures in a linear dynamical system in the presence of noise perturbations on the model. Derive subspace identification methods for different noise models and relate the different subspace identification methods via the solution of a linear least squares problem. Implement a least squares solution in matlab for elementary linear estimation and subspace identification problems. Apply the filtering and identification methods to derive a mathematical model from real-life data sequences. In this application the students use the systematic identification cyclic approach to refine the model. Lectures 0/4/0/0 Book Filtering and System Identification: A Least Squares Approach by Michel Verhaegen and Vincent Verdult. ISBN: 13-9780521875127 Deliverable by the Studentsociety Gezelschap Leeghwater. Written exam (open book) and practical exercise. The software package Matlab is needed to solve the practical exercise. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 82 of 186
SC4050
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr. R. Babuska Ir. A.E.M. Huesman 0/0/0/4
Integration Project SC
4 4 Different, to be announced English The course is based on practical laboratory sessions, in which students gain hands-on experience with the application of control theory to real-world systems. Matlab and Simulink are used as the primary software environment for the design, analysis and real -time implementation of the algorithms. Students work in groups of two in the lab, with a setup of their choice: inverted pendulum (two variants), 'helicopter' model, inverted wedge, rotational double pendulum, crane and a distillation column. The goal of this course is to integrate and apply the theoretical knowledge gained in the courses `Control Theory' (SC4020), `Modeling and System Analysis' (SC4030) and `Filtering and Identification' (SC4040), which are compulsory within the M.Sc. program 'Systems and Control.' The concepts and tools to be used include mechanistic modeling (based on principles like mass balances, Lagrange equations, etc.), filtering and estimation (e.g., Kalman filtering), linear control design and performance analysis, system identification in open and closed loop. It is assumed that students already know these concepts or are able to look them up in the literature. No theoretical lectures are given in this course. Project See Blackboard Control Theory (SC4025) Physical Modeling for System and Control (SC4032) Filtering and Identification (SC4040) Students who have not followed these courses should contact the lecturer in order to find out whether their control background is at a sufficient level and what literature they should consult. There is no written exam. The final grade is determined on the basis of a written report, the discussion of the results with the lecturer and the performance in the lab sessions. The laboratory sessions are compulsory in the time slots scheduled for this course - usually on Monday morning (8:45-10:30) and Wednesday morning (8:45-10:30). Besides these slots, other dates and times will be scheduled by the students. Location: DCSC laboratories on the fourth floor and ground floor of block 5A, Mekelweg 2. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites
Assessment Special Information
Department
Page 83 of 186
SC4060
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. A.J.J. van den Boom 0/0/3/0
Model Predictive Control
Study Goals
3 3 3 4 English Undergraduate curriculum The model predictive control (MPC) strategy yields the optimization of a performance index with respect to some future control sequence, using predictions of the output signal based on a process model, coping with amplitude constraints on inputs, outputs and states. The course presents an overview of the most important predictive control strategies, the theoretical aspects as well as the practical implications, that makes model predictive control so successful in many areas of industry, such as petro-chemical industry and chemical process industry. Hands-on experience is obtained by MATLAB exercises with academic examples and a industrial simulation of MPC on a two-product (binary) distillation column. Contents of the course: General introduction. Differences in models and model-structures, advantages and limitations. Prediction models in state-space setting. Standard predictive control scheme. Relation standard form with GPC, LQPC and other predictive control schemes. Finite/Infinite horizon MPC. Solution of the standard predictive control problem. Stability, robustness, initial and advanced tuning. Robust design in predictive control. See also: http://www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4060 Study Goals: The student should be able to 1. Explain how and why MPC has emerged from industry. 2. List the five basic items of MPC and discuss their role. 3. Identify, recognize and describe different type of models in MPC and explain when a type of model is suited for a specific application. 4. Show that all models can be transformed into a state-space model. 5. Understand the concept of prediction in MPC. 6. Make a prediction in the noiseless and the noisy case. 7. Explain why a standard formulation is desirable. 8. Transform any MPC problem into the standard MPC problem. 9. Derive the steady-state of a system. 10. Solve the finite and infinite horizon problem. 11. Derive the realization for the LTI-case and for the inequality constrained case. 12. Describe two ways to deal with infeasibility. 13. Discuss stability for the LTI case and in the inequality constrained case. 14. Describe the use of the end-point constraint and the infinite prediction horizon. 15. Give the relation of the MPC scheme and the IMC scheme. 16. Motivate the rules-of-thumb for initial tuning and use these rules for tuning an MPC controller. 17. Describe the concept of robustness in MPC. 18. Motivate and use the rules of robust tuning in MPC. 19. Derive an MPC controller for various academic and industrial examples using MATLAB. Lectures 0/0/3/0 Course notes "Model Predictive Control" by Ton van den Boom (TU Delft) 2011. Written exam and a homework assignment Computer use: for the homework assignment, the use of MATLAB on PC is required. The assignment can be done either at home or at the DCSC laboratory. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 84 of 186
SC4070
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Prof.dr. R. Babuska 0/0/4/0
Control Systems Lab
Study Goals
3 3 Different, to be announced English Control Systems (SC3020ET) or similar In this course, students have the opportunity to design and implement their own controllers for various laboratory systems (helicopter model, inverted pendulum, inverted wedge, gantry crane). In this way, they gain more insight in the use of control theory and gain experience with the practical implementation of computer-controlled systems. MATLAB and SIMULINK are used as the basic platform for the design, analysis, simulation and real-time implementation. The control design methods to be used include standard techniques (digital state feedback, output feedback, PID control) as well as more advanced methods (adaptive control, linear quadratic control, systems identification). In the beginning of the course, a refresher is given in which the essential topics from theoretical control courses are reviewed. See also: http://www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4070 Main objective: make operational and apply in practice the knowledge from control theory and system identification courses. Gain hands-on experience with the design and implementation of a computer-controlled system. After successfully completing the course, the student is able to: * Implement in Matlab / Simulink a given mathematical model of a mechatronic laboratory system. Estimate unknown parameters in the model by using experimental data measured on the process. Validate the model against measured process data. * Linearize the model around an operating point. Assess the accuracy of the linearized model with respect to the nonlinear one and with respect to the real process. Identify limitations of the linearized model. Choose a suitable sampling period, discretize the linearized model. * Define meaningful performance specifications for a control system to be designed for the given process. Selected a suitable type of controller. Compute the controller's parameters such that the above specifications are met. Verify the closed-loop performance in realistic simulations. * Apply the controller to the process in real-time experiments. Evaluate the performance of the control system. Identify reasons for possible discrepancies between simulations and real-time results. Suggest possible improvements. * Demonstrate proficiency in using Matlab and Simulink as the primary tool for the achievement of the above objectives. * Document the design steps, considerations, choices and the achieved control results effectively in a written report. Present and defend the results in an oral presentation. Lectures, laboratory sessions Book: Astrom K.J. and Wittenmark B. Computer Controlled Systems Theory and Design (Third Edition). Prentice Hall, 1997. Written report, presentation Computer use: laboratory assignment. Design content (60%): control design. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 85 of 186
SC4081-10
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr. R. Babuska 0/0/4/0
Knowledge Based Control Systems
Study Goals
3 3 3 4 English Theory and applications of knowledge-based and intelligent control systems, including fuzzy logic control and artificial neural networks: * Introduction to intelligent control * Fuzzy sets and systems * Intelligent data analysis and system identification * Knowledge based fuzzy control (direct and supervisory) * Artificial neural networks, learning algorithms * Control based on fuzzy and neural models * Reinforcement learning * Examples of real-world applications Main objective: understand and be able to apply 'intelligent control' techniques, namely fuzzy logic and artificial neural networks to both adaptive and non-adaptive control. After successfully completing the course, the student is able to: * Name the limitations of traditional linear control methods and state the motivation for intelligent control. Give examples of intelligent control techniques and their applications. * Formulate the mathematical definitions of a fuzzy set and the associated concepts and properties (alpha-cut, support, convexity, normality, etc.), basic fuzzy set-theoretic operators, fuzzy relations and relational composition. * Explain the notion of a fuzzy system and define the Mamdani, Takagi-Sugeno and singleton fuzzy model. State and apply the compositional rule of inference and the Mamdani algorithm. Define and apply the center of gravity and the mean of maxima defuzzification method. * Describe how fuzzy models can be constructed from data, give examples of techniques for antecedent and consequent parameter estimation. Compute consequent parameters in Takagi-Sugeno fuzzy model by using the least-squares method. * Explain the difference between model-based and model-free fuzzy control design. Give the basic steps in knowledge-based fuzzy control design. Define a low-level and a high-level (supervisory) fuzzy controller, explain the differences. * Explain the concept of an artificial neural network and a neuro-fuzzy network, give some examples and explain the differences. Define and apply the back-propagation training algorithm. Explain the difference between first-order and second-order gradient methods. * Show how dynamics are incorporated into fuzzy models and neural networks, give examples. Discuss how dynamic models can be identified from data. * Give block diagrams and explain the notions of inverse-model control, predictive control, internal model control, direct and indirect adaptive control. Explain the meaning of the variables and parameters in recursive least-squares estimation. * Explain the motivation and the basic elements of reinforcement learning. Define and explain the concepts of value function, Bellman equation, value iteration, Q-iteration, on-line reinforcement learning algorithms, actor-critic control scheme. * Define hard, fuzzy and possibilistic partitions, explain the fuzzy c-means algorithm and its parameters. * Implement and apply the above concepts to a simulated nonlinear process or a given data set, using Matlab and Simulink. Lectures and two assignments - literature assignment and practical Matlab / Simulink assignment. Lecture notes: R. Babuska. Knowledge-Based Control Systems. Overhead sheets and other course material (software, demos) can be downloaded from the course Website (www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4081) and handed out at the lectures. Written exam, closed book. * SC4081-10 D1 The exam constitute 60% of the final mark * SC4081-10 D2 Literature assignment 20% of the final mark * SC4081-10 D3 Practical Matlab / Simulink assignment 20% of the final mark. A mini-symposium is organized in order for the students to present the results of the literature assignment. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment
Department
SC4081-10 D1
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Department
Knowledge Based Control Systems, Exam

Prof.dr. R. Babuska See details SC4081-10 3 3 3 4 English 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 86 of 186
SC4081-10 D2
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Exam Period Course Language Department
Knowledge Based Control Systems, Literature

Prof.dr. R. Babuska See details SC4081-10 Different, to be announced Different, to be announced English 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
.5
SC4081-10 D3
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Department
Knowledge Based Control Systems, Matlab

Prof.dr. R. Babuska See details SC4081-10 3 3 Different, to be announced English 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
.5
SC4091
Optimization in Systems and Control

Prof.dr.ir. B.H.K. De Schutter
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English Basic knowledge about linear state space models and stability, and basic experience with Matlab In this course we study numerical optimization methods, mainly from a user point of view, and we discuss several applications of optimization in systems and control. First we discuss the basic characteristics and properties of various optimization methods. We also provide guidelines to determine which algorithms are most suited for a given optimization problem. Next, the previously treated optimization methods are used in a multi-criteria controller design application. We also focus on the translation of the design constraints into mathematical constraints. Another important topic is the determination of good initial conditions. For more information, see: http://www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4091 After this course the students should be able to select the most efficient and best suited optimization algorithm for a given optimization problem. They should also be able to reformulate an engineering problem into a (mathematical) optimization problem starting from the given specifications. They should be able to reduce the complexity of the problem using simplifications and/or approximations so as to augment the efficiency of the solution approach. Lectures Lecture notes "Optimization in systems and control" by T. van den Boom and B. De Schutter, Delft, 2009 + handouts written examination (closed book, no calculators) + report on the practical assignment 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 87 of 186
SC4110
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. X.J.A. Bombois Prof.dr.ir. P.M.J. Van den Hof 0/0/6/0
System Identification
Study Goals
3 3 Exam by appointment English Experimental modelling of dynamic systems; methodology. Discrete-time signal- and system-analysis. Identification of transferfunctions. Representations of linear models; black-box models. Identification of prediction-error-methods; least squares-method. Approximation modelling; algorithms. Experiment design and data-analysis. Identification in time- and frequency-domain; closed-loop identification; model validation; Matlab toolbox; laboratory assignment. General learning objectives System identification deduces and subsequently validates mathematical models of real-life dynamical systems (industrial processes, mechanical servo-systems, ) based on experimental data collected from those systems. This course can be considered as a follow up of the course Sc4010 Filtering and Identification where different solutions to identify a model are presented (note nevertheless that Sc4010 is in no way a prerequisite for this course). The course Sc4110 selects two widely-used linear identification methodologies: Empirical Transfer Function Estimate (ETFE) and Prediction Error Identification (PEI) and provides the students with engineering and theoretical skills to perform the identification in a suitable way. In particular, after this course, the students are able to set up an experiment, identify a nominal model, assess the accuracy/precision of this model, and make appropriate design choices to arrive at a validated model. Detailed learning objectives: 1)Based on time-domain input-output data collected on the true system in open loop, the student is able to deduce a frequencydomain model of a system using the ETFE identification method 2)The student is able to specify the bias and variance properties of models identified by the ETFE identification method. 3)For the ETFE identification method, the student is able to interpret the bias and variance properties of identified models, and knows how these properties can be influenced by input signal design and by applying windowing techniques. 4)The student is able to specify different linear model structures, and to characterize their computational and statistical properties in prediction error identification. 5)The student masters the statistical properties (bias, variance, consistency) of prediction error estimators both for the situation of exact plant and noise model sets, and for the situation of exact plant model sets only. 6)The student can interpret estimated models as approximations of an underlying physical systems, through the specification of well-defined approximation criteria in the frequency domain, and is able to select design variables so as to arrive at identified models that have prechosen approximative properties. 7)The student is able to specify how experiment design and signal to noise ratio affect estimated models. This includes mastering the concept of sufficiently exciting input signals, and the design of appropriate input signals. 8)The student is able to apply and interpret correlation-based model structure validation tests, and to draw conclusions on the (in)validity of model structures, distinguishing between plant models and noise models. 9)For both ETFE and PE identification methods, the student is able to appropriately acquire digital data from a real-life system (choice of sampling frequency, data processing). Required level for the assignment 1)the student is able to explain in details the presented theory, to demonstrate important properties and to make links and comparisons between the different parts of the course 2)the student is able to use the presented tools in practice on a laboratory setup and to interpret his/her result with a critical attitude
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites Assessment Remarks Department
Lectures and project 0/0/6/0 Assignment form: final project on a laboratory setup followed by an oral examination lecture notes and slides Basics in linear algebra and signal theory Oral and project Assignment form: final project on a laboratory setup followed by an oral examination Course load: 14 theory courses, 3 exercise sessions and 2 computer sessions 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 88 of 186
SC4120
Course Coordinator Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Special Topics in Signals, Systems & Control

Dr. P.S.C. Heuberger Prof.dr.ir. P.M.J. Van den Hof 0/0/0/2 4 4 Exam by appointment English The lecture has a changing content, directed towards the current developments in signal analysis, system identification and control engineering. It either consists of contributions from different lecturers, and is sometimes organized in the form of a seminar sequence with active participation of students. Please notice that the course is not offered every year. Check Blackboard for details. Acquire competence to report on a particularly chosen scientific development within signal analysis, system identification or control Identify essentials in an advanced scientific article or book chapter about signals, systems or control Compose a summary with a balanced exposition of generic aspects, details, examples Orally report on results of investigation, including an educated evaluation of the subject Defend presentation and evaluation in a scientific discussion with audience Enter a scientific dispute about the particular topic of specialization of a fellow-student Lecture 0/0/0/2 Lecture notes or book to be announced Appointment 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Study Goals
SC4150
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Course Contents 3/0/0/0
Fuzzy Logic and Engineering Applications

Prof.dr.ir. J. Hellendoorn
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English Core curriculum Fuzzy logic techniques can be applied in various engineering domains, mainly in fields where reasoning under uncertainty plays an important role. This course provides background in fuzzy set theory, fuzzy logic and related soft-computing techniques with applications in control, information and data processing, artificial intelligence and decision making. See also: http:/www.dcsc.tudelft.nl/~sc4150. Main objective: understand fuzzy logic, fuzzy decision making and fuzzy control, and be able to translate linguistic expressions into fuzzy sets and derive conclusions. Understand the difference between fuzziness, probability and possibility. Understand characteristic functions, operations on fuzzy sets and fuzzy relations. Apply the Compositional Rule of Inference and the Generalized Modus Ponens. Analyze the defuzzification procedure. Know fuzzy data bases. Apply Mamdani and Gdel inference for fuzzy control. Understand look-up tables for fuzzy controllers, stability and robustness. Apply sliding mode fuzzy control. Synthesize fuzzy decision making. Know subjectivity and single-step, single-person decision making. Apply measures, weights, and criteria-criteria dependency. Analyze decision operators. Lectures Course notes (sold online via Blackboard) Written, open book 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 89 of 186
SC4160
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents
Modeling and Control of Hybrid Systems

Prof.dr.ir. B.H.K. De Schutter Prof.dr.ir. B.H.K. De Schutter Dr.ir. A. Abate 0/0/4/0
Study Goals
3 3 3 4 English basic systems and control course (such as e.g. SC3020ET, SC4020, SC4031, ...), basic experience with Matlab (for the practical assignment) Hybrid systems are characterized by the interaction of time-continuous models (governed by differential or difference equations) on the one hand, and logic rules and discrete-event systems (described by, e.g., automata, finite state machines, etc.) on the other. In this course we give an overview of the field of hybrid systems ranging from modeling, over analysis and simulation, to verification and control. We particularly focus on modeling, analysis, and control of tractable classes of hybrid systems. After this course the students should be familiar with some basic modeling, analysis and control techniques for hybrid systems, and they should be able to explain in their own words the main ideas of each method and to indicate the major advantages and disadvantages of each method. The students should also be able to apply these techniques on simple case studies. Lectures 0/0/4/0 Lecture notes "Modeling and control of hybrid systems" by B. De Schutter and W.P.M.H. Heemels, Delft 2009 practical assignment with report and oral discussion (open book) 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
SC4170AP
Inverse Problems & Statistical Signal Processing

Dr.ir. A.J. den Dekker Prof.dr.ir. P.M.J. Van den Hof 0/2/0/0 2 2 Exam by appointment English Inverse problems, regularization, Bayesian statistical inference and parameter estimation, Kalman filtering, interval estimation and hypothesis testing. General learning objectives: After this course, the student is able to analyze inverse problems from the perspective of wanting to make inferences about physical systems from experimental measurements. solve inverse problems making use of linear algebra as well as statistical signal processing methods. Specific learning objectives: After this course, the student is able to define and identify well-posed and ill-posed inverse problems. differentiate between well-conditioned and ill-conditioned inverse problems. classify linear inverse problems as model fitting problems or indirect imaging problems. solve linear model fitting problems by means of Singular Value Decomposition (SVD) using MATLAB. illustrate the sensitivity of image reconstruction to noise and small singular values. solve linear ill-posed inverse problems using Thikonov regularization and Truncated Singular Value Decomposition (TSVD). illustrate the trade-off between the data misfit and the solution semi-norm by calculating the L-curve and employ this curve to choose an appropriate value of the regularization parameter in regularization methods for linear inverse problems. efficiently solve large systems of simultaneous equations for regularization problems using MATLAB. describe the role of probability and statistics in inverse problems. employ the concepts forward and inverse probability, Bayes theorem, prior and posterior probability, likelihood function, sufficient statistic, bias, (co)variance and statistical inference to inverse problem analysis. derive the minimum mean-square error estimator, the maximum a posteriori estimator, the maximum likelihood estimator and the minimum variance that an estimator can have for a given bias (the Cramr-Rao Lower Bound). assess whether or not a given model is appropriate for explaining the data by means of Monte Carlo simulations and by testing the goodness of fit against carefully chosen statistical standards. quantify uncertainties in estimated parameters. apply standard, numerical, iterative methods for multidimensional nonlinear optimization to nonlinear estimation problems describe regularization in a Bayesian framework. solve (recursive linear) inverse problems using the (recursive) least squares algorithm. apply the (extended) Kalman filter to solve inverse problems with time-varying parameters (using MATLAB). 7 lectures or self-study (depending on the number of students enrolled) Course Notes, available on Blackboard. 1 assignment plus oral exam 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Study Goals
Page 90 of 186
SC4180ES
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ing. D. Jeltsema Prof.dr. R. Babuska 0/0/4/4
Modeling and Control
3 4 3 4 5 English Based on the analogies between the physical laws and energy flows of electrical and mechanical components, a systematic modelings approach is developed to describe the dynamic behavior of mechatronic systems. The resulting (non-linear) models are represented by differential equations or state-space descriptions. The dynamical behavior of the models is determined by the solutions of the differential equations. These solutions will be analyzed in the phase-space, and qualitative aspects, such as Lyapunov stability, will be studied. Special attention will be devoted to linearized models that describe the dynamic behavior in a small area of operation around an equilibrium point. Model based control design methods are developed for linear dynamical models. The design cycle starts with the specification of control objectives taking into account performance requirements and uncertainty of the linear model followed by the tuning of the classical PID controller based on the frequency-response method. The analysis and design methods will take place in the continuous-time and frequency domain. Attention will be devoted to the implementation of the continuous time controller using digital hardware. The design method will be applied to realistic case studies with the help of Matlab and Simulink simulation software. To enable the student to derive a mathematical model of physical electro-mechanical systems and to analyse the solution and stability of the derived differential equations. To enable the student to specify a control problem for linear system taking both time- and frequency design criteria in account and to derive a PID controller using loop shaping of the frequency response. Lectures Reader: Dynamische Regelsystemen D1, J.M.A. Scherpen and D. Jeltsema, TU Delft; Franklin, et. al, Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems Students are expected to have basic working knowledge of differential equations, complex variables, linear algebra and Laplace transform. Consult Appendices A-C of the above book, or other similar literature. Written exam. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Study Goals
Page 91 of 186
SC4190CH
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Ir. A.E.M. Huesman 0/0/4/4
Process Dynamics and Control
Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
3 4 None (Self Study) 3 4 4 5 English Introduction Overview of the process industry. Design versus operation. Batch and continuous operation. Objectives of process control. Dynamic modeling Motivation. General procedure. Conservation laws and constitutive equations. Degrees of freedom. Examples of lumped and distributed process systems. Identification. Analysis Linearization, non-linearity in process systems. State space format. Laplace transformation and analysis. The concept of transfer function and block diagram. Common transfer functions; 1st order, integrator, 2nd order etc. Model approximation (first/second order plus dead time). Frequency domain transformation and analysis. Interaction. Control Feedback and feedforward. Actuation and sensing; instrumentation. Control in the Laplace domain. Control in the frequency domain. PID control (choice and tuning). Direct synthesis and Internal Model Control (IMC). Extensions; ratio, feedforward, cascade, override etc. Dealing with interaction. Advanced topics Batch control (by sequential function charts). Plantwide control; some aspects. Optimization; role during operation. 1. Have a general understanding of process operation. 2. Be able to analyze process dynamics (model based). 3. Be able to design a control system for a unit operation. 4. Understand the control system of a complete plant. Lectures and Matlab instruction. Handouts and Matlab tutorial. Process Dynamics and Control, D.E. Seborg, T.F. Edgar and D.A. Mellichamp, 2nd edition, Wiley, 2004. 1 assignment and 2 written tests. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Books Assessment Department
Page 92 of 186
SC4210
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. E.G.M. Holweg Dr. M. Corno 0/0/4/0
Vehicle Mechatronics
Study Goals
3 3 Exam by appointment English In the modern cars, electronic components, hence mechatronic components and systems are more and more embedded in the vehicle, especially in the areas of entertainment, driving comfort, engine management and active safety. Currently about 30% of the cost of a car can be contributed to electronic components and it is expected that this trend will continue in the years to come, since the car manufacturers are further improving the functionality of these systems. The introduction of electronic stability programs (ESP) has greatly contributed to road safety and more cars will be equipped with ESP and more advanced ESP systems are being developed. Besides safety, electronics can also contribute to influencing the driving behaviour of the vehicle, creating an even stronger brand identity (e.g., safety, fun to drive, etc.). In order to accomplish this, new control architectures need to be developed such as Global Chassis Control. It may be clear that by introducing electronics in vehicles it is paramount to focus on the robustness and reliability of embedded mechatronic components and systems. The Vehicle Mechatronics course will focus on this trend with special attention to the integration of the electrical and mechanical domains (mechatronics) and the control aspects of the vehicle and its sub-systems. The following car systems will be reviewed; steering, braking, suspension, engine & powertrain and tires. Special focus will be given to sensors & sensor networks and actuators (e.g., drive-by-wire) within these respective systems. In the design of new vehicle control architectures such as global chassis control, a proper understanding of vehicle dynamics, robustness aspects such as fail safe and fault tolerant behaviour and the mathematical modelling and simulation (e.g., Matlab/Simulink) of the vehicle, its components and the controller shall be addressed. Automotive Sensors Steering Systems (Traditional Mechanical System, Assisted Steering Systems and Steer-by-wire) Braking Systems (Traditional hydraulic brakes, brake-by-wire, introduction to longitudinal braking dynamics and ABS systems) Suspension (Passive, Semi-Active and Active Systems, Design considerations and control logics) Electric and Hybrid Vehicles (actuation, energy storage systems, engine, powertrain and regenerative braking) Design of new vehicle control architectures such as global chassis control Robustness aspects (fail safe and fault tolerant behaviour) Mathematical modelling and simulation Lectures The exam consist of two written assignments and an oral discussion of the written assignments. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 93 of 186
WB1310
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. A.L. Schwab 0/0/0/4
Multibody Dynamics A
Study Goals
4 4 4 5 English wb1113wb, wb1216 Multibody Dynamics is about the analysis of the motion of complex mechanical systems as in a robot arm, a railway bogie or a gantry crane. In this course you will learn about the fundamentals of Multibody Dynamics: the description of the orientation of a rigid body in space, the Newton-Euler equations of motion for a 3D rigid body, how to add constraints to the equations of motion, and how to solve such a system of coupled equations. Next you will spend most of the time (80%) in doing the assignments with the ADAMS Software. The student is able to make a complex computer model of a realistic 3-D mechanical system in a standard software package for multibody system dynamics (currently MSC.ADAMS), to perform a dynamic analysis on the model, to draw some conclusions from this analysis, and to identify the limitations of the model. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.apply the Newton-Euler equations of motion to a single 3D rigid body 2.describe the orientation of a rigid body in 3-D space by means of Euler angles and derive expressions for the angular velocities in terms of the Euler angles and their time derivatives 3.construct a computer model of a complex mechanical system by selecting the appropriate number of rigid bodies, and number and type of constraints 4.make approximate dynamic calculations for a complex computer model in order to determine for instance the stiffness and the damping of individual components 5.make approximate dynamic calculations for a vehicle system model in order to verify for instance the eigenfrequencies and the equilibrium state in steady motion 6.explain the difference between the results from a dynamic analysis on the model and the behaviour of the real system, identify the limitations of the model 7.explain the finite accuracy of the results from a dynamic analysis due to the finite accuracy of the numerical integration together with the constraint violations Lectures (2 hours per week), computer assignment. The course and the course/lab work are fully computer-oriented. The Lab assignment consists of a number of practical problems that have to be worked out with the software package ADAMS. Your findings are to be put down in a Lab Report. Course material: Lecture Notes and M.Wisse, Introduction to ADAMS, Delft, 1999. References from literature: A.A.Shabana, ' Dynamics of multibody systems', Wiley, New York, 1998. E.J.Haug, ' Computer aided kinematics and dynamics of mechanical systems, Volume I: Basic methods', Allyn and Bacon, Boston, 1989. P.E.Nikravesh, ' Computer-aided analysis of mechanical systems', Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1988. M. Gradin, A. Cardano, ' Flexible multibody dynamics: A finite element approach', J. Wiley, Chichester, New York, 2001. Written exam + assignment report The written exam is of the open book type and has the form of a questionnaire about the findings as written down in your Lab Report. This report serves as reference material for your exam. At the end of the exam the questionnaire together with the Lab Report are to be handed over, The grading is on both items. Checkout the wb1310 home-page at http://tam.cornell.edu/~als93/ for up-to-date information. 25% 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Assessment Remarks
Percentage of Design Department
Page 94 of 186
WB1405A
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents 0/4/2/0
Stability of Thin-Walled Structures 1

Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen
3 4 3 Different, to be announced English AE4-534 Basic courses on mechanics and finite elements. Detailed description of topics: Functional description General buckling phenomena Initial post-buckling behaviour Linear and nonlinear pre-buckling solution Buckling of discrete systems Buckling of finite element models Geometrical stiffness Geometrically nonlinear finite element analysis Eigenvalue analysis Sensitivity analysis The course is designed to give the students a thorough foundation for solving the variety of structural stability problems they may encounter in practice. Students become acquainted with both analytical and numerical techniques. The course is intended to place stability problems in a broad context. Therefore nonlinear buckling, post-buckling and design sensitivity analysis are also included. Lectures (4 hours per week in period 2A, 2 hours per week in period 2B) ANSYS, MARC or NASTRAN finite element software Course material: Every student must prepare his own lecture notes. Some handouts will be provided. In addition, references to literature and textbooks will be given during the lectures. References from literature: Normal lectures will be provided. For further reading references to textbooks and literature will be given. Exercises will be distributed that lead to both analytical and numerical training. Several of these exercises require basic hands-on experience with finite element modeling. Take-home exercises + oral exam Assignments will be provided during the lectures. The answers must be handed in before the oral exam. The final grade is based on the quality and completeness of the answers on take-home excersises and the quality of an oral exam. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks
Department
Page 95 of 186
WB1406-07
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Parts D. de Klerk 0/0/2/2
Experimental Dynamics
Course Contents
3 4 3 none English The course consists of two parts: - part A Classes - part B Laboratory experiments (four in total) Part A: Theory - How does a modern measurement system work?? In specific how does it minimize desturbances and does it cope with filter effects? - Pitfalls in Frequency Analysis: Descrete algorithms, Leakage, Aliasing. Know it or you'll mess up your experements. - The power of Transfer and Frequency Response Functions (FRF); why are the so usefull? - Experimental Modal Analysis: Does and don't, pitfalls & challenges in practice. - Harmonic excitation (with frequency stepping), impulsive excitation, stochastic excitation. - Sensors, how do they work, what is important when using them. - Rotoranalysis, operational system analysis. - Latest advances in measurement technology. Moto: In theory, theory and practice are the same... In practice they are not. This course concentrates on pointing where those differences orignate from, valuable for any who'll perform measurements, needs to analyse measurements or who tries to match his / her simulation to the experiment. Part B: Experimental analysis The second part of the course involves working on assigments meant to illustrate concepts described in Part A and to deepen insight. Teams of three students each, carry out multiple experiments. Last year students got to simulate in Matlab a measurement system as a first assignment. Their final project involved analyzing measurement data measured by them selves on my car on the Rotterdamsestraatweg. Can it be more exciting? Yes, maybe you have always wanted to analyze a different product like a boat, train, motorbike, music instrument, etc. maybe we can come up with that exciting experiment in this year's course! In general the student is able to perform dynamic measurements, being aware of possible pitfalls. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1. describe the effects of Quantization, Leakage, Aliasing in measurements and measurement equipment. 2. explain the principle of extracting modal parameters (resonance frequency, spring constant, damping ratio) from system response both in the time domain and in the frequency domain 3. explain the principle of extracting modal parameters (modal frequencies, modal gains, modal damping ratios) from system response both in the time domain and in the frequency domain 4. discuss relative merits of different excitation techniques (shaker with frequency sweep, impact hammer, shaker with random excitation) 5. discuss the prinicples and the elative merits of different sensing techniques (strain gauge, seismic mass, piezo crystal, electromagnetic induction, laser vibrometer) 6. carry out dynamic experiments, analyze the data, and report and discuss his findings. Classes followed by laboratory projects. Matlab Word LaTeX PowerPoint Course material: - Part A: Course notes - Part B: Laboratory assignments manual References from literature: - see the reference list in the Course notes. Written report, and oral discussion of experiment activities and of report. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method Computer Use
Page 96 of 186
WB1408A
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents
Shell Structures - Introductory Course

Prof.dr.ir. L.J. Ernst Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/3/0/0 2 2 Exam by appointment English wb1408B wb1212, wb1213-03, wb1214, wb1311 Load bearing principles in shell structures Axi-symmetrical thin shells Membrane theory versus general theory Stress catogaries and life assessment, background of "design by analysis" in engineering codes Thermo-mechanical loading Axi-symmetric thick-walled shells Finite Element applications to local shell problems Mechanical design aspects of pressure vessels, flares, tube-plates, nozzles, flanges, etc. The student is able to understand and calculate the mechanical response on mechanical and thermal loading of thin shells of revolution such as generally used in the design of pressure vessels. In addition the student is able to design pressure vessels components such as nozzles, flares, pipe plates, flanges, etc. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.understand general load bearing principles in shell structures 2.describe the theory of linear axi-symmetric shells 3.identify the difference in load bearing behaviour according to membrane theory and general theory 4.understand the limits of applicability of thin shell theory 5.classify stresses in thin and thick shells according to stress categories and perform life time assessment 6.perform "design by analysis" of thin and thick pressure vessel parts in accordance with engineering codes and standards 7.perform finite element stress analysis to shells and components and to perform the reliability evaluation Lectures (4 hours per week), computer exercise ANSYS-exercise Course material: Lecture notes available via Blackboard References from literature: S. Timoshenko, "Theory of Plates and Shells", MacGraw-Hill S. Schwaigerer, "Festigkeitsberechnung im Dampfkessel, Behalter-und Rohrleitungsbau", Spriger-Verlag Timoshenko and Goodier, Theory of Elasticity V.V. Novozhilov, "Thin Shell Theory", Noordhof R.J. Roark, W.C. Young, "Formulas for stress and strain", McGraw-Hill ASME-code, NB3000 and A8000 Oral exam This course will be discontinued by september 2011 Oral exam after approval of exercises 50% Yes, Designing for reliability of pressure vessels and components 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Assessment Special Information Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 97 of 186
WB1408B
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Study Goals Prof.dr.ir. L.J. Ernst Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/0/6/0
Shell Structures - Advanced Course
3 3 Exam by appointment English wb1408A Tensorial description of geometry of surfaces, general nonlinear thin shell theory, simplified shell theories. The student is able to understand the general non-linear theory of thin shells. The student is also able to understand the applicability (and limits) of simplified shell theories. The student has a good understanding of general load bearing behaviour of thin shells of arbitrary shapes. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.understand the general non-linear theory of thin shells and its limitations 2.work with the tensorial description of geometry of surfaces, the general nonlinear thin shell theory and simplified shell theories 3.familiarize himself with the backgrounds of the extended field of "Plates and Shells" in order to have good entrance to the vast literature on the subject Lectures (4 / 2 hours per week) Course material: Lecture notes. References from literature: Y. Basar, W.B. Kratzig, Mechanik der Fluchentragwerke, ISBN 3-528-08685-8. W.T. Koiter, A consistent first approximation in the general theory of thin elastic shells, Proc.I.U.T.A.M.Symp.on the theory of thin elastic shells (Delft, August 1959), North Holland Publishing Company, Amsterdam (1960). W.T. Koiter, A systematic simplification of the equations in the linear theory of thin shells, Kon.Ned.Academie der Wetenschappen, Proceedings, Series B, 64, No.5, 1961. W.T. Koiter, On the non-linear theory of thin elastic shells, Sept 25, 1965. Oral exam + assignments This course will be discontinued by september 2011 Examination by appointment. 30% Not applicable 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Assessment Special Information Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content Department
WB1409
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen Ir. J.J.L. Neve Dr.ir. M. Langelaar 2/2/0/0
Theory of Elasticity
1 2 1 Different, to be announced English wb1405a COURSE IS NO LONGER PRESENTED AND IS REPLACED BY THE NEW COURSE WB1451-05 .. On appointment: Lectures (2 hours per week), 2 other hours per week. Exercises + oral exam More information on http://www-tm.wbmt.tudelft.nl/~onck/wb1409.htm 50% The theory of elasticity is the foundation for the analysis of stresses and the flexibility in the design of structures and components. This holds for the initial design stages, where "rough" estimates are made based on simple models (beams, etc.), as well as for the final, detailed designs where advanced numerical tools are used. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals Education Method Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content
Department
Page 98 of 186
WB1412
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Parts
Linear & Non-lineair Vibrations in Mechanical Systems

Dr.ir. P.T.L.M. van Woerkom Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/0/2/2 3 4 3 4 none English wb1216, wi2051wb, wi3097wb The course consists of two parts: - presentation of a number of topics selected from the Course Contents (see below), by the lecturer; - investigation of a specific topic, by the participant. The topic for the assignment will be selected in consultation between participant and lecturer. The participant will carry out an exploratory study and document his findings in the form of a written progress report and a written final report. Alternatively, the participant can elect to solve a number of standard exercises assigned by the lecturer. - Introduction: review of linear vibration theory, sources of excitation, nonlinear vibrations in mechanical systems.
Course Contents
- Occurrence and types of mechanical vibrations: forced vibrations, self-excited vibrations, stick-slip vibrations, limit cycles, jump resonance, transient response due to impulse excitation, effect of impact, effect of vibrations on humans (hearing, comfort), machine vibrations, machine-tool chatter, vibration of structures due to fluid-structure interaction, intended vibrations in microelectro-mechanical systems (MEMS), dynamics of buckling. - Analysis of linear and nonlinear vibrations in discrete systems: phase plane analysis, stability of equilibrium, stability of motion, stability criteria (Routh-Hurwitz, Sylvester, Lyapunov, Mathieu), Duffing's method, method of averaging (KrylovBogoliubov, Van der Pol), Poincare perturbation method, Poincare-Lindstedt perturbation method, two-time-variable perturbation method, bifurcations. - Suppression of vibrations: vibration isolation, passive and active vibration damping. - Introduction of nonlinear vibrations in continuum systems: nonlinear vibration of a string and of a (possibly buckled)beam. The student is able to model mathematically the dynamics of vibrating mechanical systems (i.e., set up the equations of motion) and to analyse and interpret the dynamic response, also in the presence of mechanical system nonlinearities and of parametric excitation. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.demonstrate understanding of the essentials of linear vibration theory, for single degree-of-freedom (dof) systems and for multi dof systems 2.model and analyse four classes of response suppression techniques applicable to multi dof linear systems, namely passive isolation, passive damping, active isolation, active damping 3.identify physical sources of nonlinear dynamic behaviour of multi dof and of continuum systems, occurring in a wide field of engineering endeavour 4.analyse system stability under small perturbations (linearisation; Routh-Hurwitz, Sylvester, first method of Lyapunov) and under large perturbations (global stability, using second method of Lyapunov) 5.describe global nonlinear dynamic behaviour single dof systems, using the phase plane 6.analyse weakly nonlinear dynamic behaviour (perturbed motion) of single and multi dof systems using general perturbation theory (Poincar expansion, Krylov-Bogoliubov method, averaging methods, two-variable method), to justify equivalent linearization, and to apply these techniques in the analysis of the dynamics of various physical systems 7.analyse periodic behaviour of single dof nonlinear systems (Lindstedt method, Duffing method, averaging methods) and to analyse stability of periodic behaviour (Floquet analysis, Mathieu analysis) 8.discuss physical sources of parametric excitation in linear systems, to analyse resulting periodic motion including presence of viscous damping (generalised Mathieu equation) 9.model and analyse the dynamics of nonlinear vibrations in distributed systems - specifically sound propagation, string vibration, and dynamic buckling of beams Some items may be given more attention than others, depending on the interests of the participants. Lectures, presentation & investigation Matlab, if desired as part of take-home assignment. Course material: Course notes, on Blackboard (in preparation). References from literature: - Dimarogonas, A. Vibration for Engineers. Second edition. Prentice-Hall, 1996. - Harris, C.M. and Piersol, A.G. Harris's Shock and Vibration Handbook. Fifth edition. McGraw-Hill, 2002. - Inman, D.J. Engineering Vibration. Prentice-Hall, 1996. See especially chapter 10 on nonlinear vibrations (only in this first edition!) - Jordan, D.W. and Smith, P. Nonlinear Ordinary Differential Equations - an Introduction to Dynamical Systems. Third edition. Oxford University Press, 1999. - Kelly, S.G. Fundamentals of Mechanical Vibrations. Second edition. McGraw-Hill International Editions, 2000. - Rao, S.S. Mechanical Vibrations, SI edition. Pearson / Prentice-Hall, 2005. - Thomson, J.J. Vibrations and Stability - Order and Chaos. McGraw-Hill, London, 1997. Written report The assessment (grading) will be based on the quality of the investigation as documented in the report. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Page 99 of 186
WB1413-04
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. A.L. Schwab Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/0/2/2
Multibody Dynamics B
3 4 3 none Different, to be announced English wb1113wb, wb1216 In this course we will cover a systematic approach to the generation and solution of equations of motion for mechanical systems consisting of multiple interconnected rigid bodies, the so-called Multibody Systems. This course differs from 'Advanced Dynamics', which mostly covers theoretical results about classes of idealized systems (e.g. Hamiltonian systems), in that the goal here is to find the motions of relatively realistic models of systems (including, for example, motors, dissipation and contact constraints). Topics covered are: -Newton-Euler equations of motion for a simple planar system, free body diagrams, constraint equations and constraint forces, uniqueness of the solution. -Systematic approach for a system of interconnected rigid bodies, virtual power method and Lagrangian multipliers. -transformation of the equations of motion in terms of generalized independent coordinates, and lagrange equations. -Non-holonomic constraints as in rolling without slipping, degrees of freedom and kinematic coordinates. -Unilateral constraints as in contact problems. -Numerical integration of the equations of motion, stability and accuracy of the applied methods. -Numerical integration of a coupled differential and algebraic system of equations (DAE's), Baumgarte stabilisation, projection method and independent coordinates. -Newton-Euler equations of motion for a rigid three-dimensional body, the need to describe orientation in space, Euler angles, Cardan angles, Euler parameters and Quaternions. -Equations of motion for flexible multibody systems, introduction to Finite Element Method approach, Linearised equations of motion. Upon request and if time and ability of the instructor allows, related topics are open for discussion. The student is able to find the motions of linked rigid body systems in two and three dimensions including systems with various kinematic constraints, like there are: sliding, hinges and rolling, and closed kinematic chains. More specifically, the student must able to: 1.derive the Newton-Euler equations of motion for a simple planar system, draw free body diagrams, set-up constraint equations and introduce constraint forces, and demonstrate the uniqueness of the solution 2.derive the equations of motion for a system of interconnected rigid bodies by means of a systematic approach: virtual power method and Lagrangian multipliers 3.transform the equations of motion in terms of generalized independent coordinates, and derive and apply the Lagrange equations of motion 4.apply the techniques from above to systems having non-holonomic constraints as in rolling without slipping, degrees of freedom and kinematic coordinates 5.apply the techniques from above to systems having unilateral constraints as in contact problems 6.perform various numerical integration schemes on the equations of motion, and predict the stability and accuracy of the applied methods 7.perform numerical integration on a coupled system of differential and algebraic equations (DAE's), apply Baumgarte stabilization, the coordinate projection method and transformation to independent coordinates 8.derive the Newton-Euler equations of motion for a general rigid three-dimensional body system connected by constraints, identify the need to describe orientation in space describe the orientation in 3-D space of a rigid body by means of: Euler angles, Cardan angles, Euler parameters and Quaternions, derive the angular velocity and accelerations in terms of these parameters and their time derivatives, and their inverse 9.derive the equations of motion for flexible multibody systems by means of a Finite Element Method approach, and extend this to linearised equations of motion Lectures (2 hours per week) The course is computer-oriented. In doing the assignments you will be using Matlab, Maple or related computer software. Course material: Arend L. Schwab, `Applied Multibody Dynamics', Delft, 2003 References from literature: A.A.Shabana, ' Dynamics of multibody systems', Wiley, New York, 1998. E.J.Haug, ' Computer aided kinematics and dynamics of mechanical systems, Volume I: Basic methods', Allyn and Bacon, Boston, 1989. P.E.Nikravesh, ' Computer-aided analysis of mechanical systems', Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, 1988. M. Gradin, A. Cardano, ' Flexible multibody dynamics: A finite element approach', J. Wiley, Chichester, New York, 2001. Final Project There will be weekly assignments and a final project. You have to make a report on the final project. In doing the assignments I strongly encourage you to work together. The final project is individual. Check out the up-to-date web page at http://tam.cornell.edu/~als93/ 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks
Department
Page 100 of 186
WB1416
Numerical Methods for Dynamics

Prof. D.J. Rixen Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen 0/0/2/2 3 4 3 Exam by appointment English Statics and Strength of materials, Dynamics (e.g. wb1418, wb1419), Linear Algebra, Numerical Analysis (e.g. wi3097wb), Finite Elements (e.g. wb1212-1214) Using engineering tools as black boxes can be dangerous and inefficient. This is especially true when performing dynamic analysis of structures in a finite element package. Choosing the right finite element types and the suitable solution procedure is critical to get accurate results and to compute solutions efficiently. In order to discuss basic principles of numerical methods for dynamics and to explain fundamental concepts related to dynamic analysis, the course will cover the following topics: - Elastodynamic equations for a continuous media (short recap) - Discretization techniques: Rayleigh-Ritz and Finite elements (bar, beam) - Linear solvers, storage techniques and singular systems - Free vibration modes, mode superposition techniques and eigensolvers for large systems - Accuracy of modal superposition, modal acceleration, system excited through support - model reduction, including dynamic substructuring - time-integration of linear and non-linear systems - computing senstitivity of modes and eigenfrequency to design parameters, model updating - Parallel computing techniques for fast solvers Some topics might be dropped depending on students background. Specific topics might also be discussed if time permits. In this courses emphasis will be put on understanding fundamental concepts of numerical methods and how they relate to the mechanics of structures. Therefore, the oral (open book) exam will concentrate on the mastering of concepts rather than on formulation details. A computational project will be included (using Matlab pre-cooked routines and/or Ansys-Nastran). The student is able to grasp the basic numerical concepts underlying the methods used to perform the analysis of models in engineering statics and dynamics. He can choose the appropriate methods in specific applications and analyse the reasons why methods can result in erroneous solutions. He is aware of computational and programming issues relative to specific numerical techniques and implementations.
Study Goals
More specifically, the student must be able to: 1. understand the assumption underlying the discretization process and the associated limitations in terms of spatial and frequential accuracy 2.describe the solutions steps needed to solve linear systems and choose the proper algorithm according to the problem (LU, Cholesky, LDLT) including storage techniques 3.identify singular matrices arising from mechanical systems and compute a generalized inverse of a singular matrix and its nullspace 4.use the concept of eigenmodes to write the dynamic solution as a modal superposition and the system matrices in the form of spectral expansions 5.choose the proper eigensolvers and implement standard techniques from the family of the power iteration including shifting 6.evaluate the approximations inherent to modal truncation in the mode displacement method and apply the mode acceleration method to correct for the static truncated part 7.solve by mode superposition the dynamics of systems excited by their support and apply the technique of additional mass to replace imposed displacements 8.describe the concept of effective modal mass and explain how it can be used to evaluate the contribution of modes to the approximation by modal series of the response of systems excited by the support 9.describe the concept of model reduction and write the reduced equations and write the reduced dynamic equations according to the static Guyan-Iron reduction 10.outline the idea of substructuring and derive the substructure approximation in the Craig-Bampton method, derive the associated reduced matrices and describe how accurate the Craig-Bampton approximation is in practice 11.solve the normal equations using Laplace transforms and put the solution procedure of the normal equations in a recursive matrix 12.discuss the concepts of consistency, stability and accuracy for simple implicit and explicit direct time-integration schemes 13.derive the time-integration formulas belonging to the Newmark family and discuss the stability limits and the accuracy of the Newmark schemes 14.write the explicit and implicit time-integration algorithms for non-linear systems 15.write the sensitivity of eigenmodes and eigenfrequencies of dynamic systems 16.describe the basic principles of parallel computing and explain the concept of domain decomposition and write the decomposed problem in a dual and primal interface problem suitable for parallel computing 17.write a small program (in Matlab for instance) to perform a dynamic analysis according to the Finite Element method, and implement the proper numerical techniques Lectures, computer use (16 hours) Use of ANSYS and/or Matlab for assignment and illustration. Course material: Lecture notes (available through blackboard) References from literature: Mechanical Vibrations, Theory and Application to Structural Dynamics, M. Gradin and D. Rixen, Wiley, 1997. The Finite Element Method: Linear Static and Dynamic Finite Element Analysis, T.J.R. Hughes Prentice-Hall, 1987. Finite Element Procedures, K.J. Bathe, Prentice-Hall, 1996 Structural Dynamics: an introduction to computer methods, R.R. Craig, Wiley, 1981, ISBN 0-471-04499-7 Matrix Computation, G.H. Golub and C.F. Van Loan, Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996. Oral exam 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 101 of 186
WB1417-05
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Prof. D.J. Rixen Ir. J.J.L. Neve Prof.dr.ir. H. Bijl 0/0/0/2
Fluid-Structures Interaction
4 4 4 English dynamics (e.g. wb1311, wb1418), fluid dynamics (e.g. wb1321) Fluid-Structure interaction is a topic that covers many important and complex problems in engineering where the interaction between the mechanical behaviour of a solid structure is significantly influenced by surrounding fluids (water, air, etc ) and where, in turn, the aero/hydro-dynamic forces are modified by the deformation of the structure. Although it was pioneered by aeronautics engineers to study the static and dynamic deformation of wings under aerodynamic forces (aeroelasticity), fluidstructure interaction analysis involves also the description of interaction phenomenon in constructions (e.g. wind induced vibrations), vibro-acoutics, blood flow in elastic arteries or ink flow in an actuated printer head. In the past, many semi-analytical approaches were developed to describe fluid-structure interaction. Today, complex problems interaction problems are investigated using engineering codes that couple structural models to fluid models. In this course, we will recall the basics of fluid and solid mechanics and discuss some important numerical issues appearing when coupling fluid-structure models. In particular we will shortly introduce the Finite Volume Discretization of the fluid, discuss the expression of the fluid equation on moving meshes (Arbitrary Eulerian Lagragian formulation) and discuss time integration issues of the coupled problem. Vibro-acoustics will also be introduced as a special linearized case of fluid-structure interaction. We will go in more details in discussion the issues of time-integration of the coupled problem. Also the issue on sharing forces/displacements across the interface between the fluid and the structural mesh will be handled in more details. This course is developed in collaboration with the Aerodynamic Research Group from the Faculty of Aerospace. The student is able to build a proper model of a problem exhibiting coupling between fluid and solid mechanics. Using standard numerical techniques from fluid and solid dynamics he/she can set up a discretized problem and write the coupling conditions between the fields. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.derive the different forms of the Navier-Stokes and Euler equations (integral, local, conservative and non-conservative forms) 2.write the coupling conditions between fluid and structure domains (compatibility/equilibrium) 3.linearize the fluid equations to obtain the acoustic equations and write the vibro-acoustic coupling conditions and apply the Finite Element method to vibro-acoustic problems 4.understand the issues of time integration accuracy and stability of the coupled problem 5.write the Arbitrary Lagrangian Eulerian Formulation of the Fluid Dynamics 6.write the coupling conditions in time between a finite volume model of a fluid domain and a finite element model of a structure 7.outline and apply techniques such as virtual mesh, mesh matching and staggered time integration needed to solve numerical models in fluid-structure interaction Lectures (2 hours per week), seminars Use of ANSYS and/or Matlab for assignment and illustration. Course material: Lecture notes (available through blackboard) References from literature: Structural acoustics and vibration; mechanical models, variational formulations and discretization, R. Ohayon, C. Soize, Academic Press, 1998, ISBN 0-12-524945-4 A modern course in aeroelasticity, Earl H. Dowell, Kluwer Academic Pub.,1995, isbn 0-7923-2788-8 Fluid-Structure interaction: applied numerical methods, H. Morand. R. Ohayon, Wiley ed., 1995, isbn0-471-94459-9 Written report The lecture are partly organized as seminars prepared by the students. The evaluation will be based on the seminar and on a computer project 0% 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Department
Page 102 of 186
WB1418-07
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Prof. D.J. Rixen 4/0/0/0
Engineering Dynamics
1 1 Exam by appointment English Engineering Dynamics and Mechanicsms (wb1419, extension of wb1418), Multibody Dynamics A (wb1310), Multibody Dynamics B (wb1413), Numerical Methods in Dynamics (wb1416), Non-Linear Vibrations (wb1412). Statics and Strength of materials (e.g. wb1214), Dynamics (e.g. wb1311), Linear Algebra The dynamic behavior of structures (and systems in general) plays an essential role in engineering mechanics and in particular in the design of controllers. In this master course, we will discuss how the equations describing the dynamical behavior of a structure and of a mechatronical system can be set up. Fundamental concepts in dynamics such as equilibrium, stability, linearization and vibration modes are discussed. If time permits, also an introduction to discretization techniques to approximate continuous systems is proposed. The course will discuss the following topics: - Review of the virtual work principle and Lagrange equations - linearization around an equilibrium position: vibrations - Free vibration modes and modal superposition - Forced harmonic response of non-damped and damped structures
Study Goals
The student is able to select different ways of setting up the dynamic equations of mechanical systems, to perform an analysis of the system in terms of linear stability and vibration modes and to properly use mode superposition techniques for computing transient and harmonic responses. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1. explain the relations between the principle of virtual work and the Lagrange equations for dynamics to the basic Newton laws 2. describe the concept of kinematic constraints (holonomic/non-holonomic, scleronomic/rheonomic) and choose a proper set of degrees of freedom to describe a dynamic system 3. write the Lagrange equations for a minimum set of degrees of freedom and extend it to systems with additional constraints (Lagrange multiplier method) 4. linearize the dynamic equations by considering the different contributions of the kinetic and potential energies (both for system with and without overall motion imposed by scleronomic constraints) 5. analyze the linear stability of dynamic systems (damped and undamped) according to their state space formulation if necessary 6. explain and use the concept of free vibration modes and frequencies 7. interpret and apply the orthogonality properties of modes to describe the transient and harmonic dynamic response of damped and undamped systems 8. evaluate the approximations introduced when using truncated modal series (spatial and spectral) 9. explain how mode superposition can be used to identify the eigenparamters of linear dynamic systems Lecture The assignement will require using Matlab-like software. Course material: Lecture notes (available through blackboard) References from literature: Mechanical Vibrations, Theory and Application to Structural Dynamics, M. Gradin and D. Rixen, Wiley, 1997. Applied Dynamics, with application to multibody and mechatronic systems, F.C. Moon, Wiley, 1998, isbn 0-471-13828-2. Engineering vibration, D.J. Inman, Prentice Hall, 2001, isbn 0-13-726142-X The Finite Element Method: Linear Static and Dynamic Finite Element Analysis, T.J.R. Hughes Prentice-Hall, 1987. Structural Dynamics in Aeronautical Engineering, M.N. Bismark-Nasr, AIAA education series, 1999, isbn 1-56347-323-2 Oral exam + assignment An assignment will be given which will make up part of the final mark. SInce the enphasis of the lectures will be on understanding concepts in dynamics more than memorizing formulas, the oral exam will be open book to evaluate your understanding of the concepts. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Assessment Remarks
Department
Page 103 of 186
WB1422ATU
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. J. Westerweel Dr.ir. C. Poelma 2/2/0/0
Advanced Fluid Dynamics A
1 2 1 2 3 English wb1424ATU, 1424BTU In this course the fundamental and mathematical principles of fluid mechanics are treated. Point of departure is the conservation equations for mass and momentum. Based on these equations the equations of motion for a incompressible flow are derived. In order to close the equation of conservation of momentum a relationship must be prescribed between the stress tensor and the deformation-rate tensor leading to the constitutive equation for a Newtonian fluid. The result is known as the Navier-Stokes equations. First these equations are simplified for the case of an inviscid fluid which are known as the Euler equations. The solution of these equations for the case of a irrotational flow leads to a treatment of potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli. This theory and law are applied to the flow around a sphere and around a cylinder. The flow around a cylinder is two dimensional and it is shown that in this case potential flow theory can be described in terms of complex function theory. This theory is applied to the flow around a cylinder in combination with a line vortex and by means of conformal transformations a relationship is derived with the lift force on a airfoil. In the remaining of the course the full Navier-Stokes equations, i.e. including the viscosity terms, are considered and the Reynolds number is defined. The effect of viscosity is coupled to dissipation of energy and diffusion of vorticity. As example of a very viscous flow, we discuss the Stokes flow in particular the flow around a sphere. For large Reynolds numbers the boundary-layer theory is derived and the Blasius solution for the boundary layer over a flat plate is discussed. NOTE: Knowledge of vector analysis is essential for this course. Students not familiar with vector analysis should follow wi3105me in the first quarter. The student is able to describe the basic fundamentals of classical, incompressible fluid mechanics and to apply the fundamental and mathematical principles of fluid mechanics. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1. formulate the conservation equations for mass and momentum 2. derive the equations of motion for an incompressible flow, based on the conservation equations for mass and momentum 3. derive the constitutive equation for a Newtonian fluid (the Navier-Stokes equations) 4. simplify the Navier-Stokes equations for the case of an in viscid fluid (the Euler equations) 5. solve the Euler equations for the case of an irrotational flow, leading to a treatment of potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli 6. apply the potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli to the flow around a sphere and around a cylinder 7. derive that in the case of a flow around a cylinder, the flow is two dimensional, and the potential flow theory can be described in terms of complex function theory 8. derive a relation with the lift force on a airfoil by applying the complex function theory to the flow around a cylinder in combination with a line vortex and by means of conformal transformations 9. consider the full Navier-Stokes equations, i.e. including the viscosity terms, and to define the Reynolds number 10. couple the effect of viscosity to dissipation of energy and diffusion of vorticity 11. discuss the Stokes flow, in particular the flow around a sphere, as example of a very viscous flow 12. drive the boundary-layer theory for large Reynolds numbers and discuss the Blasius solution for the boundary layer over a flat plate Lectures (2 hours per week), computer demonstration Computers are used for demonstrations of the lecture material during the course on the basis of home-made software and on the basis of the symbolic manipulation program Maple. Course material: Lecture Notes "Advanced Fluid Mechanics A" in downloadable PDF-format. Book: Fluid Mechanics by Cohen & Kundu, Elsevier Academic Press Written exam This is a fundamental subject which has only indirect relationship with design. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Study Goals
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Design Content Department
Page 104 of 186
WB1424BTU
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. G.E. Elsinga 0/0/4/0
Race Car Aerodynamics
Study Goals
3 3 Exam by appointment English Aerodynamics of Racecars. Focus will be on the aerodynamic design of racecars. The lectures will discuss how to minimize drag and to optimize downforce. It is expected that students design an aerodynamic shape for the whole car or a part of it. The model will be build and experiments will be performed on the models in one of the two wind tunnel of the laboratory for aero and hydrodynamics. The student is able to analyze the flow around a racecar in detail. In this context the connection between flow and car performance is studied. More generally, the student must be able to: 1. Derive a model to assess the performance of a racecar 2. Use such a model to identify the critical factors determining the overall performance 3. Describe methods to enhance downforce and reduce drag on a car 4. Describe the aerodynamic interaction/ interference between different car components 5. Design an aerodynamic experiment 6. Measure the performance characteristics (downforce, drag ...) of an aerodynamic car shape in a wind tunnel experiment and assess the results Lectures, assignments and a final wind tunnel experiment As reference material we will use the article written by Joseph Katz in the Annual Review of Fluid Mechanics 2006, 27-63 Assignments and written report 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 105 of 186
WB1427-03
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. C. Poelma 2/2/0/0
Advanced Fluid Dynamics A
1 2 1 2 3 English wb1424ATU, 1424BTU wb1123 , wb1220 , wb1321, wi3105mw In this course the fundamental and mathematical principles of fluid mechanics are treated. Point of departure is the conservation equations for mass and momentum. Based on these equations the equations of motion for a incompressible flow are derived. In order to close the equation of conservation of momentum a relationship must be prescribed between the stress tensor and the deformation-rate tensor leading to the constitutive equation for a Newtonian fluid. The result is known as the Navier-Stokes equations. First these equations are simplified for the case of an inviscid fluid which are known as the Euler equations. The solution of these equations for the case of a irrotational flow leads to a treatment of potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli. This theory and law are applied to the flow around a sphere and around a cylinder. The flow around a cylinder is two dimensional and it is shown that in this case potential flow theory can be described in terms of complex function theory. This theory is applied to the flow around a cylinder in combination with a line vortex and by means of conformal transformations a relationship is derived with the lift force on a airfoil. In the remaining of the course the full Navier-Stokes equations, i.e. including the viscosity terms, are considered and the Reynolds number is defined. The effect of viscosity is coupled to dissipation of energy and diffusion of vorticity. As example of a very viscous flow, we discuss the Stokes flow in particular the flow around a sphere. For large Reynolds numbers the boundary-layer theory is derived and the Blasius solution for the boundary layer over a flat plate is discussed. NOTE: Knowledge of vector analysis is essential for this course. Students not familiar with vector analysis should follow wi3105me in the first quarter. The student is able to describe the basic fundamentals of classical, incompressible fluid mechanics and to apply the fundamental and mathematical principles of fluid mechanics. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.formulate the conservation equations for mass and momentum 2.derive the equations of motion for an incompressible flow, based on the conservation equations for mass and momentum 3.derive the constitutive equation for a Newtonian fluid (the Navier-Stokes equations) 4.simplify the Navier-Stokes equations for the case of an in viscid fluid (the Euler equations) 5.solve the Euler equations for the case of an irrotational flow, leading to a treatment of potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli 6.apply the potential flow theory and the law of Bernoulli to the flow around a sphere and around a cylinder 7.derive that in the case of a flow around a cylinder, the flow is two dimensional, and the potential flow theory can be described in terms of complex function theory 8.derive a relation with the lift force on a airfoil by applying the complex function theory to the flow around a cylinder in combination with a line vortex and by means of conformal transformations 9.consider the full Navier-Stokes equations, i.e. including the viscosity terms, and to define the Reynolds number 10.couple the effect of viscosity to dissipation of energy and diffusion of vorticity 11.discuss the Stokes flow, in particular the flow around a sphere, as example of a very viscous flow 12.drive the boundary-layer theory for large Reynolds numbers and discuss the Blasius solution for the boundary layer over a flat plate Lectures (2 hours per week), computer demonstration Computers are used for demonstrations of the lecture material during the course on the basis of home-made software and on the basis of the symbolic manipulation program Maple. Course material: Lecture Notes "Advanced Fluid Mechanics A" in downloadable PDF-format. Book: Fluid Mechanics by Cohen & Kundu, Elsevier Academic Press (3rd dition). Written exam 0% This is a fundamental subject which has only indirect relationship with design. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Study Goals
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 106 of 186
WB1428-3
Computational Fluid Dynamics

Dr.ir. M.J.B.M. Pourquie
Study Goals
2 3 2 Different, to be announced English wb1321/wb3550, wb1422atu, wi3097tu, some elementary programming skill (matlab or any other) Introduction, the finite difference method and the finite volume method for diffusion problems. The finite difference method and the finite volume method for convection-diffusion problems Stability of discretization schemes for the convection-diffusion equation. Conservation laws for flowing media and boundary conditions. Simulation of steady flows. Methods for the solution of discretized equations. Simulation of time-dependent flows. The pressure correction method for mass conservation. Turbulence and turbulence models. Implementation of boundary conditions. Grid generation. Several lecture hours are used for practical exercises with matlab and Fluent. The student is able to use commercial computational fluid dynamics (CFD) packages properly. The basis is the commercial CFD package Fluent, which is widely used at the TU-Delft. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.describe the two most popular methods in commercial CFD, finite differences and finite volumes 2.solve simple demonstrative problems in fluid flow and heat transfer by programming them in Matlab, using finite differences and finite volumes 3.recognize the effects of numerical methods on the solution, such as numerical diffusion and numerical dispersion and to explain how to make these effects smaller 4.recognize numerical instability, to list several ways to avoid it and to analyze stability of simple methods analytically 5.solve fluid flow and heat transfer problems with the commercial CFD package Fluent, which includes the following: make the geometry in the preprocessor choose appropriate boundary conditions correctly apply wall boundaries, inflow boundaries, outflow boundaries, far field boundaries adapt the geometry to properly include boundary conditions make an appropriate grid, taking into account grid cell quality and grid point density run the solver for the problem choose appropriate flow related quantities to monitor convergence of the solver visualize the results, obtain relevant quantities such as forces on objects and heat flux through surfaces interpret the results and recognize where the geometry and the grid have to be improved find out or argue whether grid-refinement is necessary
Lectures (2 hours per week), practical exercises Practical exercises with simple matlab examples demonstrating methods used in a CFD program, practical exercises with the CFD package Fluent. Course material: J.H. Ferziger and M. Peric, Computational methods for Fluid Dynamics, Springer Verlag. References from literature: C. Hirsch, Numerical computation of internal and external flows, Volume I Fundamentals of numerical discretization, Volume II Computational methods for inviscid and viscous flows, Chicester, Wiley & Sons, 1988, 1990 C.A.J. Fletcher, Computational techniques for Fluid Dynamics, Volume I Fundamental and general techniques, Volume II Specific techniques for different flow categories, Berlin, Springer, 2-nd ed. 1991. To be announced Laboratory project(s): Practical exercises with a commercial code (FLUENT). 25% The design of a correct discretization/set-up of a model geometry for a flow calculation is part of the practical work. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 107 of 186
WB1429-03
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. J. Westerweel 2/2/0/0
Microfluidics
Study Goals
1 2 1 2 3 English wb1427-03, wb1428 WB1125, TN1731 or equivalent This course is an introduction to fluid mechanics at small scales. The subjects treated are: Scaling laws, Navier-Stokes equations for micro-scale gas and liquid flows, for electroosmotic flow, electrophoresis, dielectrophoresis, dispersion and diffusion, capillary effects, experimental techniques, applications in flow control, flow sensors, valves, pumps, mixers, filters, separators, heaters and life science applications. Different mehtods for experimental flow characterization are discussed, i.e. microPIV (microscale Particle Image Velocimetry). Main learning goals of this course: Introduction in fluid mechanics at small scales so that the student is capable to understand scientific literature on this topic and to conduct research on this topic. The student learns about the differences of the treatment of the Navier-Stokes-Equations, when surface forces become dominant over volume forces. Specific learning objectives: 1)Introduce the student to a novel field of fluid mechanics. The student gets an overview over fundamentals and applications of microfluidics. 2)The student understands the term continuum and is able to define the limits of the continuum at small scales. 3)The student is able to simplify the Navier-Stokes equations for low Reynolds number flow. 4)The student is able to derive the electrokinetic term in the Navier-Stokes equations. 5)The student knows the molecular description of the states of matter. 6)The student gets an overview of various designs of microfluidic devices such as pumps, mixers, valves and separators. 7)The student is able to analyse the fluidmechanic efficiency of a microfluidic device 8)The student is able to analyse a scientific publication on a microfluidics topic. 9)The student has the fundamental microfluidics knowledge for a respective master thesis or a PhD program. Lectures (2 hours per week) Henrik Bruus, Theoretical Microfluidics, Oxford University Press, 2007 Written exam Laboratory project(s): hands-on laboratory demonstration of microfluidic diagnostics and measurement techniques during the course models will be described that can be used to design simple microfluidic devices. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks
Page 108 of 186
WB1433-04
Thermomechanical Modelling & Charact.of Polymers

Dr.ir. K.M.B. Jansen Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/0/3/0 3 3 Different, to be announced English Linear viscoelasticity, creep, stress relaxation and dynamic behaviour, glass transition. Boltzman superposition principle. Timetemperature superposition. Free-volume interpretation. Crosslinking effects. Deformation modes, shear, tensile and bulk compression. Interconversion relations, Kramers-Kronig relations. Laplace transformation. Non-linear viscoelastic models. Experimental methods: shear rheometers, dynamic mechanical devices, resonance devices, bulk modulus measurements. The student is able to understand and calculate the mechanical response of time dependent materials at different loading conditions.
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Department
More specifically, the student must be able to 1.understand the derivation of the basic linear viscoelastic constitutive equations 2.describe the differences between relaxation, creep, creep-recovery, constant strain rate and dynamic tests 3.identify the glassy and rubbery parts in a viscoelastic function 4.describe the basic shape of the creep, relaxation and dynamic viscoelastic functions as a function of either time or frequency 5.select the appropriate equations for transforming data from creep tests to that of relaxation and dynamic experiments (and vice versa) 6.use the elastic-viscoelastic correspondence principle to solve simple viscoelastic problems 7.explain the basics of the Time-Temperature Superposition principle 8.use the Time-Temperature Superposition principle to construct mastercurves of experimental data 9.understand the basics of the rubber elasticity and free volume theories Lectures (3 hours per week), practical assignment Hand-outs and sections from various books Oral exam The course includes practical work on a Dynamic Mechanical Analyser 0% 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 109 of 186
WB1440
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents
Eng. Optimization: Concept & Applications

Dr.ir. M. Langelaar Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen 0/0/4/0 3 3 Different, to be announced English wb1441 Basic knowledge of mechanical engineering and mathematics Formulation of optimization problems Typical characteristics of optimization problems Minimization without constraints Constrained minimization Simple optimization algorithms Discrete design variables Approximation concepts Sensitivity analysis The student is able to formulate a proper optimization problem in order to solve a given design problem, and is able to select a suitable approach for solving this problem numerically. Furthermore, he is able to interpret results of completed optimization procedures.
Study Goals
More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.formulate an optimization model for various design problems 2.identify optimization model properties such as monotonicity, (non-)convexity and (non-) linearity 3.identify optimization problem properties such as constraint dominance, constraint activity, well boundedness and convexity 4.apply Monotonicity Analysis to optimization problems using the First Monotonicity Principle 5.perform the conversion of constrained problems into unconstrained problems using penalty or barrier methods 6.compute and interpret the Karush-Kuhn-Tucker optimality conditions for constrained optimization problems 7.describe the complications associated with the use of computational models in optimization 8.illustrate the use of compact modeling and response surface techniques for dealing with computationally expensive and noisy optimization models 9.perform design sensitivity analysis using variational, discrete, semi-analytical and finite difference methods 10.identify a suitable optimization algorithm given a certain optimization problem 11.perform design optimization using the optimization routines implemented in the Matlab Optimization Toolbox 12.derive a linearized approximate problem for a given constrained optimization problem, and solve the original problem using a sequence of linear approximations 13.describe the basic concepts used in structural topology optimization Lectures (2x2 hours per week), exercises MATLAB is used for exercises. Course material: P.Y. Papalambros et al. Principles of Optimal Design: Modelling and Computation. References from literature: R.T. Haftka and Z. Grdal: Elements of Structural Optimization. MATLAB exercises 80% The course is focusing on design optimization. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
WB1441
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen Ir. J.J.L. Neve
Engineering Optimization 2
This course will not be given as lecture, but can be followed by self study (in consultation with prof. van Keulen) None (Self Study) 3 Different, to be announced English wb1440 The course is intended as a follow-up course to wb1440. However, the focus is more on the use of numerical models. Aspects that will be presented are: Optimization techniques Sensitivity analysis Coupling with simulation techniques Multi-objective optimization Multi-disciplinary optimization The course will be organized as a special topics course. The course targets at a comprehensive understanding of structural optimization, ranging from the optimization strategies available, up to the inherent complications related to the simulation techniques used. Computer-based projects. R.T. Haftka and Z. Grdal: Elements of Structural Optimization. Project work 80% 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Percentage of Design Department
Page 110 of 186
WB1443
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Course Contents Dr.ir. A.L. Schwab Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/2/0/0
Matlab in Engineering Mechanics
2 2 none English wb1413 Multibody Dynamics B Matlab in Engineering Mechanics is an introductory course in technical computing, Matlab, and numerical methods. The emphasis is on informed use of mathematical software. We want you to learn enough about the mathematical functions in MATLAB that you will be able to use them correctly, appreciate their limitations, and modify them when necessary to suit your own needs. The topics include: - introduction to MATLAB - linear equations - zero finding - least squares - ordinary differential equations - eigenvalues and singular values The weekly homework assignments are on these topics. The final project is an individual choice from various fields of application like: Multibody System Dynamics with Matlab, Control Theory with Matlab/Simulink, or Finite element calculations with FEMLab. The student is able to write his own MATLAB code to solve a technical computing problem in Engineering Mechanics on graduate level. The emphasis is on informed use of mathematical software. The student is able to use the mathematical functions in MATLAB correctly, appreciate their limitations, and modify them when necessary to suit his own needs. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.identify the finite accuracy of numerical results obtained in general due to the finite word length of the computer 2.solve a system of linear equations and understand the effect on the solutions of close to singular systems 3.apply numerous root finding algorithms and evaluate the speed and accuracy 4.apply various curve fitting techniques and identify the least square solutions, both in linear and nonlinear curve fitting 5.apply various numerical integration schemes to obtain the solutions of ordinary differential equations, determine and compare the amount of computational effort, and the stability and accuracy of the solutions 6.apply and understand Fourier analysis on measured data in order to extract basic frequencies 7.calculate eigenvalues and do singular value decomposition on a system of equations and discuss the efficiency and accuracy for large systems Lecture (1 hour per week) The course and the assigments are fully computer oriented. Course material: Cleve Moller, "Numerical Computing with MATLAB", SIAM, 2004 An electronic edition published by The MathWorks is available for free at: http://www.mathworks.com/moler/chapters.html References from literature: Rudra Pratap, "Getting Started With MATLAB 6", Oxford University Press, 2002. homework assignments + final project There will be weekly homework assignments and a final project. The homework is normally due a week after hand out and will be graded. In doing the homework I encourage you to work in pairs. You have to make a report on the final project. After handing in the report you make an appointment for the oral exam which is mainly on the assignments and the final project. The exam is individual. For up-to-date information check out the webpage at http://tam.cornell.edu/~als93/ 0% 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks
Percentage of Design Department
Page 111 of 186
WB1444-07
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Summary Course Contents
Advanced Micro Electronic Packaging

Prof.dr. G.Q. Zhang Ir. J.J.L. Neve Dr.ir. W.D. van Driel 0/0/2/0
Study Goals
3 3 none English wb1445-05 Introduction to (advanced) wafer technology, microelectronic packaging and assembly, design and reliability qualification. As the bridge between IC and various electronics systems, microelectronic packaging controls more than 90% of the size, 60% of the cost, and largely the system performance and reliability. It is one of the most fascinating and rapid developing technology and business fields of Semiconductors. Due to the recent progress of Cu/Low-k CMOS and advanced SiP technologies, microelectronic packaging is playing a dominant role in the development of future microelectronics and Microsystems. Course outline: - Application needs (Ambient Intelligence drives) for Semiconductors - Technology and business development trends of Semiconductors - Overview of advanced CMOS process technologies (including Cu/Low-k), and advanced packaging technologies (covering the packaging glossary, design specification, materials and properties, process flows and process characteristics for both peripheral and Area Array interconnects, etc.) - Designing and qualification of advanced packages (QFN, BGA, FlipChip, CSP, WLP, three level SiP) - Emerging packaging technologies, such as Cu/low-k packaging, Nanopackaging, MEMS packaging, opto-packaging and Biopackaging - Second level assembly - International technology roadmap and future packaging perspectives To master the knowledge of advanced packaging technologies, via learning the basics and critical aspects of designing and qualification of advanced packages; knowing the technology roadmap, future perspectives and business trend of advanced packaging. Lectures Course material: Handout (presentations) Book 'Mechanics of Microelectronics' by G.Q. Zhang, W.D. van Driel, and X.J. Fan Excursion to Philips Two possibilities of course assessment: 1) participating in real and mini industrial R&D project team, or 2) conducting literature study 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 112 of 186
WB1445-05
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents
Mechanics of Micro Electronics and Microsystems

Prof.dr. G.Q. Zhang Dr.ir. W.D. van Driel 0/0/0/2
Study Goals
4 4 Exam by appointment English Virtual prototyping and qualification, designing for reliability, thermo-mechanical and multi-physics modeling, simulation-based optimisation. The technology trends of microelectronics and microsystems are mainly characterized by miniaturization down to nanoscale, increasing levels of technology and function integration and introduction of new materials, while the business trends are mainly characterized by cost reduction, shorter time to market, and outsourcing. Combination of these trends leads to increased chances and consequences of failures, increased design complexity,decreased product development and qualification times, dramatically decreased design margins, and increased difficulties to meet quality, robustness and reliability requirements. Most importantly, for the new product/process development, trial-error based design methods are still the common practice, while reliability qualification methods are still empirical. This situation, however, is becoming the bottleneck for the future development, especially for the advanced Cu/Low-k CMOS and higher level SiP technologies. To achieve competitive product/process development, it is vital to know and to apply the state-of-the-art of virtual prototyping and qualification. Course outline: Major reliability problems in Semiconductors industries Status quo of current reliability paradigm The state-of-the-art of virtual prototyping and qualification, including the basic theories and methodologies Case study of covering important failure modes related with wafer backend, IC packaging and board level assembly, such as (not limited to): Various cracks, and delamination Wire bonding failures Solder fatigues Moisture-induced failures Warpage Challenges and future perspective To know the current and expected reliability problems of and industry's concern for Microelelctronics and Microsystems; to master the state-of-the-art of theories, methodologies and industrial practices of virtual prototyping and qualification, in combination with some real industrial case studies; to know the challenges and future perspectives of virtual prototyping and qualification. Lectures Course material: Handout (presentations) Reference books and papers Book 'Mechanics of Microelectronics' by G.Q. Zhang, W.D. van Driel, and X.J. Fan References from literature Proceedings of IEEE conference of EuroSimE Presentation Two possibilities of course assessment: 1) participating in real and mini industrial R&D project team, 2) conducting literature study. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 113 of 186
WB1450-05
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents
Mechanical Analysis for Engineering

Prof. D.J. Rixen Ir. J.J.L. Neve Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen 0/5/0/0
2 2 2 5 English wb1451-05,wb1416, wb1418, wb1417,wb1408a,wb1405a a basic knowledge of engineering mechanics is required (see mechanics and dynamics courses from BSc engineering mechnics) The course is designed to give a overview of essential mechanical topics relevant for production techniques, mechatronics and system designers. The main topics that will be handled are: - Multi-physical aspects of models (electrostatic coupling of microstructures, piezo-electric materials, thermo-mechanical coupling, vibro-acoustics) - basics of rotor dynamics - damping description in structural dynamics - visco-elasticity of materials - mechanical properties of composites The course is intended to give an overview of the important phenomena and to give guidelines for further modeling and solving of structural analysis problems. The student is able to recognize if complex mechanical interactions are affecting a mechatronical device or a production machine and, understanding the important physical effects in action, he can choose the proper analysis tool and interpret the results. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.recognize and analyse the effects of the coupling of structural parts with electrostatic forces, acoustic pressure, thermomechanical effects and piezo-electric mechanics. In particular is able to analyze how those effects are utilized in mechatronical designs. 2.evaluate the effect of gyroscopic forces on the dynamics of rotors 3.compute the linear dynamic response of mechanical systems excited by random forces 4. Now the different ways to describe damping in structural dynamics (viscous, histeretic and visco-elastic). 5.analyze the stiffness and strength of simple composite materials 6.evaluate the visco-elastic properties of materials and use their constitutive description in numerical modelling
Study Goals
Lectures Computer tools will be used (Matlab and/or Ansys) for the project exercise Course material: lecture notes specifcally designed for the course and available through blackboard References from literature: Fung, Y.C., Foundations of Solid Mechanics, Prentice-Hall, 1965. Timoshenko, S.P. en Gere, J.M., Theory of elastic stability, Second edition, McGraw-Hill, 1981. Crisfield, M.A., Nonlinear finite element analysis of solids and structures. Bathe, K.J., Finite element procedures. Zienkiewicz, O.C. en Taylor, R.C., The finite element method, Vol. 1 and 2, Fourth edition. Gradin, M. en Rixen, D.J., Mechanical vibrations: theory and applications to structural dynamics, Wiley, 1997. Inman, D.J., Engineering Vibration, Second edition, Prentice-Hall, 2001 Hughes, T.J.R., The finite element method: linear static and dynamic finite element analysis, Prentice-Hall, 1987. Oral exam + project exercise No direct design content. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 114 of 186
WB1451-05
Engineering Mechanics Fundamentals

Prof.dr.ir. M.A. Gutierrez De La Merced Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/0/2/2 3 4 3 4 5 English In this course the students will be given the basic knowhow to formulate the equations describing the mechanical behavior of continuum media and learn the theory underlying the elastic behavior of solids. The course will also cover the concepts of energies and variational analysis relevant to mechanical analysis. Two-dimensional and three dimensional classical problems will be handled. Also the theory of plates and shells will be outlined. The student is able to choose the proper formulation to describe the continuous description of mechanical systems and of the material behaviour. He/she can apply energy principles to derive the governing equations and he/she can use the fundamental solutions for basic two and three-dimensional elasticity problems.
Study Goals
More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.formulate in a proper way the deformations in contiuum media (small and finite deformations), including the relation between different strain and stress tensors 2.describe the relations between Lagrangian/Eulerian representation 3.write, in solid mechanics, the constitutive laws of elastic materials 4.use variational energy principles and apply them to derive approximation techniques 5.describe the special formulations relative to plates and shells Lecture 0/0/2/2 Course material: Gerhard A. Holzapfel, "Nonlinear Solid Mechanics: a Continuum Approach for Engineering", Wiley, 2000. References from literature: R. Aris, "Vectors, Tensors and the Basic Equations of Fluid Mechanics", Dover, 1962. Fung, Y.C., "Foundations of Solid Mechanics", Prentice-Hall, 1965. M.E. Gurtin, "An Introduction to Continuum Mechanics, Mathematics in Science and Engineering", vol. 158, Academic Press, New York, 1982. R.W. Ogden, "Nonlinear elastic deformations", Ellis Horwood Ltd., 1984 A basic knowledge of engineering mechanics and linear algebra is required (see mechanics and dynamics courses from BSc engineering mechanics) Written assignment and oral exam 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 115 of 186
WB1481LR
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge
Dynamics and Control Space Systems

Dr.ir. P.T.L.M. van Woerkom Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/0/4/0
Course Contents
Study Goals
3 3 3 4 English Recommended prequisite courses: AE4-305 Spacecraft attitude dynamics and control AE4-305P Spacecraft attitude control system design exercise. The course focuses on dynamics modelling and controller design for space systems, such as rigid spacecraft, flexible spacecraft, space robotic manipulators, and onboard space mechanisms. To understand system behaviour a thorough understanding of system dynamics is required. In turn this understanding forms the basis for the synthesis of suitable measurement and control systems, and for the selection of suitable estimation and control algorithms. The student must be able to: A. Concerning dynamics modelling and dynamics analysis 1. define suitable attitude parametrizations and the associated kinematic relationships for single bodies and for concatenated bodies (including structural flexibility) 2. derive and interpret the equations of motion for the translation, rotation, and deformation of a generic single flexible body (virtual work derivation; hybrid coordinate formulation) 3. derive and interpret the equations of motion of single-spin and dual-sin spacecraft 4. derive and interpret the equations of motion for a rigid Earth-pointing three-axis stabilized spacecraft 5. derive and interpret the equations of single-axis attitude motion of an agile (i.e. maneuvering) spacecraft disturbed by structural flexibility, by environmental torques (gravity gradient and magnetic) and by internal torques (reaction wheels) B. Concerning space system control 6. determine dynamic stability of a given space system (Routh-Hurwitz criterion; Lyapunov first and second methods) 7. design three controllers for a single-axis spacecraft: classical PID, modern LQG, and Lyapunov 8. design and analyze suppression of nutation of a spinstabilized spacecraft, using passive damping (viscous dissipation) and through active damping (jet; reaction wheel) 9. describe and analyze multi-sensor data fusion (test case: single-axis spacecraft with attitude sensor and rate sensor) 10. describe and analyze measurement spill-over and control spill-over (test cases: pinned-pinned beam and single-axis spacecraft) 11. describe and analyze robust disturbance accommodation control During the course some items may be given more attention than other items, depending on the interest of the participants. Lectures The course consists of a series of lectures and of several small-scale take-home assignments. Final grade for the course will be based on the quality of the take-home work. Where deemed helpful the student will be asked to further clarify his work. Study material (on Blackboard): - lecture notes - various supporting documents Several take-home assignments (on Blackboard) A series of take-home exercises Students wishing to follow this course are invited to express their interest to dr.ir. P.Th.L.M. van Woerkom, Faculty 3mE/Mechanical Engineering, Section Engineering Dynamics, 3mE 8B-4.21, extension 82792. Aerospace students wishing to follow this course are invited to express their interest in addition to dr. Q.P. Chu, Faculty Aerospace Engineering, Section Control and Simulation, LR room no. 027, extension 83586. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Education Method
Assessment Special Information
Department
Page 116 of 186
WB2301-5
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary
System Identification and Parameter Estimation

Dr.ir. A.C. Schouten Dr.ir. E. de Vlugt Prof.dr. F.C.T. van der Helm Ir. A. Klomp 0/0/2/2 3 4 3 Different, to be announced English wb2104 and/or wb2207 System identification based on estimators of spectral densities (nonparametric black-box) and on discrete time domain models (parametric grey-box). Translation of identified system dynamics into physical parameters using physical models (parameter estimation). Application to open-loop and closed-loop systems. Estimation accuracy, perturbation signal design. Analysis of unknown dynamic systems in the time-domain and the frequency domain. Application to relation between transferfunctions and spectral densities in open-loop and closed-loop systems. Modelling of systems: Choice of model structure and parametrisation. Linear and non-linear model structures. Parameter estimation by optimization. Optimization techniques: Gradient methods, random-search methods, genetic algorithms. Experimental validation of models: Coherence, Variance-Accounted-For (VAF). Special non-linear model structures: Expert systems, neural networks, fuzzy models. The student is able to: 1design test signals to identify an unknown system a.design proper experimental measurement conditions b.understand the differences between stochastic and deterministic signals c.indicate the differences in application between transient and continuous signals 2estimate a nonparametric model of the unknown system from recorded signals a.recognize and identify open-loop and closed-loop relations between measured signals b.employ proper techniques to identify models in the frequency and time domain c.validate the nonparametric models using different indicators 3parameterize nonparametric models a.derive the best model structure based on a priori knowledge from physics b.parameterize the dynamic relation between the recorded signals using linear and non-linear parameter estimation techniques c.implement different optimization techniques d.assess the uniqueness of the parameters using correlation analysis e.evaluate the derived parameterized model through validation techniques f.recognize three non-linear model structures, and their applicability in a given situation Lectures (2 hours per week), practical assignments. Practical assignments on a PC with a number of available programs in MATLAB/SIMULINK. Course material (available through Blackboard website): Lecture slides, Assignment guide, Formula sheet. Demonstration programs in Matlab. Book Chapters: Identification of Nonlinear Physiolocal Systems, Westwick and Kearney. Written exam, graded assignments. At the end of the course, a choice can be made out of several final assignments, for which recorded signals are available. The available demonstration programs have to be adapted in order to estimate proper transfer functions and model parameters. 0% 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Course Contents
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Department
Page 117 of 186
WB2303-10
Measurement in Engineering
Prof.ir. R.H. Munnig Schmidt
3 3 3 4 English The course will focus on measurement techniques that are usually applied in Mechanical Engineering so integrated in larger equipment for feedback or calibration purposes but also in stand alone setups. Topics include: General performance characteristics of measurement instruments. Elements in measurement systems: Sensors, Signal conditioning and Signal processing. Electronics used in measurement systems and EMC. Signal manipulation and transmission, filtering, noise suppression, amplitude modulation. Measurement uncertainty, error sources, correction methods. Interfering and modifying error sources. Calibration, traceability and standards. Dynamics of measurement systems and measurement of dynamics. Transfer functions in the frequency and time domain. Measuring devices for both linear and angular motion (displacement, velocity, acceleration) Force, torque and pressure sensors. Strain gauge principles Optical measurement systems, encoders and laser interferometry
Study Goals
Education Method Course Relations Books Prerequisites Assessment Department
* The student will be capable of understanding the fundamental approach in measuring physical quantities and the influence of the different elements on the performance of the measurement system. * The student will be capable of applying the basic principles of measurement of mechanical magnitudes. * The student will be capable of determining the suitable measurement systems for a given metrology problem. * The student will be able to design a concept measurement system for a given measurement problem by using different physical principles. Classroom Lectures. Basic theory and application by the main teacher and max. 2 invited speakers on a certain theme. These can be from industry, another faculty or phd students about their research topic This course is directly related with Mechatronic System Design (WB 2414). Although WB2414 is not mandatory it is highly advised to get acquainted with the methodology. Principles of Measurement systems. John P. Bentley 4th edition and higher. ISBN 0-13-043028-5. Available at VSSD Knowledge on mechatronic design principles. Either by following WB2414 or by studying the Lecture Notes of WB2414 that are available on blackboard. Written examination, closed book 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 118 of 186
WB2305
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents T. Keviczky 0/4/0/0
Digital Control
Study Goals
2 2 2 3 English wb2207 and wb2420 or sc4025 Knowledge of classic control techniques as well as the state space theory is required. Computer control. Sampling of continuous-time signals. The sampling theorem. Aliasing. Discrete-time systems. State-space systems in discrete-time. The z-transform. Selection of sampling-rate. Analysis of discrete-time systems. Stability. Controllability, reachability and observability. Disturbance models. Reduction of effects of disturbances. Stochastic models. Design methods. Approximations of continuous design. Digital PID-controller. State-space design methods. Observers. Poleplacement. Optimal design methods. Linear Quadratic control. Prediction. LQG-control. Implementational aspects of digital controllers. The student must be able to: 1.describe the essential differences between continuous time and discrete-time control 2.transform a continuous time description of a system into a discrete-time description 3.calculate input-output responses for discrete-time systems 4.analyse the system characteristics of discrete-time systems 5.employ a pole-placement method on a discrete-time system 6.implement an observer to calculate the states of a discrete time system 7.apply optimal control on discrete-time systems 8.describe the functioning of the Kalman-filter as a dynamic observer Lectures and computer exercises Matlab is used to carry out the exercises of this course. Course material: Lecture notes are made available on Blackboard References from literature: K.J. Astrom, B. Wittenmark 'Computer-controlled Systems', Prentice Hall ,1997, 3rd edition B.C. Kuo 'Digital Control Systems', Tokyo, Holt-Saunders, 1980 G.F. Franklin, J.D. Powell 'Digital Control of Dynamic Systems', 1989, 2nd edition, Addison-Wesley Final quiz in class + project assignment The project assignment can be completed only during the quarter when the course is offered (i.e. the project has no resit during other periods). The design aspects of digital controllers are discussed. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 119 of 186
WB2306
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Course Contents Dr.ir. D.A. Abbink 0/0/0/4
The Human Controller
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment
4 4 4 5 English wb2207 The Human Controller - from perception to action 01. Introduction: General 02. Introduction : from perception (physiology: Visual, Tactile, Auditory) 03. Introductionto action (introduction on neuromuscular control, feedforward vs feedback) 04. Perception: 3D vision & Static depth perception 05. Perception: Vestibulary System 06. Manual Control Theory Crossover Model 07. Practical assignment: measuring manual control strategies 08. Manual Control Theory Critical Instability Task 09. Manual Control Application: vehicles 10. Manual Control Application: haptics 11. Manual Control Application: Measuring performance and effort 12. Practical Assignment: the use of the neuromuscular system during manual vehicle control 13. Discussion student presentations from both assignments 14. General Discussion The student must be able to: 1.make a Problem Analysis of a given assignment in the field of a human in control of a technical device, e.g. a surgical tool, a vehicle, a prosthesis or a chemical or nuclear plant a)identify the dynamic relationships between the human and the device in terms of sensor input and actuation b)describe and explain the properties of the human controller in the system under 1a, with reference to the performance and stability limitations of the feedback loop c)translate the result of 1a and 1b into technical Design Objectives of the controlled system without reference to any solutions d)derive qualitative and quantitative Design Specifications from the Design Objectives of the controlled system, and categorize and prioritize these. e)assess feedback on the Design Specification from Assignor 2.understand the physical limitations of the human musculoskeletal system and its sensors a)identify the relevant dynamic characteristics of human sensor systems (auditory, tactile, visual, vestibulary systems), muscles and the central nervous system b)indicate the mechanical, physiological and mental load and sustainable load of the human being, while at work and/or in a human control situation (direct control or supervisory control) c)select appropriate models and measurement methods for the load mentioned in 2b d)generate a variety of Conceptual Designs to decrease the mechanical, physiological and mental load e)judiciously select the most appropriate Conceptual Design f)demonstrate the plausibility or feasibility of the Conceptual Design, with special emphasis to the workers benefits Lectures (4 hours per week) Lecture Sheets and selected papers Two practical assignments are given, after which groups of students must communicate the results in a short presentation. These results account for 20% of the final grade. The final exam is a written exam. 50% By including human limitations, abilities and preferences in the design of human-machine interaction, better performance and/or reduced mental or physical load can be achieved. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Page 120 of 186
WB2308
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg Dr.ir. J.L. Herder Dr.ir. G.J.M. Tuijthof 0/2/0/0
Biomedical Engineering Design
2 2 2 English In biomechanical engineering, the design specifications are fundamentally different from those in industry. Typically, precise motion is much less critical than safety, force transmission or distribution, and energy-efficiency. Hence, a different design approach is needed. This course presents a design philosophy and a design approach, dedicated to rehabilitation technology and [orthopaedic] surgery. These fields were selected because of human-machine interaction is inherent and vital. Illustrative examples will be discussed by their entire design proces (system analysis, design approach, topology synthesis, system alternatives and improvements, dimensional optimization, choice of components). Topics addressed include: arm and hand prosthetics, arm orthotics and exoskeletons, control of prosthetics and orthotics, minimally access orthopaedic surgery, arthroscopy, transmission of forces, influence of visco-elastic materials on the behaviour of mechanical systems, static balancing, pneumatics, low-friction mechanisms, medical terminology. Students will select a design assignment and perform a problem analysis, generate conceptual designs, and select a feasible one. The assignment will be carried out in groups of around two students, where possible from different faculties, and is completed with a presentation and a report. The student must be able to: 1.make a Problem Analysis of a given assignment in the field of medical or rehabilitation technology identify the underlying cause of the problem as presented in the assignment translate the result of 1a into technical Design Objectives without reference to any solutions derive qualitative and quantitative Design Specifications from the Design Objectives, and categorize and prioritize these. obtain and assess feedback on the Design Specification from Assignor 2.generate Conceptual and Embodiment Designs for the given assignment select and apply appropriate Design Methodology and Design Methods generate a variety [typically at least three] of Conceptual Designs judiciously select the most appropriate Conceptual Design obtain and assess feedback on the selected Conceptual Design from Assignor transform the selected Conceptual Design into an Embodiment Design demonstrate the plausibility or feasibility of the Embodiment Design Lectures (2 hours per week) "Upper Extremity Prosthetics. Current status & evaluation" Dick H. Plettenburg VSSD, 2006, ISBN13: 978-90-71301-75-9 Design project The course is completed with a conceptual engineering design project. 80% Design methods and design tools, illustrated with examples, are the major part of the course. Furthermore several supporting theories are discussed. Students are required to do a conceptual design study on real-life and actual problems. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 121 of 186
WB2404
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. P.A. Wieringa Dr.ir. J.C.F. de Winter 0/4/0/0
Man-machine systems
2 2 Different, to be announced Exam by appointment English The entire spectrum between manual and supervisory control is treated using scientific literature and own research results. The student is encouraged to use a system & control engineering approach: the operator is considered to be part of a control loop which is either 1) continuously closed (manual control situations called direct control), 2) quickly changing between open and closed control (intermittent control; e.g. car driving or ship navigation), or 3) mainly open loop control (supervisory control; e.g., operators in control rooms). The following topics are covered - Origin, historic overview, and scope of human factors. - Skill learning, training, augmented feedback, virtual reality, simulators - Automation (human-in-the-loop vs. human-out-of-the loop, mental models) - Task analysis - Human error, mental workload, attention, signal detection, vigilance, decision making - Organisational factors and cognitive work analysis - Accident analysis and prevention Examples and case studies will be provided from e.g., car driving, aviation, and medicine. The course will feature a number of guest lectures from specialists in the field. The student should be able to - describe and provide definitions of the key topics in the course - explain and reflect on the differences between manual control and supervisory control - explain how human skills develop and how feedback affects skill acquisition - criticize and interpret existing human-machine-interface designs - select and perform a task analysis - classify different forms of human error - explain how design decisions affect performance, human error, and safety - summarize and interpret cases about accidents Lectures (4 hours per week) Each year an excursion will be held to a research centre or industrial plant to show some of the items discussed during this course. Powerpoint slides of the lectures, scientific articles, and supplementary materials will be made available on Blackboard. Closed-book written exam (50% open questions, 50% multiple choice questions) Concepts and tools for design and evaluation of Human Interaction with complex systems are discussed 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method
Literature and Study Materials Assessment Design Content Department
Page 122 of 186
WB2408
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr. J. Dankelman Prof.dr.ir. C.A. Grimbergen Dr.ir. A.C. van der Eijk 0/4/0/0
Physiological Systems
Study Goals
2 2 2 3 English 1.Introduction to human physiology (human body, homeostasis, general organization of the circulatory system). 2.Central nerve system (nerve cells, synapses, sensory system, motor system, autonomic nerve system, reflexes). 3.Mechanics and excitation of the heart (contraction mechanism of cardiac muscle, action potentials). 4.Coronary circulation (control of coronary blood flow, influence of heart contraction on coronary blood flow, effect of stenoses). 5.Cardiac output and Frank-Starling mechanism (regulation, venous return, arterial pressure, pulmonary resistance). 6.Blood rheology and wave phenomena in the circulation (blood cells, blood flow, blood pressure, vascular compliance, clotting, Newtonian flow). 7.Mass transport (diffusion, convection, osmosis, transport through cell membranes). 8.Kidneys (anatomy, glomerular filtration, reabsorption, regulation of blood volume, artificial kidneys). 9.Arterial pressure regulation (control system, baroreceptors, influence of nerve system, control by renal system). 10.Lungs (respiration, alveoli, transport of oxygen and carbon dioxide, artificial lung). 11.Pregnancy and human development (foetal circulation, oxygen transport in utero, umbilical cord, prematurity) 12.Measurement and imaging techniques (ECG, MRI, Rntgen, echo, Doppler, catheters, ultrasound). 13.Modelling of physiological control systems (identification, difficulties). 14.A practical course on Cell Physiology at LUMC. The student is able to describe the function of several physiological systems from an engineering point of view. The student must be able to: Describe the anatomy and function of the heart, lungs, kidneys, and nerve system Describe and draw graphs of the mechanical and electrical activity of the heart(muscle) Identify and explain the transport mechanisms in the human body Describe mechanisms for regulation of the cardiac output and the arterial blood pressure Describe and draw graphs of wave and rheological phenomena in the blood circulation Describe the principles of current used measurements and imaging techniques (e.g. echo, MRI, Rntgen) Formulate the problems of applying standard modeling and identification techniques on physiological control systems Formulate design criteria for artificial organs
2 times per week 2 lectures of 45 minutes 1 excursion to Leiden University Medical Centre Course material: Reader: Physiological Systems by J. Dankelman, C.A. Grimbergen, J.A.E. Spaan. Powerpoint slides of lectures Optional: E.N. Marieb Human Anatomy & Physiology 6th edition Pearson; Benjamin-Cummings ISBN: 0321204131 A.C. Guyton, J. E. Hall Textbook of Medical Physiology 11th Edition W B Saunders Co ISBN: 9780721602400 W. Boron, E. Boulpaep Medical physiology Revised edition W B Saunders Co ISBN: 9781416023289
Written exam 10% The design of several artificial organs will be discussed (e.g. artificial heart, valves, lung, and kidney). 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Page 123 of 186
WB2414-09
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge 0/4/0/0
Mechatronic System Design

2 2 2 3 English All PME students Bsc Mechanical Engineering, Electrical Engineering or Physics. ME1611-10 (Physics for mechanical Engineers) and SC4026 (Control system Design) is needed as preparation Mechatronic system design deals with the design of controlled motion systems by utilizing a multitude of disciplines. It starts with thinking how the required function of a machine can be achieved by utilizing its different subsystems following a systems Engineering approach (V-model). Some supporting disciplines are not originally the working area of mechanical engineers like electronics, electromechanics and optics. This course aims to connect these disciplines to realize an optimally designed system. The target application of controlled motion systems explicitly includes the controlling of any movement ranging from perfectly standing still, slow motion precision manipulators to high speed applications with extreme precision to sub nm level. Based on practical cases ranging from CD drives , active car suspension systems to waferscanners the following subjects will be dealt with. System design breakdown into subsystems and elements Mechatronic motion system characteristics Dynamic behavior in the time and frequency domain of actively controlled motion systems. Transfer functions and position control(feedback,PID and feedforward). Electromechanical Actuators Analog electronics, operational amplifiers and power electronics used for driving actuators Although embedded sofware is very relevant in mechatronic systems only limited attention will be given to the subject as it is better covered in other specialized courses. The student can analyze active dynamic systems by means of bode diagrams. The student can solve new mechatronic problems from a systems Engineering perspective. The student will be able to understand the role of different disciplines that are used in Mechatronic systems in their mutual relationship. The student will be able to determine the optimal combination of the different disciplines to achieve a specific controlled motion function. The most important aspect that will be assessed is the capability to match theory with practice. Translate a real system into a dynamic model and vice versa. Understand what a position control system really does. Observe a system top-down. Starting with a global overview and use approximating (scalar) calculations by hand to get a sufficient feel of the problem to make concept design decisions. Learn to use detailed calculations only as a last step to determine the details with the help of a (finite element) computer program. Lectures around practical mechatronic systems based on a reader/book that is made available both on blackboard and in printed form as a book (planned not 100% sure if ready in time). The lectures will be aiming at introducing the material and make the students learn by intensive studying and practicing in individual exercises. The theoretical part will concentrate on those supporting disciplines that are underexposed in the Bsc curriculum The following disciplines are important aspects: Dynamics, electronics, electromechanics, control engineering, dynamic error budgeting. While these disciplines mostly are dealt with in separate specialized courses, in this course the mutual relationship in the application in controlled motion systems is the central theme.
Course Contents
Study Goals
Education Method
No computers will be used nor will the emphasis lay on exact calculated values. A reader is in concept published on blackboard. When possible in time it will be made available in printed form as a book. The presentations will also be published on blackboard "Mechatronic System Design" by R. Munnig Schmidt a.o. (planned in 2010) "Mechatronic System Design" R. Munnig Schmidt (blackboard) Written Examination (Closed book) plus individual exercises. Calculator. 50% The course gives methods to design complex systems by following the System Engineering guidelines of INCOSE. Clearly distinguishing requirements and specifications. Further it is focusing on mechatronic concept design by optimally combining different disciplines and pinpointing (dynamic) interactions between the different elements of a system 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering Page 124 of 186
Books Reader
Assessment Permitted Materials during Tests Percentage of Design Design Content
Department
Judgement
In the examination the judgment is determined for 60% on the proof of the real understanding of the problem and its solution including knowledge of physical phenomena and basic relations. 40% is determined by crisp formulation and the related calculations.
WB2415
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Nabestaanden van O.H. Bosgra Dr. P.S.C. Heuberger 0/0/4/0
Robust Control
Study Goals
3 3 Exam by appointment English Requires solid background on state-space descriptions of multivariable linear systems. sc4022/sc4025, wb2421 Recap on background in linear systems theory Stabilizing controllers and the concept of the generalized plant Uncertainty descriptions The general framework of robust control The structured singular value: Definition, properties, computation Robust stability analysis Nominal and robust performance analysis Excursion: The algebraic Riccati equation The H-infinity control problem and its solution in terms of Riccati equations Design of robust controllers The student is able to reproduce theory and apply computational tools for robust controller analysis and synthesis. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.substantiate relation between frequency-domain and state-space description of dynamical systems 2.define stability and performance for multivariable linear time-invariant systems 3.construct generalized plant for complex system interconnections 4.describe parametric and dynamic uncertainties 5.translate concrete controller synthesis problem into abstract framework of robust control 6.reproduce definition, properties and computation of the structured singular value 7.master application of structure singular value for robust stability and performance analysis 8.sketch derivation and precisely formulate the solution of the H-infinity control problem 9.specify the role of Riccati equation within H-infinity control 10.design robust controllers on the basis of the H-infinity control algorithm 11.apply controller-scalings iteration for robust controller synthesis Lectures (4 hours per week) Computer exercises with Matlab's Robust Control Toolbox. Course material: S. Skogestad, I. Postlethwaite, Multivariable Feedback Control, John Wiley & Sons, 1997. References from literature: K. Zhou, J.C. Doyle, K. Glover, Robust and optimal control, Prentice Hall, 1996 Written exercise and oral examination 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Page 125 of 186
WB2421
Multivariable Control Systems

Dr.ir. A.J.J. van der Weiden
Study Goals
2 2 Exam by appointment English wb2415, Robust Control SC4025 (or SC4022), Control Theory The lectures are divided into blocks. At first a review of elementary single-loop feedback design is given. A standard design problem is given and especially the limitations on performance are treated. In the second block of lectures a system theoretical approach is used to explain the properties and the computation of the poles and zeros of multivariable feedback systems. Furthermore internal stability and the generalized Nyquist stability is discussed. The third block treats performance and robustness of multivariable feedback systems. The use of principal gains (singular values) for assessing performance is introduced. Different representations of uncertainties are given. The use of the H-infinty norm and the structured singular value to analyse the robust stability and robust performance will be introduced. Examples are given of how to choose weighting functions to gain specified performance in the H-infinty control design context. Finally a block is spent on multivariable control design for real practical systems using Nyquist like techniques. In MATLAB implemented algorithms are explained and applied to different design examples. The objective of the course is to gain a basic understanding of the problem formulation and solution for control design of (uncertain) multivariable systems. The mix of tutorial lectures and computer exercises on realistic examples provides a good learning environment. Lectures (4 hours per week) MATLAB, the Control and mu-toolbox may be used for the exercises. Course material: Multivariable Feedback Control Analysis and Design. S.Skogestad, I.Postlethwaite. John Wiley & Sons, ISBN 0-470-01168-8 Lecture notes: The poles and zeros of multivariable systems, A.J.J. van der Weiden. References from literature: Many references are available in the Central Library. Oral examination and exercises based on MATLAB Each year a new set-up of design examples is considered. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
WB2427
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents P. Estevez Castillo Prof.dr.ir. J. van Eijk 0/0/4/0
Predictive Modelling
Study Goals
3 3 Exam by appointment English Steps in a Modelling Activity Stepwise Refined Modelling Practical Modelling Mixed Dynamics/Control Simulations Effect of Modal Truncation and Accuracy Model Reduction Techniques Static Reduction Techniques Component Mode Techniques The student is going to be able to model (lump sum) some high precision engineering applications (positioning and vibration isolation) with structural resonances using 20-sim, and is able to modify and optimize the mechanical structure for better performances Lecture and computer room exercises Machine Dynamics in Mechatronics Systems - An Engineering Approach (Rankers) Oral 30% System level design and modelling - Improving mechanical design 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 126 of 186
WB2428-03
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Mechanical Design in Mechatronics

Ir. P.C.J. van Rens Dr.ir. A. van Beek Dr.ir. J.L. Herder Dr.ir. R.A.J. van Ostayen Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg 0/0/4/2 3 4 3 3 4 English Mechanical design principles for high precision positioning, controlling degrees of freedom Stress and strain, design for stiffness Design principles to eliminate friction, wear and hysteresis To gain sound understanding of mechanical design principles for high precision applications in mechatronics Lectures (4 hours per week) Will be made available on Blackboard Verbal exam (semester 2A) and Design Exercise (semester 2B) 90% Mechanical design principles for high precision applications 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department
WB2432
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg Prof.dr. F.C.T. van der Helm 0/0/2/2
Bio Mechatronics
Study Goals
3 4 3 4 English wb2407 Biomechatronics is a contraction of biomechanics and mechatronics. In this course the function and coordination of the human motion apparatus is the central focus, and the design of assistive devices for the support of the function of the motion apparatus. Examples are assistive devices like an orthosis, prosthesis or Functional Electrical Stimulation of muscles. The goal is to provide some function to patients with functional deficiencies. The student must be able to: 1.make a Problem Analysis of a given assignment in the field of the human motion apparatus and its interaction with an assistive device identify the underlying cause [pathology] of the problem as presented in the assignment describe and explain the possible treatment options for the pathology of 1a translate the result of 1a into technical Design Objectives without reference to any solutions derive qualitative and quantitative Design Specifications from the Design Objectives, and categorize and prioritize these assess feedback on the Design Specification from Assignor 2.optimize the assistive device application given in the assignment in energetical and control aspects select and apply appropriate Design Methodology and Design Methods generate a variety [typically at least three] of Conceptual Designs judiciously select the most appropriate Conceptual Design assess feedback on the selected Conceptual Design from Assignor demonstrate the plausibility or feasibility of the Conceptual Design, with special emphasis to the patient benefits Lectures (2 hours per week) Course material: A reader is available through Blackboard References from literature: D.B. Popovic and T. Sinkjaer Control of Movement for the Physically Disabled Springer (2000) ISBN-13: 978-1852332792 D.H. Plettenburg Upper Extremity Prosthetics. Current status & evaluation VSSD (2006) ISBN-13: 978-9071301759 Assignment + written exam Students are requested to make one final assignment, which will be part of the examination. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Page 127 of 186
WB2433-03
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. M. Wisse Prof.dr. R. Babuska Prof.dr.ir. P.P. Jonker 4/0/0/0
Humanoid Robots
1 1 1 English BSc. requirements Humanoid robots are the research topic of the future, and partially already today. This course is organized around the central problem in humanoid robot design; they must operate fully autonomously. This results in design constraints such as energy efficiency and autonomous control. The course will treat the following topics: Introduction Legged locomotion perception vision control collaborating robots (i.e. robot soccer) applications The student is able to provide an overview of the technical disciplines that are involved in research and development of robotic systems. For each of the disciplines, the student is able to describe the main techniques and approaches, and to apply these on sample problems. More specifically, the student must be able: 1.System software and hardware architecture, the student is able to: design a modular system architecture for autonomous robots. For each of the software or hardware modules, the student can describe (1) the function of the module, (2) the services that the module provides to higher-ranking modules, (3) the services that the module requires from lower-ranking modules, (4) the type(s) of interface(s) that the module requires 2.Multibody dynamics, the student is able to: describe which functions a (any) multibody dynamics simulation package fullfills, which types of algorithms are used in the package, and which typical problems can arise (accuracy, instability) and where these problems originate. Also, the student can describe the similarities between PD controllers and mechanical spring-damper systems 3.Robot walking, the student is able to: describe the various existing methods to control two-legged walking robots. The student knows and is able to calculate the two most common performance criteria, namely stability (plus robustness) and efficiency. The student can describe by which means the robustness can be increased 4.Reinforcement learning, the student is able to: explain the principle of reinforcement learning and the special case of Q-learning. The student is able to set up a learning controller (i.e. defining the length and conditions of learning trials, the inputs and outputs, and the reward structure). The student can describe the effects of various reward settings and explore rates, and name potential pittfalls and advantages 5.Actuator and sensor choice, the student is able to: select electric DC motors and gear boxes for a given required torque-velocity pattern, and accounting for motor inertia effects and gear energy losses. The student can list the type of sensors required to measure the full state of a robot system. The student can explain why it is difficult to measure the absolute orientation of the system and provide a solution. The student can also explain how one can create a series-elastic actuation system 6.Vision, the student is able to: apply an image processing library to perform low-level image processing algorithms and higher-level feature detection, enabling the automated detection of for example the location and size of an orange ball in an image. The student can explain why a color space other than RGB is used, and how the feature data can be used to obtain 3D information about the object of interest 7.Man-machine interaction, the student is able to: describe how images of faces can be processed in order to obtain information about the face expression Lectures (2 hours per week) PC practical (4 hours per week) Readers, papers (will be provided through blackboard) Excercises The students are required to have a personal interest and motivation for robotics. 25% 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Department
Page 128 of 186
WB2436-05
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr. T. Tomiyama Dr.ir. P. Breedveld Dr.ir. J.L. Herder 0/0/4/0
Bio-Inspired Design
3 3 3 English Completed courses in mechanics and design The course Bio-Inspired Design gives an overview of non-conventional mechanical approaches in nature and shows how this knowledge can lead to more creativity in mechanical design and to better (simpler, smaller, more robust) solutions than with conventional technology. The course discusses a large number of biological organisms with smart constructions, unusual mechanisms or clever processing methods and gives a number of technical examples of bio-inspired instruments and machines. Examples of topics: Strength at low weight, stiffness with soft structures, robustness with redundancy, simple laws for complex behaviour, storing energy in springs, energetically efficient muscle configurations, biological vibration systems, clamping with hands, claws, suction, glue, dry- and wet adhesion, biological walking, swimming and crawling methods, locomotion of micro- and singlecelled-organisms. Structure of the course: 1. Bioconstruction 1.1. Biostructure 1.2. Bioenergy 1.3. Bioreproduction & regeneration 1.4. Biomaintenance & repair 2. Biomotion 2.1. Bioclamping 2.2. Biopropulsion at macroscale 2.3. Biopropulsion at microscale 3. Bioprocessing 3.1. Biosensing 3.2. Biobehaving The student must be able to: 1.describe methods for creative design 2.identify mechanical working principles and phenomena of biological creatures explain their construction, motion, and/or processing mechanisms formalize the essence of these mechanisms in models derive non-conventional design principles from these models 3.implement these design principles in innovative mechanical devices summarize the transition process from the biological to the mechanical domain present their design in drawings or preferably in working models Lectures, assignment Not Applicable Handouts Final exam will take place in form of presentation with demonstration during the exam period, after which students have to handin a written paper. Students are subdivided in a number of groups. Each group gets a different assignment in which a biological solution for a technical problem has to be found. During the course, in addition and prior to the final presentation, each group gives three presentations: one about their problem analysis, one about their inspiration from biology, and one about their proposed concepts. Instructors and fellow students will provide feedback. Each group has to construct a simple demonstration model showing the working principle of the final solution. This model is to be demonstrated during the final presentation. The final mark is based on the final presentation, the demonstration model, and a written paper describing the whole process, including the biological solution of the problem. At least one photograph of the physical model must be included. In exceptional cases, a software simulation can be acceptable, to be decided by the instructors. 100% The course gives knowledge about innovative mechanical designs inspired by biological systems and phenomena, in addition to design exercises. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks
Page 129 of 186
WB2454-07
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary Course Contents
Multiphysics Modelling using COMSOL

Dr.ir. R.A.J. van Ostayen Ir. J.J.L. Neve Dr.ir. M. Langelaar 0/0/2/0 3 3 none English finite element method, multiphysics modelling, MATLAB, COMSOL In applied mechanics one is often confronted with a multi-physics or coupled problem: A problem that requires the (simultaneous) solution of more than one type of physical process or phenomenon in order to accurately describe the problem. Examples of multiphysics problems are fluid-structure interaction, thermal-structure interaction and electro-thermal-structure interaction, possibly combined with a control problem. Particularly in the field of Mechatronic design and MEMS multiphysics problems are frequently encountered. COMSOL MultiPhysics is a finite element code, which can be used both as a MATLAB toolbox and as a standalone program, which is particularly suited for the simulation of multi-physics systems.
Study Goals
Assessment Remarks
In this course the student will learn to recognize different types of multi-physics coupling and methods for their efficient numerical solution using COMSOL. Short homework assignments are used to practise the use of COMSOL on different types of problems and in a final assignment the student is asked to study a multi-physics problem using COMSOL. The student must be able to: 1. recognize multiphysics coupling in complex problems 2. distinguish between different types of coupling one-directional vs. bi- or multi-directional interface vs. field strong vs. weak 3. describe numerical solution techniques applicable to coupled problems 4. use COMSOL MultiPhysics on coupled problems Lectures (2 hours per week) / Self study COMSOL MultiPhysics and MATLAB Course material: Lecture notes and online COMSOL manual References from literature: Zienkiewicz, O.C. and Taylor, R.C., The finite element method, Vol.1, 2 and 3, Fifth edition. Written report A basic knowledge of engineering mechanics, fluid mechanics and the finite element method is required. The student is expected to have some working knowledge of MATLAB. The assessment is based on homework assignments and a more complex final assignment and report. None 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
WB2601OE
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Ir. M.G. van de Ruijtenbeek x/0/0/0
Strenght of Materials
Study Goals
1 1 none English Structural Analysis integrates mechanics of materials and finite element method (FEM) in order to predict the behavior of structures. In the course the emphasis is on correct application and interpretation of FEM. Special attention is given to verification, interpretation and accuracy of results, based on FEM theory and the way of modeling. The course is limited to linear elastic and static behavior of structures. Student is able to: 1. describe the basics of FEM, as well as the importance of the method as an analysis tool for design and design verification processes 2. use a commercial FEM system by means of a graphical interface 3. plan, perform, verify and interpret basic (static, linear-elastic) numerical analyses for 2-D trusses 4. plan, perform, verify and interpret basic (static, linear-elastic) numerical analyses for 2-D solid models 5. interpret strains, stress components and principal stresses as known from continuum mechanics and describe the limitations of linear continuum mechanics theory 6. describe the limitations of a discrete finite element model and argue the choices for mesh densities 7. interpret a linear finite element analysis with respect to correctness of results and the objective of the analys Computer exercises The grade will be based on written reports of the computer exercises 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 130 of 186
WB3404A
Responsible Instructor Course Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Ir. E.J.H. de Vries Ir. J.J.L. Neve 0/0/4/0
Vehicle Dynamics A
Study Goals
3 3 Exam by appointment English Basic elements of the dynamics of road vehicles (car, truck, motorcycle). Ride vibration response to road unevenness. Sine and stochastic roadprofile. Single, two and three mass/spring/damper systems. Linear and non-linear models. Vibrational modes and stability. Discomfort analysis. System identification. Roadholding: vehicle handling and stability. Response to stear input and side wind. Singel two-wheel vehicle model to discuss effects of tyres, inertia and geometry. Influence of several design variables: steering and wheel suspension, kinematics and compliance, toe angle, camber, roll axis, roll stabilizer, load transfer. Motorcycle stability and modal shapes (brief discussion of results) The student is able to apply dynamics methods and knowledge on vehicle specific problems More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.quantify comfort and road holding: recognise the paradox for optimal suspension design 2.realize that linear models are approximations of reality in many aspects 3.employ single mass and higher order models for vertical vibration analysis, and justify the choice for single d.o.f., quarter car or half car model 4.implement the most common non linear elements in vehicle(models) and discover some analytical solution methods 5.solve non-Linear problems with numerical integration routines 6.apply Lagrange method to derive equations of motion 7.analyze driving stability in the horizontal plane using Hurwitz criterion 8.characterize vehicle handling in terms of under- and oversteer, apply critical and characteristic velocity on the vehicle behaviour 9.derive the single track model, linear and including elementary non-linear properties Lectures (4 hours per week), practical exercises In working out the problems the computer will be helpful, for some problems essential. MatLab will be used for analysis and simulation Course material: Lecture notes: Vehicle Dynamics A (pdf on blackboard) References from literature: Mitschke, Dynamik der Kraftfahrzeuge Gillespie, Fundamentals of vehicle dynamics 1992 Genta, Motor Vehicle Dynamics 1997, 2003, 2006 Pacejka, Tyre and Vehicle Dynamics 2002, 2006 (2nd) Oral exam, by appointment Laboratory project(s): About 10 problems (exercises) are requested to prepare at home. The effect of design parameters of wheel suspension and stearing system are discussed. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 131 of 186
WB3415-03
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents C. Verheul x/x/x/x
Adams Course
Different, to be announced 1 Different, to be announced English wb1310 (Multi body dynamics A) The instruction consists of a 5-day course in a block of 2 and a block of 3 complete days in the period of two weeks consecutive weeks. During the instruction, students are taught to be able to independently use a high-end multi body modelling and simulation software in a complex mechanical dynamics project. To educate the engineering task of professionally using a multi body programme, a selection of transport technical systems and problems are modelled and investigated. Examples of mechanical systems and problems that will be modelled and analysed are: - Linkage mechanisms, - Kinematics and dynamics of crane systems, - Cable systems in transport equipment, - Conveyor belt systems. The level and contents of the course are equivalent to an ADAMS user course supplied to industrial customers. Gaining sufficient knowledge of (the use of) numerical methods and dynamical and mathematical consequences of modelling a mechanical system to enable independent use a multi body simulation software (with application in MSC.ADAMS) to perform a complex dynamics task. Computer course The course is performed on computers and consists of 40 % instructions and 60 % hands-on use of simulation software on computers. Course material: MSC.ADAMS Starters Course Manual (MSC Software) References from literature: Cranes, design, practice and maintenance; Ing. J.Verschoof; ISBN 1-86058 130 7 Computer test Assessment is performed by observation of the ability to independently use the ADAMS software for a given complicated dynamics task ate the end of the 5 day course. 25% The student must be able to translate mechanical systems into a functional system of multibody components. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Page 132 of 186
WB3416-03
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary 0/2/0/0
Design with the Finite Element Method

Ir. W. van den Bos
2 2 none English The main goal for the course wb3416 Design with finite elements is to learn using FEM (Finite Element Modeling) software as a design tool. The assignment for this course is to structurally design a crane with the aid of finite element program ANSYS. Choose 1 crane (or ship loader or unloader) from a large library of cranes and structurally design the crane with the information given from the technical specifications sheet and a photo or basic design drawing of an existing crane. Starting from the basic layout of the crane (see the photo) the structural design of the crane has to withstand weather conditions and the working loads given in the specifications. The finite element model is used to study the influences of the different loads and conditions of the crane. For approval the crane has to be calculated according to the Dutch standards NEN 2018 and 2019. For this course at least the following criteria have to be checked: Material stress Fatigue Corner load Deflection Eigenfrequencies Buckling Dynamic behavior The result of the course is a report with includes all calculations relevant to prove the structural integrity of the crane design. (for example the displacement and maximum stresses in the crane as a result of lifting a container at the tip of the boom)
Course Contents
Design a ship-shore crane according to the Dutch Standards (NEN 2017 to 2023) and control your design with the use of a finite element model (ANSYS) For special groups as the "FORMULA STUDENT Design Team" alternative designs can be the subject of this course for detailed description see: http://www.ocp.tudelft.nl/transport/Blackboard/Wb3416/index.htm result examples see: http://www.dutracing.nl/ (Formula Student 2003) http://www.ocp.tudelft.nl/transport/Blackboard/Wb3416/index.htm The student is able to: 1.use the Finite Element method as a Design Tool 2; Judge and interpret FEM results correctly 2.design according to standards Lectures in computerroom (4 hours per week) ANSYS (Finite element program) (see www.ansys.com or www.coengineering.nl for examples of finite element modelling) PSpad editor (text editor) Course material: Lecture notes "Design with finite Elements" Available at blackboard (all information is only available in English) References from literature: "Cranes, design, practice and maintenance"; Ing.J.Verschoof; ISBN 1-86058 130 7 NEN 2018 Cranes Loads and combination of loads NEN 2019 Cranes the metal structure (both can be downloaded on www.nen.nl on campus computers) Written report Compulsory for students Transport technology 50% Design the structural part of a Harbour crane. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Page 133 of 186
WB3417-04
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Course Contents Dr.ir. J.A. Ottjes Dr.ir. H.P.M. Veeke Ir. M.B. Duinkerken 2/2/0/0
Discrete Systems: MPSC
1 2 1 none English basic knowledge of programming language 'Delphi' for example as obtained in course Wb3210 Modelling, discrete simulation, process-interaction method, logistics, production, transport, control, practical This is a course on the modeling of discrete systems for transport and production. It deals with a method to quickly design flexible prototype models and to implement them in a simulation environment. The method is based on the systems approach in combination with process-interaction modeling. Special attention is paid to the modeling of operational control and the use of these models for real-time control. A number of practical examples, including a production process, a transport system and a port will be considered. During the course a number of individual assignments will be given to be answered via blackboard. Halfway the course, groups of 4 students are formed. Each group has to design(on paper) a process-interaction model of a realistic case including the model goal, performance indicators, input, output and an experimental design, resulting in a short report. Those who have attained a satisfactory result for both the individual work and the group model design will be admitted to the second part of the course. This takes the form of a practical. The model developed in the first part has to be implemented and applied in a simulation environment based on Delphi and Tomas (see http://www.delphibasics.co.uk/ and www.tomasweb.com. The results: process-interaction model design, implementation, experiments and final report will be graded.
Study Goals
Student is able to a)Apply the Process-Interaction method on any discrete logistic system More specifically, the student is able to: 1.decompose the system into relevant classes of elements, patterned on the real-world elements of the system 2.distinguish the relevant properties of the element classes 3.distinguish the active element classes and provide their process description And to b)design and implement a simulation model of a simple logistic system in Delphi/Tomas More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.formulate the goal of the simulation project 2.distinguish the relevant parameters and performance indicators 3.define the input required 4.set up an experimental plan 5.transfer the process-interaction model into Delphi/Tomas code 6.carry out the experimental plan 7.interpret and report results 9 Lectures (2 hours per week), individual assignments, group assignment Use of discrete simulation software: Tomas based on Delphi. Lecture materials, hand outs, example models, recent publications on the subject area and the Web sites: www.tomasweb.com and www.delphibasics.co.uk A text book is in preparation Practical (in groups of 4 students): Design, implementation and application of a simulation model resulting in a final report. Two grades will be assigned and averaged: 1) for the initial model design 2) for the implementation, application and final report. During the practical each group will have a coach assigned. Adequate coaching can only be assured if all members of the group have attended most of the lectures. A basic knowledge of the programming language "Delphi" is required for the practical. Though some attention is paid to that language during the course, it still is recommended to get acquainted with Delphi in an early stage of the course. a useful web site is: www.delphibasics.co.uk 50% The modeling of a system has a major design component 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Special Information Remarks
Page 134 of 186
WB3419-03
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Practical Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Characterization and Handling of Bulk Solid Materials

Dr.ir. D.L. Schott Prof.dr.ir. G. Lodewijks E.F.L. Stok 2/2/0/0
1 2 1 2 3 English This course focuses on the characterisation of the mechanical and dynamical behaviour of bulk solid materials. Bulk solid materials include coal, sand, limestone etc. These materials can be free flowing through bunkers and chutes as well as stored in silos, handled by stackers and reclaimers or transported by conveyors. Experimental ways to determine the mechanical properties of bulk solid materials will be discussed. An experimental assignment to determine these properties of a particular bulk solid material is part of the course in the first period. With the experimentally determined properties the behaviour of this material in a silo (no flow or mass flow versus funnel flow) will be predicted. Knowing the properties of a specific bulk solid material, the effect of these properties on the design of handling or transporting equipment can be determined. This includes also the influence from and on the environment of bulk handling systems. Conceptually designing a piece of equipment for storing, handling or transporting a bulk solid material, of which the mechanical properties are determined experimentally earlier in this course, is also part of this course. The student will be able to General 1.Recognize the different functions of bulk materials handling Material characterization 2.Describe and explain the fundamental difference between a fluid and particulate material. 3.Experimentally determine the mechanical properties of a particular bulk solid material (Characterize particulate material (their physical properties)) 4.Relate the material properties to each other and perform calculations (distributions) Behavior of material 5.Perform sheartest measurements 6.Assess the quality of a mixture 7.Explain the different principles behind mixing, segregation, homogenization, blending (and to recognize the situations in cases/practices) Equipment (3 types: silo, belt conveyor, size reduction equipment) 8.Explain the design procedure, incl requirements and choices for the design of equipment 8a Explain the design procedure, incl requirements and choices for the design of a silo 9.Design equipment on headlines 9a Design a silo (use the sheartest results) 10.Describe the physical working principles of different types of the equipment 11.Describe the advantages/disadvantages of the equipment 12.Determine the equipment that is suitable for a given situation 13.Calculate the appropriate parameters of equipment required for performance in a given situation 14.Describe typical/characteristic/maximum values for equipment (belt speed, width, max angles, etc.) Interaction Material and Equipment 15.Recognize and motivate weak points in a given BMH configuration and solve them by proposing solutions. Lectures, laboratory assignment (in pairs), Company visit Use of data acquisition equipment and database software. 1. Book: Introduction to Particle Technology by Martin Rhodes, John Wiley & Sons, ISBN 978-0-470-01427-1, 2008. Online ISBN: 9780470727102, DOI: 10.1002/9780470727102 http://www3.interscience.wiley.com/cgi-bin/bookhome/117932420?CRETRY=1&SRETRY=0 2. Papers and NEN standard provided during the lecture series on Blackboard. 3. Slides 4. Other interesting and recommended book: Powders and Bulk Solids by Dietmar Schulze, ISBN 978-3-540-73767-4, 2008 Online ISBN: 978-3-540-73768-1, DOI: 10.1007/978-3-540-73768-1 http://www.springerlink.com/content/l55416/?p=fbeb6748815f4e4c92f56519a15f8837&pi=0 (Both of the books are available online (access only from university network)) 1. report of experimental assignment (25% of the mark) 2. written examination (75% of the mark) The final mark can be obtained only if the grade for each of the parts equals 6 or higher. calculator 20% Conceptual design of various bulk material handling equipment. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Assessment
Permitted Materials during Tests Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 135 of 186
WB3420-03
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Course Contents
Introduction Transport Engineering and Logistics

Prof.dr.ir. G. Lodewijks Prof.ir. J.C. Rijsenbrij 4/0/0/0
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English wb3410, wb3421, wb3422 Transport in society: importance of transport systems and logistics; design requirements (energy consumption; directives from authorities; working conditions). Networks, terminals and equipment: terminal types; handling activities and logistics; terminal design. Conceptual design of transport systems and equipment. Process analysis; key performance indicators; systems approach and object oriented design; integrated cost approach. Production and distribution: logistic networks and concepts; push systems and pull systems; logistic chains; terminals, warehouses; physical distribution. Queueing theory: overview of basic models and results. Routing and scheduling: standard models; algorithms; branch and bound method. Forecasting and decision making: process control and forecasting; models for decision making. Modelling and simulation: worldviews in discrete event simulation; stochastic processes; design, planning and control with simulation; distributed simulation; case study. Load units and equipment: unitized cargo handling; standardisation in manufacturing, transport and logistics; overview of widely used systems. Mechanisation and automation: trends in mechanised transport; design demands; drivers for automation; design topics. Case studies on transport systems. The student must be able to: 1.Recognize importance of transport systems and logistics in society, in particular in supply chains and in production systems. 2.List restrictions and options in design and optimisation of transport and logistic systems (energy consumption; legislative rules (environmental, labour); technical restrictions; working conditions). 3.List characteristics of networks, terminals, warehouses and equipment (transport modes, terminal types,material handling and logistics). 4.List characteristics of commonly applied principles in production organisation. 5.List load units and equipment used in material handling and list characteristics of widely used systems. 6.Identify trends in mechanisation and automation in material handling. 7.Identify and define key performance indicators (KPI) of transport and logistic systems. 8.List methods to analyse components of systems (i.e. queuing theory, simulation, forecasting, routing, scheduling) and apply the methods to small scale problems. 9.Analyse processes at a transfer point (terminal, warehouse) and to decide on number of equipment and handling capacity needed to handle transport flows. Lectures (2 hours per week) Course material: Lecture notes. Handouts. Written exam 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Page 136 of 186
WB3421-04
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents
Automation and Control of Transport and Production Systems

Dr.ir. H.P.M. Veeke Prof.dr.ir. G. Lodewijks 0/0/2/2
Study Goals
3 4 3 Different, to be announced English This course focuses on the automation and control of modern transport and production systems. Automation is often necessary to increase the capacity or to reduce operating costs of industrial systems on one hand while maintaining a sufficient level of operational accuracy on the other hand. Automation requires full control of an industrial system and its equipment and a throughout understanding of the transport/manufacturing process and the dynamics of the equipment involved. In this course the automation of a number of typical systems will be studied and the dificulties and opportunities of new technologies. Basis of this course is a study of the dynamics of the operational process and the equipment. In an automated system data communication is important to ensure reliable performance. In this respect equipment and process monitoring is important as well. Therefore data acquisition, mining, analysis and transfer will be discussed in detail. The course is concluded by a practical assignment where the control of equipment used in an automated system will be studied. (1) To categorise industrial systems and identify properties that determine their performance; (2) to describe mathematically the transport process and the behaviour of equipment; (3) to determine the requirements to automate an industrial system in terms of control algorithms and equipment involved; (4) to experience the difference between automation in concept and automation in practice. Lectures (2 hours per week), practical assignment Uses of data acquisition equipment and database software Course material: Lecture book References from literature: To be determined Oral exam Access to the oral examination only after completion of the practical assignment. Not applicable 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
WB3422-03
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Ir. W. van den Bos 0/0/2/2
Design of Transport Equipment
3 4 3 none English wb3420-03 Application of design methodology to a specific case of conceptual design (functional analysis, morphological matrix, multicriteria analysis). Calculations of mechanical power for typical motion (cycle with start, stationary motion, stop), like in driving, hoisting, rolling and belt transport. Selection of driving motor and transmission. Soft start and controlled braking. Overview of typical equipment like cranes, stackers. Working cycle, working area, displacement functions (drive, slew, extend). Cable loop systems: examples and typical aspects like mechanical efficiency, wear and safety. Crane components like grabs and spreaders: typical aspects like open/close motions, force analysis, position accuracy. Application of kinematics and dynamics in transport equipment: transfer of non-uniform motion, degree of freedom, instantaneous center of rotation, kinematic transfer functions, transfer quality (pressure angle), force analysis using virtual work principle. Timed motion with start-stop behaviour. Static balancing regarding support forces and driving force. Dynamic effects like slip and rest vibration after a stop or a collision. Demonstration of tools for motion and force analysis. Dimensioning of the whole structure using standards (load combination, group factor). Machine directives (CE-marking) and tender documents. Dimensioning of typical large stuctures such as lattices. Examples of welded connections. Demonstration of analysis tools for stress, deformation, fatigue. To obtain general insight in designing transport equipment, both in its fundamental (conceptual) aspects and in the characteristic construction details, aiming to early estimate the technical feasibility of transport equipment. Lectures, designing in groups Course material: written papers, to be collected in a map (under construction), available on blackboard References from literature: Verschoof, J.: Cranes Written report and final discussion of this report To participate in the project, that is the basis for the assessment, it is strongly recommended to be present during the lecture hours. 100% Participants work in groups to make a (conceptual) design of a case, that will be introduced in the first lecture hour. The teachers use the case as much as possible to make the theory clear. At the end of the course the groups present and defend their concept in the lecture room. A report containing design calculations and offering tender documents has to be submitted as well. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content
Department
Page 137 of 186
WB3423-04
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. H.P.M. Veeke 2/0/0/0
The Delft Systems Approach
1 1 1 2 English Complete modeling of industrial systems includes both function models for static structures and time-dependent behaviour models. A fundamental approach leads to the proper model, the steady state model and the control paradigm. For multi-aspect modelling the PROPER model will be explained and applied to the field of logistics and organization. Modelling of the design process itself with a clear distinction between interdisciplinary function design and monodisciplinary process design.
Study Goals
The course aims to learn the students the basics of the Delft Systems Approach for Industrial Organizations (DSA). Therefore the student should learn to: - Structure complex industrial systems into the conceptual models: Steady State Model, Innovation Model, Proper Model - Describe all types of activities in terms of functions - Recognize both the operational and the control functionality - Differentiate between operational and innovation management. - Use the models for analysis and design of industrial systems Lectures (2 hours per week) Course material: Book: The Delft Systems Approach: Analysis and Design of Industrial Systems, H. Veeke, J. Ottjes, G. Lodewijks, Springer, 2008 Written exam 50% Understanding the design process itself and the transition of using conceptual models to concrete process models. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
WB3424-08
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr.ir. H.P.M. Veeke Ir. A.J. Valkenberg 0/2/0/0
Production Organisation Principles
Study Goals
2 2 none English This course highlights several topics in the field of operations management like Lean Manufacturing, Maintenance, Marketing, Shift work etc. Guest lecturers are invited, who have experience in their subject. The course aims to learn the students to: - Explain the characteristics of different production organization structures - Explain the connections between organization structure and decision support systems. - Explain the difficulties of trends in the management world - Differentiate between different types of information Guest Lectures Course material: Lecture notes + reader (see blackboard) Recommended: - Ray Wild, "Operations Management", Continuum, London, ISBN 0 8264 4927 1 Essay 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Page 138 of 186
WB3425-04
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Study Goals Dr.ir. H.P.M. Veeke Ir. A.J. Valkenberg 0/0/2/2
Production Engineering Practical
3 4 3 none Dutch (on request English) Production Engineering and Logistics systems approach and participating in masterclass "Delft Systems Approach for Industrial Organization" Design of real industrial system The production Engineering practical aims to learn the PEL-students to: - Participate and cooperate in a complex design project - experience multidisciplinary decision making - split complex problems in smaller domain-specific problems - contribute to the result by means of a specific specialization - prove the technological and logistical feasibility - present ideas and results completely but short Practical with project teams design methodology plenary presentation + final report PEL master students only 100% (Re)design of a real industrial system based on global management requirements and a formulated policy 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Enrolment / Application Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 139 of 186
WB4300B
Fundamentals of Fluid Machinery

Dr.ir. C.A. Infante Ferreira Prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen 0/0/0/2 4 4 4 5 English Pump types. General definitions for pumps. Characteristics. Net positive suction head. Cavitation. Thermodynamic definitions. Centrifugal pumps. Characteristics. Unstable operation. Self-priming centrifugal pumps. Parallel en series operation of pumps. Capacity control. Variable speed drive. Positive displacement pumps. Introduction to compressors. Application range. Compressor types. Thermodynamic principles. Theoretical work of compression. Thermodynamic efficiencies. Second law of thermodynamics. Exergy and exergy-loss. Energy and exergy flow diagrams. Multistage compression. Positive displacement compressors. Working principle; characteristics, advantages, disadvantages and application range of the different types. Reciprocating compressors: construction characteristics; compressor cycle; valves; capacity control; gas pulsations. Helical screw compressors: compressor cycle SRM-compressor; built-in volume ratio; capacity control and built-in volume ratio control. Rolling piston compressors. Rotary vane compressors. Scroll compressors. Roots-blowers. Liquid ring compressors.
Study Goals
Turbo-compressors and turbines: axial and radial flow types; working principle; relation between velocity tri-angles and thermodynamic state change; dimensionless performance parameters; performance maps and off-design behaviour; limits of operation; preliminary design procedures. The student is able to understand, reproduce and apply thermodynamic definitions to come to identification and quantification of processes in fluid machinery, to recognize and apply the working principles, specific characteristics and application range of the most relevant pump, compressor and turbine types and to model fluid machinery with simplified models. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.understand, reproduce and apply the thermodynamic definitions in relation to pumps 2.recognize and apply pump characteristics including their net positive suction head behavior, parallel and series operation and capacity control 3.understand, reproduce and apply the thermodynamic definitions in relation to compressors including first and second law analysis and multi-stage operation 4.identify thermodynamic losses that take place in compressors and to explain how these losses are affected by the selected design 5.explain the working principles of positive displacement and dynamic compressors 6.describe the basic construction of the different positive displacement compressor types (including piston, helical screw, rolling piston, rotary vane, scroll, roots-blowers and liquid ring compressors) and their operation limits and capacity control capability 7.model, in a simplified way, the processes taking place in reciprocating compressors taking piston displacement and (automatic) valve behavior into account 8.quantify the effect of the built-in volume ratio on performance for the relevant compressor types 9.recognize and apply characteristics of turbo machinery including their operation limits and capacity control Lectures Course material: Lecture notes (Blackboard) O'Neill, P. A., "Industrial compressors", Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd, Oxford, 1993. References from literature: Bos, G. A., "Stromingsmachines", Stenfert Kroese Uitgevers, Leiden, 1992. Ferguson, T.B., "The centrifugal compressor stage", Butterworth, London, 1963. Frenkel, M.I., "Kolbenverdichter", VEB Verlag Technik, Berlin, 1969. Rinder, L., "Schraubenverdichter", Springer, Wien, 1979. Written exam 80% This course provides the students with engineering knowledge to size pumps and compressors as a part of a system. For reciprocating compressors a simplified design model is discussed. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 140 of 186
WB4302
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr. P.V. Aravind 4/0/0/0
Energy Conversion
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English st310, wb4422, wb4410, wb4412, wb4419, wb4420 wb4100, wb1224, wb3560 Short recapitulation of the fundamentals of engineering thermodynamics: first law, energy balance of closed and open systems, second law, entropy and irreversibility. Specific thermodynamic properties of fluids: properties of water and steam, properties of ideal gas. Extended definition of exergy and environment. Chemical exergy. Exergy of fuels. Exergy efficiencies. Value diagrams. Application for heat exchanging equipment and combustion processes. Exergy losses of basic processes: fuel conversion, heat transfer, turbines, compressors. Exergy analysis and optimisation of conventional power stations (boiler/steam cycle): boiler: air preheating, steam conditions, feedwater temperature; steam cycle: selection of working fluid, friction losses in boilers, losses in condensor and piping, feedwater pump, extraction feed water heating. Gas turbine processes, losses and optimization: closed cycle GT process: pressure ratio, turbine inlet temperature, cycle configuration (intercooling, recuperation, reheat); open cycle GT process: cycle configuration, value diagram; combined cycle systems: exergy losses HRSG, multiple pressure steam cycles, supplementary firing; Combined heat and power production (CHP): thermodynamic principle of CHP, evaluation criteria, applications, power to heat matrix. Fuel cells: calculation of reversible power and reversible cell voltage, effect of irreversibilities on cell performance, Nernst equation and some characteristics of SPFC (PEMFC), MCFC and SOFC, exergy losses in fuel cell systems. Refrigeration cycles and heat pumps: properties of working fluids, processes with mixtures, absorption processes, water/lithium bromide systems, ammonia/water systems. The student is able to evaluate the thermodynamic performance of various conversion processes and systems by applying the exergy concept and to identify ways to reduce overall exergy losses of frequently applied processes and systems. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.determine the exergy values, including chemical exergy, of fluid mixtures and fuels 2.determine exergy losses and exergy efficiencies of basic processes like fuel conversion (combustion, gasification, reforming), heat transfer, expansion turbines and compression and to present exergy losses in property diagrams and value diagrams 3.determine fluid properties of pure components as well as binary fluids from property diagrams and to present the processes and cycles in property diagrams of the considered fluids 4.identify thermodynamic losses (exergy losses) of processes that take place in the main equipment of conventional power plants, like boiler, piping, steam turbine, condenser, feedwater heaters and pumps and to explain how these losses are affected by the selected steam parameters and alternative system configurations 5.identify the thermodynamic losses (exergy losses) of gas turbine cycles (open cycles and closed cycles) and to explain how these losses are affected by the selected design parameters (turbine inlet temperature and pressure ratio) and alternative system configurations (intercooling, recuperation and reheat) 6.explain how combined cycle plants can reduce overall exergy losses in comparison with conventional power plants and gas turbine cycles and to show the effects of multiple pressure steam generation and supplementary firing 7.explain how and under what circumstances combined heat and power generation (CHP) can reduce overall exergy losses in comparison with separate generation of heat and power by applying value diagrams and power to heat matrices 8.describe the processes that occur in various types of fuel cells under development and to determine the power that can be obtained from a reversible fuel cell and indicate the losses that will occur in fuel cell systems 9.describe the processes that occur in absorption refrigeration and heat pump systems (water/lithium bromide systems, ammonia/water systems) and to show (in the property diagrams of the respective binary fluids) the effect of various measures for improving system performance Lectures (4 hours per week) Course material: Thermodynamica voor energiesystemen. J.J.C. van Lier, N. Woudstra. (Delft University Press, ISBN 90-407-2037-1) Absorption chillers and heat pumps. K.E. Herold, R. Radermacher, S.A. Klein. (CRC Press, ISBN 0-8493-9427-9) References from literature: Thermodynamik. Eine Einfhrung in die Grundlagen und ihre technische Anwendungen. Baehr, H.D.. ISBN 3-540-089632 Thermodynamik. Grundlagen und technische Anwendungen. Einstoffsysteme. Stephan, K., Mayinger, F.. ISBN 3-54015751-4 Technische Thermodynamik. Mehrstoffsysteme und chemische Reaktionen. Schmidt, E.. ISBN 3-540-07978-5 Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics. Moran, M.J., Shapiro, H.N.. John Wiley & Sons, ISBN 0 471 97960 0 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics. Smith, J.M., Van Ness, H.C., Abbott, M.M.. ISBN 0-07-118957-2 Combined-Cycle Gas & Steam Turbine Power Plants. Kehlhofer, R..ISBN 0-88173-076-9 Written exam 50% design and optimization of system components and system lay-out 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 141 of 186
WB4400-03
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Course Contents 0/0/0/0
World of Process & Energy Technologies

Dr.ir. C.A. Infante Ferreira
Study Goals
2 2 2 3 English MSc ME SPET courses of semester 1A To collect and use information about various research projects to come to a comparison of research topics based on self developed criteria and to develop a plan for a MSc final project. The ongoing research projects of the Department Process and Energy are presented in oral and poster presentations. Information on related PhD projects, which are carried out at other Dutch universities, must be obtained via internet. The information must be used to write a plan for a MSc final project. The project plan should include objectives, tasks, deliverables, time planning and references to background material. The student is able to collect and use information about various research projects to come to a comparison of research topics based on self developed criteria and to develop a plan for an MSc final project. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.reproduce the scope of research fields presented by research staff members 2.develop rough criteria for an initial selection of appealing research topics 3.analyse these scientific research areas by having discussions with relevant staff members 4.develop and defend a simplified project plan for a MSc final project 5.formulate and defend detailed criteria for a final selection of a research topic Oral and poster presentations Search information on Internet material on Blackboard and poster presentations Report Compulsory for all Sustainable Processes and Energy Technology students. 3mE Department Process & Energy
WB4402
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr. H.L.M. Bakker 0/0/2/2
Project Engineering
Study Goals
3 4 3 Different, to be announced English Project management: contracts, project controls, procurement, construction management, contractual risk management, cost estimating and project data management. Project engineering: process engineering, controls and operations, safety, reliability, environmental engineering, mechanical engineering and electrical engineering. Parallel with the lectures, a design assignment is performed by the course participants and a visit to a construction site or a plant is organised. The student is able to apply fundamental knowledge in a practical design, to collaborate in a project team and to manage a project. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.apply project engineering fundamentals (process engineering, controls and operations, safety, reliability, environmental engineering, mechanical engineering and electrical engineering) in a design assignment 2.apply project management fundamentals (contracts, project controls, procurement, construction management, contractual risk management, cost estimating and project data management) in a design assignment Lectures, design assignment Computer aided drawing software. Hand-out of sheets working out and discussion of design-assignment. 100% Design of small process installation eq. a heat-power cycle, a large steam-line, a test facility for Diesel engines. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 142 of 186
WB4403
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Parts H.J.M. Kramer Z. Olujic 0/0/4/0
Advanced Reaction & Separation Systems
3 3 Exam by appointment English wb4435 Equipment for heat transfer wb4436 Equipment for mass transfer The course consists of two parts: Part one is focussed on the design of equipment for destillation, absorption, desorption/stripping and extraction. Part two concerns crystallisation and mechanical separation methods. For both parts an assignment is given to the students. Basic principles and design methods for equipment used in equilibrium stage separation processes, such as distillation, absorption, stripping (desorption), extraction and crystallization, and in mechanical separation processes, such as sedimentation, filtration, etc. The student must be able to: 1.design, with help of basic principles and design methods, equipment used in equilibrium stage separation processes(such as distillation, absorption, stripping (desorption), extraction and crystallization) 2.design, with help of basic principles and design methods, equipment used in mechanical separation processes, such as sedimentation, filtration, etc. Lectures (4 hours per week) Computer aided solving the process equipment design assignments. Course material: J.D. Seader and E.J. Henley, Separation Process Principles, J. Willey & Sons, 2006. References from literature: Sinnott (Coulson, Richardson; Chemical Engineering, vol.6) An Introduction to Chemical Engineering Design. Realising and defending two (design) assignments. Assessment date by appointment 75% A fully design oriented approach. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Course Contents
Study Goals
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 143 of 186
WB4405
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. W. de Jong 4/0/0/0
Fuel Conversion
1 1 1 2 English wb4422 wb1220, wb1321 A wide variety of solid and gaseous, mostly fossil, fuels form the basis of our current energy supply. This course deals with understanding the fundamentals of the underlying thermo-chemical conversion (combustion, gasification) processes of these fuels. Combustion calculations for determining the amounts of air and fuel needed, the (adiabatic, stoichiometric) flame temperature and the extent of the reaction limited by thermodynamic equilibrium are dealt with at first. Moreover, aspects of mass transfer during the combustion process are treated subsequently, which gives insight into the combustion of fuel droplets. Then the kinetics of the reaction and combustion mechanisms for diverse gaseous fuels are studied, like e.g. hydrogen. Of course in industrial practice these reactions proceed in advanced combustion equipment; in order to be able to predict the burnout of fuels and e.g. NOx emissions, simple reactor models for these combustors are dealt with. Renewable fuels and processes for a sustainable future power and heat generation are dealt with in the topic solid fuel conversion. The emission constraints for these special fuels are treated here. The unique feature of the course from this year on is that a cooperation with an Algerian university in Batna is established in such a way that via videoconferencing tools -backed up with "collegerama"- lectures are given by teachers of both universities. As the final assessment, a major assignment is handed out to be worked out in small groups (2-4 students) composed of students cooperating together internationally. During the final lecture short presentations will be given by the groups on the assignment. The communication will be facilitated by webbased tools. The assignment deals with a renewable biomass/waste based energy conversion system for which combustion calculations and dimensioning is to be performed. The system should be dimensioned in the context of small-scale decentralized energy supply in the Batna area. The student is able to define energy producing systems and components based on the thermal conversion of a broad range of fuels, to discern the major problems related to them and to perform idealised chemical reactor and sub-system calculations related to fuel and product gas constituents. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.to classify fuels according to their elemental composition, origin, production method, phase and applications 2.to set up reaction equations for a wide range of energy production related fuel conversion processes and perform balance calculations on mass, molar and volumetric basis 3.perform basic ideal gas phase chemical reaction equilibrium calculations to calculate product compositions and extents of reactions 4.describe reaction kinetic expressions concerning atomic, molecular and radical species and apply them in order to solve problems related to the primary conversion of fuels and the formation of emission components 5.demonstrate basic knowledge of mass and heat transfer phenomena applied to the chemical conversion of both liquid and solid fuels 6.derive equations for idealised model reactors (well-stirred reactor and plug flow reactor concepts) and apply these reactor concepts to solve engineering problems related to the thermal conversion of fuels 7.explain the concept of the laminar flame and to calculate its characteristic parameters, like laminar flame speed, flame length and thickness 8.describe the technology of fluidised bed reactors and perform calculations of the basic design parameters for such reactors, like the minimum fluidisation velocity, terminal velocity, superficial gas velocity and transport disengagement height 9.define and justify the selection of appropriate analysis and characterization techniques for a given thermal conversion system of a wide range of fuels Lectures needed for major assignment Course material: An Introduction to Combustion - concepts and applications, second edition Stephen R. Turns, McGraw-Hill International editions, ISBN 0-07-235044-X (book bound with disk) Handouts (available on blackboard) References from literature: Coal : typology, physics, chemistry, constitution / by D. W. van Krevelen. - 3., completely rev. ed.. - Amsterdam : Elsevier, 1993. - XXI, 979 S. : Ill., graph. Darst.; (engl.) ISBN 0-444-89586-8 An Introduction to Combustion, 2nd edition by Stephen R. Turns Small group assignment, cooperation Batna - Delft Sign up for the course via blackboard 50% Construction aspects of burners/reactors for biomass/waste fuels with application in furnaces and boilers. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Study Goals
Books Assessment Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content Department
Page 144 of 186
WB4408A
Responsible Instructor Practical Coordinator Assistent Assistent Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents
Diesel Engines A
Prof.ir. D. Stapersma R.H. van Till Nabestaanden van H.T. Grimmelius R.H. van Till 0/0/4/0
Study Goals
Education Method
Computer Use
Assessment Enrolment / Application Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content Department
3 3 3 Dutch English Basic understanding of engineering thermodynamics, flow mechanics and heat transfer. PERFORMANCE Introduction: Engine types and construction, historical overview and present applications. Performance parameters: fuel economy, power density and emissions, basic principles and main paramaters of modern diesel engines. Sizing of main dimensions and database of engines. Thermodynamic analysis of cylinder process, including explanation of generalised polytropic process. Performance analysis of diesel engines: important trends made clear by using a realistic Seiliger process and reasonable estimation of mechanical and heat losses. TURBOCHARGING Introduction: mechanical charging versus exhaust driven turbocharger, constant pressure versus pulse system, turbocharging explained in P-V and T-S diagram. Gas exchange: mechanisms of air supply and air swallow capacity of 2- and 4-stroke engines, mechanisms of gas disposal, i.e. blow down, exhaust and scavenging. Principles of interaction between the turbocharger and the engine: power balance of turbocharger and flow balance between engine and turbine, energy in the exhaust gas, off-design performance of a turbocharged diesel engine. Trends in turbocharging: waste gate, Variable Turbine Geometry (VTG), sequential turbocharging, two-stage turbocharging. Modelling: classification of diesel engine simulation models, physical balances, blockdiagram of engine + turbocharger. The student must be able to: 1. Recognise the technical and economical importance of the diesel engine relative to other energy generating installations. 2. Explain the complexity and interdependency of the main performance parameters of a diesel engine and be able to calculate these parameters in several problem settings. 3. Formulate the limitations when determining the main dimensions of a diesel engine and be able to calculate these dimensions in several problem settings. 4. Analyse the thermodynamic processes in the diesel engine, both in the cylinder and in the turbocharger and be able to calculate the thermodynamical process data and resulting engine performance. 5. Discuss the importance of main performance parameters as well as trends and limitations from the perspective of the user 6. Explain the principles of a turbocharger as an example of direct waste heat usage to increase the power density of the engine. 7. Explain the gas exchange mechanisms and be able to contrast the differences between the 2- and 4-stroke diesel engine. 8. Explain the complex interaction between engine and turbocharger at part load and be able to calculate part load performance with a simplified method. 9. Discuss the importance, trends and limitations of turbocharging from the perspective of the user. 10. Apply the knowledge gained during the course in a practical laboratory test. The student prepares the lecture by reading chapters and preparing (preferably challenging) questions. During the lectures these questions are discussed as well as questions raised by the tutor. The lecturing is focussed on subjects that are agreed to need further explanation. Limited: the course is woven around a computer aided cycle analysis program of the cylinder process and a mean value first principle simulation model of the diesel engine. The course also provides a basis for doing advanced simulations. The assignments can be solved either by hand or with the help of a computer. DIESEL ENGINES, a fundamental approach to performance analysis, turbocharging, combustion, emissions and heat transfer D. Stapersma, Netherlands Defence Academy/TUDelft, 2009 Volume 1: Performance analysis and turbocharging Volume 2: Turbocharging Volume 5: Appendix: thermodynamic principles I 1. Written exam. 2. After attending the lectures a practical laboratory test plus a report concludes the course. Two week prior to start of lectures through blackboard. During absence of prof D. Stapersma questions relating to the subject matter can be answered by Dr H.T. Grimmelius. The laboratory test is tutored by Ing. R. van Till who can also answer practical questions. 25% Limited: assessment of the design parameters governing the performance of the engine. No extensive treatment of constructional details of the engine. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Page 145 of 186
WB4408B
Responsible Instructor Assistent Assistent Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents
Diesel Engines B
Prof.ir. D. Stapersma Nabestaanden van H.T. Grimmelius R.H. van Till 0/0/0/4 4 4 4 English Basic understanding of engineering thermodynamics, flow mechanics and heat transfer FUELS Refining process, chemical structure of hydrocarbons, types and designation of fuel products, availability. Fuel properties: composition (C/H ratio, S-content), density, viscosity, combustion value, ignition performance (CCAI). Fuel (pre)treatment and separation. COMBUSTION Stoichiometric number, mol and mass balance of combustion process, analysis of exhaust gas composition, practical determination of air excess ratio from emission measurements Properties of substances and mixtures: series expansion for specific heat, intenral energy, enthalpy and entropy. Thermodynamics of combustion: precise definition of heat of combustion Chemics and physics: atomizing, ignition (conditions, delay), explosion diagram, flame shape, thermal theory (Arrhenius), reaction mechanisms, chain reactions, premixed and diffusive combustion. Heat release: Determination of of Net and Gross Apparent Heat Release as well as Combustion Reaction Rate by reversed simulation algorithm, practical measurement (incl. assessment of Top Dead Centre), maximum pressure and temperature as a result of heat release. Modelling of heat release by single and double Vibe model, basic principle of single zone cylinder process simulation. HEAT TRANSFER Mean values of heat transfer between gas and wall: summation over time and location. Heat transfer mechanisms: conduction, convection, gas radiation and flame radiation, order of magnitude of the different contributions. Heat transfer coefficients: empirical methods (Nusselt, Eichelberg), methods based on dimension analysis (Sitkei, Annand, Woschni). Gas velocities in the cylinder: swirl, squish. Dynamics of heat transfer: theory of instationary heat transfer in the cylinder wall: stepchange, sinusoidal and periodical input. Estimation of temperature amplitude in the wall. EMISSIONS Overview: types of emission: gaseous (CO2, CO, HC, SOX, NOX) and particles (PM). Requirements: units and methods of conversion, measurement techniques and equipment. Fomation: chemics, i.e. reactions, equilibrium and kinetics Hazards: health and environmental. Methods of reduction: 1. Choice of fuel. 2. Primary methods (engine optimalisation): injection(timing/pressure/rate/shape), air humidity, air inlet temperature, compression ratio, air excess ratio, variable turbine geometry (VTG). 3. More drastic primary methods (engine modifications): fuel/water emulsion, water injection, exhaust gas recirculation (EGR). 4. Secundary methods (end of pipe solutions): selective cathalytic reduction (SCR). Legislation: stationary installations, road traffic and shipping. The student must be able to: 1. Recognise the global problem of fossil fuels availability and the undesirable effects of combustion for the environment i.e. pollutant emissions into the air. 2. Explain the chemical and physical aspects of combustion in a diesel engine. 3. Explain the methods to determine the heat release in a diesel engine and differentiate between levels of heat release (net, gross, reaction rate). 4. Explain the principles used for simulation of the cylinder process in the diesel engine, in particular the modelling of the heat release.. 5. Calculate exhaust gas composition and calculate emissions into units as required by legislation. 6. Describe aspects of the emission problem, i.e. types of emissions, formation, hazards, methods of reducing emissions and legislation. 7. Explain the relation between the cyclic nature of heat transfer and spatial an temporal mean values. 8. Describe mechanisms of heat transfer and apply these to the diesel engine. 9. Explain the differential equations describing the dynamic heat transfer in the wall. Explain the solutions for step, sinusoidal and periodical input from the gas temperature. Estimate the amplitude of the wall temperature at several depths. The student prepares the lecture by reading chapters and preparing (preferably challenging) questions. During the lectures these questions are discussed as well as quations raised by the tutor. The lecturing is focussed on subjects that are agreed to need further explanation Indirect: examples are given of the complex data processing by computer when measuring heat release and emissions. Also the basic algorithm of modern single zone crank angle based simulation program codes are given DIESEL ENGINES, a fundamental approach to performance analysis, turbocharging, combustion, emissions and heat transfer. D. Stapersma, Royal Netherlands Naval College, 2003 Volume 3: Fuels, Combustion and Emissions Volume 4: Heat Transfer Volume 6: appendix: Thermodynamical principles II Written exam 25% Limited: assessment of the design parameters for the combustion process and the heat loss in the diesel engine. 3mE Department Maritime & Transport Technology
Study Goals
Education Method
Page 146 of 186
WB4410A
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. C.A. Infante Ferreira 4/0/0/0
Refrigeration
Study Goals
1 1 1 2 English wb4427 wb4100, wb1224 Introduction. Historical notes. Ozone and global warming implications. The Montreal Protocol. Leaktightness requirements. STEK-provisions. ODP, GWP and TEWI. The working field of refrigeration. Overview of the most important refrigeration systems: Mechanical vapour compression refrigerating machines, vapour absorption refrigerating machines, gas cycle refrigerating machines, thermo-electric cooling. Comparison of these systems. Selection criteria. Mechanical vapour compression-refrigerating machines. Carnot cycle. Theoretical and actual refrigeration cycles and differences among themselves. The pressure-enthalpy diagram. Entropy production in the components of the refrigeration cycle. Relationship between entropy production and COP. Effect of operating conditions: evaporating temperature, condensing temperature, liquid subcooling, suction vapour superheat and liquid-vapour recuperative heat exchanger. Two-stage operation. Reasons for application. Choice of intermediate pressure. Layout of two-stage systems. Cascade systems. Highlights of components: evaporator, compressor, condenser and expansion devices. Selection criteria. Working fluids. Refrigerants for mechanical vapour compression refrigerating machines: limits of application. Effect of pressure, latent heat of evaporation, safety, price, water, oil, air and high temperature. Media for vapour absorption refrigerating machines: refrigerants and absorbents. Criteria. Media for gas cycle refrigerating machines. Medium for thermo-electric cooling. Secondary coolants. Control. Basic elements of control. Control loops in refrigeration systems. Working principle of correcting unit: on-off, multi-step and continuous control action. Economic evaluation. Model design of refrigerating systems. Physical model. Mathematical model. Model design of correcting unit. SIMULINK model. Control loops for components: compressor, condensor, expansion device, evaporator. Sensors and controllers. Gas cycle refrigerating machines. Gas-phase cycles: Carnot cycle, Brayton cycle, Stirling cycle and Ackeret-Keller cycle. Cycles ending in the liquid-phase: Linde cycle and Claude cycle. Highlights of the components. Thermo-electric cooling. Vortex-tube. Vortex-wheel. Vapour absorption refrigerating machines. COP. Enthalpy-concentration diagram. theoretical cycle. Actual cycle. Effect of liquid-liquid heat exchanger in the solution circuit, absorption, rectification, evaporation, external heat exchanging, pressure drop and non-condensables. Intermittent operation. Multistage operation and resorption. Highlights of components. The student is able to understand, reproduce and apply thermodynamic concepts in relation to refrigeration machines taking into account their economic and environmental impact, to recognize and apply the working principles, specific characteristics and application range of the most relevant methods to generate refrigeration and to evaluate the impact of the alternative part-load concepts for refrigerating machines. More specifically, the student must able to: 1.describe the position and role of Refrigeration in society and economy and its environmental impact 2.recognize the different methods to generate refrigeration effect and the most important properties of these methods 3.reproduce and apply thermodynamic concepts in relation to mechanical vapor compression machines taking operating conditions and irreversibilities into account and including first and second law analysis, two-stage, cascade and indirect operation 4.reproduce and apply thermodynamic concepts in relation to vapor absorption machines taking operating conditions and irreversibilities into account and including first law analysis, multi-stage, resorption and intermittent operation 5.reproduce and apply thermodynamic concepts in relation to machines based in gas cycles including the Carnot, Joule-Brayton, Stirling and Ackeret-Keller cycles and cycles that end in the liquid phase as the Linde and Claude cycles 6.reproduce thermodynamic concepts in relation to thermo-electric, compression-resorption, adsorption, magnetic, thermo acoustic and metal hydride machines 7.reproduce the selection criteria for the main components of mechanical vapor compression machines and their main characteristics 8.reproduce and apply selection criteria for working fluids for the different refrigeration systems including volumetric heat capacity, safety and environmental impact 9.describe the working principles of the various part-load control methods for refrigerating machines including on-off, speed, cylinder unloading, suction line and hot-gas bypass control 10.model the processes taking place in vapor compression machines with the purpose of investigating the performance of alternative part-load control methods Lectures Model design of refrigerating systems with SIMULINK. Dincer, I., "Refrigeration systems and applications", Wiley, Chichester, 2003. Written exam 50% About 50% of this course deals with discussion of the design methods for the different systems. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 147 of 186
WB4416
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Prof.dr.ir. A.H.M. Verkooijen 0/0/4/0
Nuclear Engineering
Study Goals
3 3 3 4 English Introduction to nuclear power. Introduction nuclear physics, reactor kinetics and reactor control. Description of the various reactor types and future trends. Reactor safety and safety analysis. Reactor cooling during normal operation and accidents. Reactor materials. Radioactive isotopes, radiation and health effects Three Miles Island and Chernobyl accidents Economics of nuclear power. The student is able to describe the characteristic differences between a conventional and a nuclear power plant, to explain the consequences for the design and operation of these differences and to develop an independent judgment about advantages and disadvantages of the generation of nuclear electricity and thus contribute to the public debate. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.describe the history of the development of nuclear science and engineering 2.make an elementary calculation of the marginal and total costs of nuclear electricity 3.describe the basic properties of radioactive isotopes and radioactive decay and to make calculations. Describe the effects of ionizing radiation on health 4.describe the basics of neutron physics and of reactor kinetics 5.describe the physical processes that allow control of a nuclear reactor and to calculate the reactivity of reactors and the different feedback mechanisms 6.describe the different systems that are necessary to safely convert thermal energy from nuclear reactions into electricity and to calculate the system for energy removal for normal and accident situations 7.describe the various reactor types now operational 8.describe and quantify factors that influence the spent fuel produced 9.explain the improvements that future designs must bring 10.list factors for reactor safety and quantify the most important ones for a simple safety analysis 11.list materials used in nuclear reactors and the specific requirements they must meet 12.describe the accidents at Three Miles Island and Chernobyl and explain their cause and effects Lectures Pc Simulators of a PWR and a BWR will be supplied to students. Load change and loss of coolant accident will be analyzed on a system level. Course material: R.A. Knief, Nuclear Engineering References from literature: Same, ISBN 1-56032-089-3 Written exam 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 148 of 186
WB4420
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Exam Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Ir. W.P.J. Visser Prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen Ir. M.L. Verbist 2/2/0/0
Gas Turbines
Study Goals
1 2 1 2 3 English WB4421 WB1224, WB4304 The course is given according to the diktaat GASTURBINES. Introduction. Historic development. Gas Turbine industry. Areas of application and comparison of stationary gas turbine and aircraft engine performance. The ideal cycle and the effect of compressor pressure ratio, inlet pressure ratio and turbine-entry temperature on power and efficiency. Real cycle: deviations of the ideal cycle and variants on the standard cycle. Gas turbines for shaft power: single and multiple shaft configurations, calculation of efficiency, combined-cycles en variants on the standard cycle. Gas turbines for thrust: aero engines, thrust calculation, turbojet, turboshaft and turbofan engines. Combustion chambers: fuel, vaporising, combustion process, emissions. New concepts for low emissions and combustor hardware design. Turbo machinery: axial en radial compressors, axial en radial turbines. Energy transfer, velocity tri-angles and degree of reaction, mechanical design, blade cooling. Gas turbine characteristics: component characteristics, stall, surge and choking. Characteristics of the gas generator, in combination with a jet pipe or a power turbine. Examples of performance calculations. The student is able to describe the fundamental aspects of the working principle of gas turbines. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.reproduce and apply thermodynamic principles of gas turbines 2.describe different gas turbine cycles 3.describe the influence of different losses on the performance (power and efficiency) of gas turbines 4.synthesize different gas turbine cycles with respect to their application 5.describe the aerodynamic working principles of gas turbine components as compressors and turbines 6.describe the principles of combustion as applied in gas turbines with respect to functionality and emissions 7.describe the part load characteristics of gas turbines and its relation to the functional characteristics of gas turbine components 8.describe specific mechanical design aspects of gas turbines 9.list materials and their properties of materials to be selected for gas turbine components Lectures, laboratory project (3-4 hours) Course material: Prof. Ir. J. P. van Buijtenen; Ir. W.P.J. Visser, "Gas Turbines, WB4420 / 4421" various hand-outs during the course. (See also list of applicable chapters of Gas Turbine Theory, to be issued during the English courses) References from literature: Cohen, H., Rogers, G.F.C., Saravannamuttoo, H.I.H., Gas Turbine Theory, 4th ed., Longman, London, 1996. ISBN 0-582-23632 -0 Written exam Exam: no books allowed, formula sheet will be made available. Laboratory project(s): Demonstration of a small twin-shaft gas turbine: starting up and steady state operation, instrumentation and analysis of measured data. Demonstration of the aerodynamic behaviour of a small three-stage axial compressor. Duration 3-4 hours. No report. Attendance required. 25% The course includes design aspects of the thermodynamic process. Some aerodynamic design aspects are covered; mechanical design aspects are only given in a descriptive way. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Assessment Remarks
Page 149 of 186
WB4421
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Instructor Exam Coordinator Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents
Gas Turbine Simulation/Application

Ir. W.P.J. Visser Prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen Ir. M.L. Verbist Ir. M.L. Verbist 0/0/2/2
Study Goals
3 4 3 Different, to be announced English wb1224, wb4304, wb4420 (wb) of wb4280 (lr) The course consists of two parts: one part is about off-design behaviour of gas turbines (with simulation-practicum with GSP) and a part application. Part 1: Performance characteristics of gas turbine components, procedures and computer programs for the calculation of the static and dynamic part load behaviour of gas turbines, the effect of ambient conditions on performance. Operating envelope, flow phenomena in compressors: stall, surge, choking. Performance monitoring: trend analysis, the use of parameter estimation techniques in case only limited data are available. Part 2: In part 2 the student is expected to carry out an assignment with GSP, consisting of the analysis and the generation of solutions for a practical example of the behaviour of a gas turbine under deviating operational conditions, as component wear, a different fuel , application of water- of steam injection. A report has to be written, and discussed with the lecturers. A grade will be determined during the evaluation. The student is able to compute gas turbine performance under varying operational conditions. More specifically,the student must be able to: 1.describe the part load characteristics of gas turbines and its relation to the functional characteristics of gas turbine components 2.calculate gas turbine performance with modern computational tools (i.e. GSP, Gas Turbine Simulation Program) 3.analyse gas turbine performance under different operational conditions such as ambient conditions and power setting 4.analyse gas turbine performance under different hard ware conditions, i.e. after wear, erosion, corrosion of critical gas turbine parts and components 5.analyse gas turbine performance as a function of installation design Lectures Simulation code GSP (Gas turbine Simulation Program) Course material: Prof. Ir. J. P. van Buijtenen; Ir. W.P.J. Visser, "Gas Turbines, WB4420 / 4421" Lecture slides available from blackboard References from literature: RTO TECHNICAL REPORT 44 "Performance Prediction and Simulation of Gas Turbine Engine Operation" RTO-TR-044 (available from blackboard) Cohen, H., Rogers, G.F.C., Saravannamuttoo, H.I.H., Gas Turbine Theory, 4th ed., Longman, London, 1996. ISBN 0-582-23632 -0 Individual assignment Practicum: Simulation practicum with GSP (Gas turbine Simulation Program) 25% Design aspects of the gas turbine in relation to the behaviour of the gas turbine and its applications. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Assessment Remarks
Page 150 of 186
WB4422
Thermal Power Plants

Prof.dr.ir. A.H.M. Verkooijen
3 3 3 4 English wbo201-1 (Process scheme calculation) BSc The objective of the lecture Thermal Power Engineering is develop a thorough understanding of technical options to produce heat and electricity in centralized and decentralized power plants. Boundary conditions which are taken into account are sustainability, environmental impact and economical competitiveness. Possibilities to contribute to the development of highly efficient, environmentally friendly and integrated processes for the production and utilization of heat, power and secondary fuels like hydrogen will be discussed. The lecture comprises: 1. Introduction: current developments, requirements, thermodynamics 2. Scheme of a steam power plant and a combined cycle 3. Combustion: fundamentals, combustion systems, emissions and emission control 4. Steam generation: fundamentals, boilers, design of a steam generator 5. Steam turbine 6. Cooling system and feed water preparation 7. Possibilities for efficiency improvement and future developments 8. Gas turbines and combined cycles for natural gas 9. Combined cycles for solid fuels (Integrated gasification combined cycle, Pressurized fluidized bed combustion, Pressurized pulverized coal combustion, Externally fired combined cycle) 10. Alternative concepts: fuel cells, MHD, CO2 sequestration 11. Possibilities for Biomass conversion The student is able to understand the technical options to produce heat and electricity in centralized and decentralized power plants. Boundary conditions which have to be taken into account like sustainability, environmental impact and economical competitiveness. Possibilities to contribute to the development of highly efficient, environmentally friendly and integrated processes for the production and utilization of heat, power and secondary fuels like hydrogen. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.describe current developments in the energy situation and trends, requirements for energy conversion systems, and the thermodynamic basics 2.design a scheme of a steam power plant, a combined cycle power plant and a combined heat and power plant and to calculate efficiency and basic process parameters 3.describe the combustion process: its fundamentals, the design characteristics of different combustion systems for different fuels, and to calculate emissions and design systems emission control 4.explain the construction of steam generation equipment: fundamentals that determine the design of boilers, and to calculate the main dimensions of a steam generator 5.describe the functioning of a steam turbine, and to calculate the power developed from steam properties 6.list the different parts of a energy conversion systems, describe their role, construction and operation, and to calculate the main dimensions for cooling system and feed water preparation 7.use thermodynamic knowledge to identify possibilities for efficiency improvement and to be aware of future developments and the bottle necks to be overcome 8.describe the basic properties of gas turbines and combined cycles for natural gas, and to design these systems 9.describe the system for combined cycles using solid fuels (Integrated gasification combined cycle, Pressurized fluidized bed combustion, Pressurized pulverized coal combustion, Externally fired combined cycle), the different components of the systems and their specific properties 10.describe the basics of alternative concepts: fuel cells, MHD and their impact on future energy systems 11.list the different options for CO2 capture and sequestration Lectures, Excursion to Industrial plant with large energy consumption In the Process scheme calculation following on this course, the computer programm Cycle Tempo will be used to make the thermodynamic calculations. Course material: Copies of the sheets on the internet For some chapters a manuscript is available References from literature: Strau, K.: Kraftwerkstechnik zur Nutzung fossiler, regenerativer und nuklearer Energiequellen. Springer-Verlag, Berlin, 1998. ISBN 3-540-64750-3 Black&Vatch: Drbal, L-F., Boston, P-G: Power Plant Engineering. New York, Chapman & Hall, 1996. ISBN 0-412-06401 -4 Stultz, S.C., Kitto, J.B.: Steam, its generation and use.Babcock Wilcox, Barberton, Ohio, USA, 1992. ISBN 0-9634570-04 Elliot, T.C., Chen, K., Swanekamp, R.C.: Standard Handbook of powerplant engineering. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1997. ISBN 0-07-019435-1 Dolezal, R. Dampferzeugung, Springer Verlag, ISBN 3-540-13771-8 of ISBN 0-387-13771-8. Written test 1st hour: closed book on theoretical questions 2-3rd hour: open book on problem calculations Linked to (and follow up of) Thermal Power Plants is the calculation of a power plant cycle with the programme CYCLE TEMPO The participation in the lecture and exercise is strongly recommended for the examination. Laboratory project(s): The Process Scheme calculation after the course has to be completed in about 200 hours. The design of thermal power plants consisting of several kinds of components like: turbines, pumps, condensors, steam boilers, reheaters, preheaters that are connected by pipes and for which thermodynamic optimization is very important. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Study Goals
Assessment
Remarks
Page 151 of 186
WB4425-09TU
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr. P.V. Aravind 0/3/0/0
Fuel Cell Systems
2 2 2 English wb4100, wb1224, wb4304, wb4302 Electrochemical power production, open circuit voltage and reversible voltage, the Nernst equation, the effect of pressure and gas concentration, actual fuel cell voltage and efficiency, fuel and oxidant utilization. Fuel cell irreversibilities, activation losses, tafel equation, fuel crossover and internal currents, ohmic losses, concentration losses, optimum current density. Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells (PEMFC): electrolyte materials and structure, electrode materials and structure, gas channels and separator plates, water management, cell cooling and air supply, considerations with regard to system design (fuel and air conditions at cell inlet), construction of stacks. High temperature fuel cells, internal reforming, fuel utilization, bottoming cycles, the use of exergy and pinch technology. Molten Carbonate Fuel Cell (MCFC): molten carbonate electrolyte materials and structure, electrodes materials and structure, gas supply and separator plates, stack configuration, direct and indirect internal reforming, cell and stack performance, Carbon Dioxide recirculation, system layout. Solid Oxide Fuel Cell (SOFC): electrolyte materials, electrode materials and structure, cell configuration and design (flat plate and tubular configuration), stack design, internal reforming and prereforming, cell and stack performance, system design options. Fuel processing: desulphurisation, steam reforming, partial oxidation, autothermal reforming, carbon formation, high temperature and low temperature shift, CO removal, combustion of residual fuel, gasification and gas cleaning, heat integration. The student is able to describe the processes taking place in fuel cells and fuel cell systems and explain the effects of various design options on the performance of fuel cell systems (PEMFC, MCFC and SOFC systems). More specifically, the student must be able to: 1. describe the main processes taking place in the various types of fuel cells as well as the layout of various fuel cells and fuel cell stacks 2. explain the various parameters used to indicate the performance of fuel cells and fuel cell systems 3. dtermine the cell voltage of a reversible hydrogen fuel cell and explain the effect of the main irreversibility's on the performance of an irreversible fuel cell 4. dscribe the specific processes and effects that are determining the performance of Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells (PEMFC), to describe the components and usually applied materials of the cell and the design of a PEMFC stack 5. describe the components and usually applied materials of Molten Carbonate Fuel Cells (MCFC) and MCFC stacks and systems, and to indicate the effect of various design options on system performance 6. describe the components and usually applied materials of Solid Oxide Fuel Cells (SOFC) and SOFC stacks and systems and to indicate the effect of various design options on system performance 7. list and describe the various processes for the conversion of fossil fuels into hydrogen for low temperature as well as high temperature fuel cell systems and to explain how various design options for the balance of plant will affect the performance of fuel cell systems lectures/(Self study option together with oral examination is permitted on special request throughout the year except for the lecture period) Course material: Fuel Cell Systems Explained. James Larminie, Andrew Dicks, John Wiley & Sons, LTD, 1999, ISBN 0-471-49026-1 Course slides References from literature: Fuel Cell Handbook, Department of Energy, EG&G Services Parsons Inc. Fuel Cell Systems, Edited by L.J.M.J. Blomen and M.N. Mugerwa, Plenum Press, ISBN 0-306-44158-6 Electrochemical Reactors, Their Science and Technology, Part A. Edited by M.I. Ismail. Elsevier, ISBN 0-444-87139-X\ Written/oral exam design and optimization of fuel cell stacks and system lay-out. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Study Goals
Page 152 of 186
WB4426
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr. L.C.M. Itard 4/0/0/0
Indoor Climate Control Fundamentals
1 1 Different, to be announced English BSc. - Overview of indoor climate technology and historical developments - Overview of energy generation systems for indoor climate - Thermodynamic properties of humid air and the way changes of air condition can be realised and demonstrated in the Mollier diagram. Different processes of air handling are explained by this diagram. - Thermal comfort of human beings is made clear by mathematical models based on heat and mass balances. Regions of comfortable values of indoor temperature, radiant temperature, air speed and humidity are given. The fuzzy aspect of comfort is made clear. - Physical properties of weather variables having an effect on the indoor climate are discussed. Hourly weather show a stocastic behaviour. It is made clear how these data can be used to define the capacity and energy use of climate installations. - Thermal behaviour of buildings and the way it can be simulated by heat balances. It is discussed how such a simulation can be set up. An example of a simple standard room is given. Based on this example the student should make a dynamic simulation of another room and make a sensitivity analyses. Such as: what is the impact of the size of a window on the capacity of the installation and its energy consumption. The simulation can be carried out by Matlab, Simulink or Excel. - Systems used in practice are shown. Pro and contras are given. Attention is given to design the duct for transporting the make up air from the central air handling installation to the various room units. Methods to predict the air flow patterns in a room are given very briefly. - Throughout the course exercises are given to training the student. One assignment should be made and defended at the oral exam, e.g: - Simulation of the dynamic thermal behaviour of an office room in order to define the cooling and heating capacities and the energy use or - Design of the ventilation system of a small office building using a solar chimney. Problems encountered by the students in making these assignments will be discussed at regular moments during the course. The student is able to apply the fundamentals of indoor climate control in order to sustainable design indoor climate installations. More specifically, the student must able to: 1.derive the mathematical equations describing the thermal performance of the various components 2.combine these equations in order to simulate the whole system consisting of the weather, building and installation 3.use this tool to answer questions about the design, such as capacities, energy use, comfort, etc. 4.determine the change of air conditions by the various components of an air handing installation applying the knowledge obtained about the thermodynamic aspects of humid air 5.translate the fuzzy term "comfort" into design requirements that can be checked afterwards by measurable variables and to describe the limitations of this technical approach learning the theory about the thermal sensation of human bodies 6.calculate the heating and cooling capacity of a confined space by means of simple hand calculation and by simulation, where the simulation is based on statistical properties of the weather variables, thermal response of the building on weather, people and machines and its ability to accumulate heat 7.present the pro and contras of indoor climate systems used in practice, as well as more sustainable alternatives including an indication of their economics 9.make optimal designs of simple systems based on simulation Lectures, assignments and excursion Excel, MAtlab, Simulink Course material: Indoor Climate A (wb4426) Calculation of heating, cooling load and temperature exceeding. References from literature: Papers mentioned in course material. Oral exam, based on an assignment (siumlation + report) Exam by appointment 75% A case study: a design for a specific building is discussed. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Study Goals
Page 153 of 186
WB4427
Refrigeration Technology and Applications

Study Goals
3 4 3 Exam by appointment English First assignment wb4100, wb1224, wb4300B, wb4302, wb4410A Compressors: function, types and models, thermodynamics, pistoncompressors, screwcompressors, other rotating compressors, centrifugal compressors, simulation models, selection criteria. Condensers: function, types and models, heat transfer (general), heat transfer with condensation of pure gas, condensation in presence of other gases, special types of surfaces, heat transfer at the cooling water side, air cooled condensers, plate-fin condensers, economical optimization. Expansion devices: function, types and models, dynamics of the thermostatic expansion valve, models, selection criteria. Evaporators: function, types and models, heat transfer, aircoolers, combined heat- and mass transfer at the air-side of the aircooler, heat transfer between two-phase flow of refrigerant and internal evaporator surface. Absorption chillers and heat pumps: function, types and models, physical transport phenomena in liquid films, heat and mass transfer in a liquid film. Total compression refrigeration system: introduction, graphical methods, analytical methods, connection of models, dynamic behaviour. Managing frozen foods: safety in the cold chain, freezing and storing of frozen foods products. The student is able to understand, reproduce and apply heat and mass transfer models in relation to the components used in refrigeration systems and selection criteria for expansion devices and compressors, to analyze and model an industrial refrigeration process including the application, and to design the main components of industrial refrigeration systems taking recent technological developments into account. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.model an industrial refrigeration process including the application (e.g. freezing of food products) 2.analyze the application process in terms of throughput en specific requirements and convert this information into refrigeration plant requirements 3.optimize the refrigeration plant taking relevant aspects into account including system lay-out, refrigerant, energetic performance and environmental impact 4.understand, reproduce and apply heat and mass transfer models in relation to the components used in refrigeration systems (e.g. condensers, evaporators, secondary fluid heat exchangers, absorbers and generators) 5.understand, reproduce and apply selection criteria for expansion devices and compressors including thermodynamic performance associated with type and part-load behavior 6.design the main components of the system taking recent technological developments, relevant heat (and mass) transfer phenomena and component interaction into account 7.evaluate the differences between the main industrial refrigeration plant alternatives (based on vapor compression or vapor absorption) Lectures Herold, K.E. et al. "Absorption chillers and heat pumps", CRC Press Inc., New York, 1996 C.J. Kennedy, Managing frozen foods, CRC Press Inc., New York, 2000. Exercises + oral exam 80% Roughly 80% of this course is dedicated to the discussion of sizing methods for the various components. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 154 of 186
WB4429-03
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Course Contents Dr.ir. W. de Jong 0/4/0/0
Thermodynamics for Process & Energy
Study Goals
2 2 Exam by appointment English wb1224, wb4304 Equations of state, estimation of thermodynamic properties, mixtures, chemical potential, fugacity, activity, chemical exergy, phase- and chemical equilibria. Calculation of heat capacity and enthalpy and Gibbs energy of reaction data. Use of equations of state necessary for the calculation of thermodynamic quantities. Estimation of thermodynamic data, using e.g. the corresponding states principle and group contribution methods. Non-ideal behaviour of pure substances and mixtures whereby properties of the chemical potential, the fugacity and the activity will be considered. The notion of exergy as used for chemical conversions. Application to physical processes, such as separations and chemical reactions, like combustion/gasification. The student is able to solve chemico-physical process problems in the area of phase and chemical equilibria for both pure components and mixtures under ideal and non-ideal process conditions. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.formulate "equations of state" (EOS), describe their physical background and to select them appropriately for given process conditions (pure components) 2.estimate thermodynamic data from the "corresponding states principle" and "chemical group contribution" methods (pure components) 3.calculate (physical) phase equilibrium behaviour for vapor-liquid and liquid-liquid systems of multi-component ideal mixtures 4.calculate (physical) phase equilibrium behaviour for vapor-liquid and liquid-liquid systems of multi-component non-ideal mixtures 5.recognize the important role partial molar properties play in mixture phase equilibrium calculations, and to perform these type of calculations 6.calculate the extents of chemical reaction equilibria and resulting mixture compositions in ideal and non-ideal mixture gas and vapour-liquid systems 7.calculate heat effects occurring in chemical equilibrium reactions Lectures Problems are given to students to determine non-ideal mixture behaviour; the use of the computer (excel, matlab etc.) is indispensable. Course material: J.M.Smith & H.C. Van Ness, Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics, 7th ed, McGraw-Hill Book Company References from literature: R.C.Reed, J.M.Prausnitz and B.E.Poling, The properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th ed, McGraw-Hill Book Company, ISBN 0-07 -51799-1 Oral examination based on the problems By solving 7 problems during the lecture period, which are handed out at the end of the first lecture week, 70% of the grade can be obtained; the oral exam on the theory and the problems solved counts for 30%. The book of Smith&Van Ness must be used throughout the course. 35% Design of process parameters necessary for simulation of extractors, distillation columns, boilers, fuel cells, chemical reactors etc. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Assessment Remarks
Page 155 of 186
WB4431-05
Responsible Instructor Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Parts
Modeling of Process and Energy Systems

Dipl.ing. C. Trapp Dr.ir. P. Colonna Dipl.ing. C. Trapp 0/0/4/0
Summary
Course Contents
3 3 Different, to be announced English Part 01Introduction Part 02Conservation Laws Part 03Modeling Paradigms Part 04Numerical Methods and Software / 1st Midterm Exam Part 05Software We Use (hands-on) Part 06Fluid Properties, Heat Transfer, Fluid Dynamics, Chemical Reactions Part 07Validation and Model Analysis, Examples Part 08Modeling Example/ 2nd Midterm Exam Physical modeling of energy systems and processes, Simulation, Steady-state, Off-design, Dynamics, Laws of conservation, Lumped parameters models, Distributed parameters models, Causality, Energy conversion systems, Processes, Thermodynamics, Heat Transfer, Fluid Dynamics, Ordinary Differential Equations, Numerical Methods and Analysis, Modularity, Process Components, Power plant, Cogeneration, Trigeneration, Fluid Properties, Simulation Software, Model validation. This is a basic course on the modeling of energy conversion systems and processes based on physical equations. The focus is on lumped parameters models, but notions on distributed parameters models are included. Concepts from thermodynamics, fluid dynamics and heat transfer are merged with new aspects that are typical of system modeling, so that the student learns how to develop and implement model equations. The applicative part includes simple exercises on the development of models of unit operations (e.g. evaporator, reactor,...) and on their implementation using Matlab/Simulink (steady state and dynamic). Program: Introduction: The role of models in Process Systems Engineering, Examples of processes, modeling paradigms, applications, tools, method. Process representation, definition of on-design and off-design steady state models, dynamic models and their applications to design, operation and control. Conservation equations: intensive, extensive, lumped parameters and distributed parameters, steady state and dynamic, examples. Constitutive equations: review of fluid properties, heat transfer, fluid dynamics, chemical reactions..., Numerical methods: review of theoretical aspects and numerical solution techniques for non-linear algebraic systems and differential-algebraic systems of equations. Lumped parameters modeling: Modeling approaches, Modularity and Hierarchy, Model representation, connections and inter -module variables, "open loop" modeling, Well posedness and Index problem in DAEs, Bilateral coupling and causality, Connecting rules and example of model decomposition. Model validation: steady state validation, qualitative dynamic validation, quantitative dynamic validation. Examples: to choose from: boiler, condenser, compressor, turbine, reactor, combustion chamber, fuel cell, electric generator, ... After learning the content of the course the student will have the following capabilities: 1.Describe the role of models in Process and Energy Systems Engineering, and describe examples of systems, processes, modeling paradigms, applications, software tools, methods. 2.Represent a process with process flow diagrams, and define and use on-design and off design steady state models, "open loop" dynamic models and their applications to design, operation and control. 3.Present various forms of conservation equations: intensive, extensive, lumped parameters and distributed parameters, steady state and dynamic, and to make examples. The student is able to apply the basic principle of accounting for conserved variables and to write conservation balances that occur in typical energy and chemical processes. 4.List the main characteristics and choose among different models of fluid properties, heat transfer correlations, fluid dynamic correlations and chemical reactions model in order to appropriately select the constitutive equations that close the lumped parameter modeling problem. 5.List the main characteristics and choose among various numerical techniques for the solution of non-linear algebraic systems of equations, differential algebraic systems of equations, partial differential systems of equations, which are the mathematical problems that have to be solved when simulating a process. 6.List the various modeling approaches and describe the concept of modularity, hierarchy, connections and inter-module variables that are necessary to correctly setup a complex model. The student is also able to apply these concepts to develop a model. 7.Present the fundamentals of the Index of differential-algebraic systems of equations. The student is able to detect index>1 problems for simple cases, can describe the bilateral coupling concept and is able to apply it in order to obtain index = 1 problems. 8.Apply (based on the previous concepts) connecting rules to sub models and to formulate model decompositions. 9.Describe the basics of distributed parameters modeling, their development. Te student is able to describe examples, related boundary conditions and the use of lumped parameters model to represent distributed parameters models. 10.Apply the method to develop a model to obtain the steady state and dynamic model of a process component, to implement it in a computer code and to simulate a transient and validate the results. Lecture The computer is used to develop dynamic models of plant components and to run simulations for the purpose of validating and Page 156 of 186
Study Goals
Course Relations
analyzing the response of the system. Due to licenses availability on campus, Mathworks Matlab/Simulink is employed. Follow up courses: wb4433-05 Conceptual Process Design and Optimization wb4432-05 Process Dynamics and Control ME2320-9 Process Modeling and Simulation Project
Course material: Printouts from lecture slides K. Hangos, I. Cameron, Process Modelling and Model Analysis, Academic Press, 2001 MMS, Modular Modeling System v.5.1, Reference Manual, and Basics, Framatome Technologies, 1998. O.H. Bosgra, wb2311 Introduction to modeling, Lecture notes, 2002, Delft University of Technology. (Matlab) Simulink R2006b , on-line help, The Mathworks inc. A.W. Ordys, A.W. Pike, M.A. Johnson, R.M. Katebi and M.J. Grimble, Modeling and Simulation of Power Generation Plants, Springer Verlag, London, 1994. P. Moin, Fundamentals of Engineering Numerical Analysis, Cambridge University Press, 2001. List of scientific articles is made available to students
Prerequisites
O.D.E., numerical methods: wi2051wb Differential Eqns. Principles of programming: e.g. IN2049wbmt Programming in Visual Basic (stopped in 2006) or in2050wbmt Programming in Delphi Thermodynamics: wb4100 Thermodynamics 1, wb1224 Thermodynamics 2 Heat and Mass Transfer: wb3550 Heat and Mass Transfer Thermodynamics of Processes and Systems: wb4302 Tmd. Eval. of Proc. and Sys. Fluid Properties: wb4429-03 Tmd of Mixtures Process/System Components: wb4435-05 Equipment for heat transfer, wb4436-05 Equipment for mass transfer A sufficient performance in the written test (6) covering the content of the lectures is a prerequisite for obtaining the modeling exercise. There are to routes to pass the exam: 1. Nominal route: 2 midterm exams + modeling exercise 2. Alternative route: written exam (3 times per year) + modeling exercise The model documentation and Simulink files must be submitted via Blackboard (Projects->File Exchange). The final course grade is given 4 times per year, after a short discussion based on the modeling exercise. Efforts are made so that the exercise is graded as soon as possible, after it has been handed in. If the exercise is evaluated less than 4, the revised exercise cannot be submitted for the subsequent examination date. Please enroll using the Blackboard. Note: enroll only once, the first time you attend lectures. Students attending lectures in successive years should not enroll multiple times. Modeling and simulation of components typical of energy conversion systems or chemical plants, like boilers, evaporators, condensers, turbines, compressors, distillation columns, etc. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Assessment
Enrolment / Application Design Content Department
Page 157 of 186
WB4432-05
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Ir. A.E.M. Huesman 0/0/4/0
Process Dynamics and Control
Course Language Course Contents
3 3 3 4 Exam by appointment English Introduction Overview of the process and energy industry Design versus operation, batch and continuous operation Objectives of process control Modeling System boundary, conservation laws and constitutive equations Degrees of freedom (DOFs) Examples; stirred tank (reactor), furnace, distillation column Differential and algebraic equations (DAEs) Simulation of DAEs Analysis Common sources for nonlinearity and linearization State space format Laplace transformation and analysis; poles, zeros, stability Common process transfer functions Model approximation Interaction; concept Control Instrumentation; sensors, actuators, control systems and Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) Feedback and feedforward Control in the Laplace domain PID control; tuning and practical aspects (scaling, tamed D-action) Internal Model Control (IMC) and direct synthesis Extensions; ratio, feedforward, cascade, override, split-range Interaction; pairing (RGA) and decoupling Plantwide control; production rate control, quality control and recycles Batch control; Sequential Function Charts (SFCs) Optimization; Model Predictive Control (MPC), Real Time Optimization (RTO) and Scheduling and Planning (S&P) The student is able to apply the control theory which is relevant for the dynamic modeling and simulation of chemical and energy conversion processes. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1. Have a general understanding of process operation. 2. Be able to analyze the dynamics of a process. 3. Be able to design a control system for a process. Lectures During the lectures and the assignment Matlab will be used. Course material: Lecture notes Standard text book see below (not obligatory) References from literature: Process Dynamics and Control, Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp. Assignment The final mark will be based on the assignment and the discussion of the assignment. 3mE Department Delft Center for Systems and Control
Study Goals
Assessment Special Information Remarks Department
Page 158 of 186
WB4433-05
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Course Contents 0/0/0/4
Conceptual Process Design and Optimization

Prof.dr.ir. A.I. Stankiewicz
4 4 4 5 English Project 'Process Modeling and Simulation' This course provides the fundamentals for conceptually designing processes of energy/chemical plants, where basic operations (reactions, separations) are modelled and process topologies are derived along with their appropriate mass- and enthalpybalances. The conceptual process design involves a rough-sizing of basic equipment. The course brings also the up-to-date information on Process Intensification fundamentals, equipment and processing methods providing the key element of sustainable chemical manufacturing. During the course the students get a hands-on experience by developing concepts of an inherently safe, sustainable chemical process (case study assignment). The course serves as a preparation for the project-work (Process Modeling and Simulation). The course includes the following elements: 1. Intro; Scope; Designing a sustainable chemical plant; 2. Presentation of case-study assignments 3. Unit operations, equipment modeling and design: Reactors 4. Unit operations, equipment modeling and design: Separators 5. Hierarchical approach to CPD 6. Simulation and optimisation 7. Flow-sheet design using Aspen 8. Tutorial /Case study 6. Fundamentals of Process Intensification; 7. Intensified equipment and operations: Reaction, Mixing and Heat Exchange 8. Intensified equipment and operations: Integrated devices and operations 9. Modeling and design of intensified systems The student is able to conceptually design and optimize chemical or energy related processes. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1. Model and design non-ideal reactors 2. Model and design advanced separation equipment 3. List the steps in hierarchical approach to process design 4. Describe state-of-the-art PI technologies 5. Design a safe, sustainable chemical processing plant Lecture One of the lectures is a computer exercise given in a PC-room demonstrating the use of process simulation software An extension of the course contents and its application to a real process takes place in a subsequent project 'Process Modeling and Simulation' Course material: A set of slides or course-notes supplement the lectures References from literature: various
Study Goals
wb4429-03, wb4435-05, wb4436-05, wb4431-05 Written exam and presentation of case-study assignments. 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 159 of 186
WB4435-05
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Summary H.J.M. Kramer 4/0/0/0
Equipment for Heat Transfer
1 1 1 2 English wb4433-05, Process modelling and simulation Heat transfer by conduction, convection ,radiation, condensation and boiling. principles and application of heat integration, exergy analysis and pinch technology design procedure for heat transfer equipment. Shell and tube heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers, condensors, funaces, and boilers Calculation of heat transfer by conduction, convection and radiation in process equipment; estimation of heat transfer by condensation and boiling, calculation of overall heat transfer coefficients using heat transfer resistances in series and by applying the film theory. Principles of heat integration, exergy analysis and pinch tecnoklogy. Principles and characteristics of heat transfer equipment, such as Shell & tube heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers, double pipe HEX, finned tube HEX, air cooled HEX, furnaces, condensers and (re-)boilers; Design procedures for S&T HEX, Condensers, (re)boilers, plate HEX application of pinch tecnology for the design of heat exchanger networks. The student is able to select and make the hydraulic and heat technically design of heat transfer equipment. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.describe energy transfer by conduction, convection and radiation in process equipment; can estimate the heat transfer by condensation and boiling, can calculate overall heat transfer coefficients using the concept of heat transfer resistance in series and the film theory; Can describe the principles of heat integration, exergy analysis and pinch technology 2.describe functions and characteristics of heat transfer equipment such as Shell & tube heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers, double pipe HEX, finned tube HEX, air cooled HEX, furnaces, condensers and (re-)boilers 3.list design procedures for S&T HEX, Condensers, (re)boilers, plate HEX 4.apply principles for the selection and design of heat transfer equipment 5.apply pinch technology for the design of a heat exchanger network Lecture Course material: 1: J.M. Coulson, J.F. Richardson, Sinnott; Chemical Engineering Vol. 6, Ch. 7, Ch. 12 2: course sheets References from literature: G.F. Hewitt, Heat exchanger design Handbook
Course Contents
Study Goals
Prerequisites Assessment Permitted Materials during Tests Percentage of Design Design Content Department
wb1321 Heat and mass transfer written exam Course book and course handouts 60 Hydraulic and heat technical design of equiment of heat transfer 3mE Department Process & Energy
Page 160 of 186
WB4436-05
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary H.J.M. Kramer Prof.dr. G.J. Witkamp 0/4/0/0
Equipment for Mass Transfer
Course Contents
Study Goals
2 2 2 3 English Underlying theory and basic concepts: equilibrium thermodynamics, mass transfer by convection and difusion, film theory, separation process, single equilibrium stages, cascades of equilibrium stages, absorption, stripping, distillation, crystallisation and membrane separation. Principles of design of separation processes and equipment. Thermodynamics of separation processes, convective mass transfer, mass transfer by diffusion, film theory. Single equilibrium stages and cascades. Examples of separation processes. Basic principles and design methods for equipment used in equilibrium stage separation processes, such as distillation, absorption, stripping (desorption), extraction, crystallization and mechanical separation processes, such as sedimentation, filtration and membrane separations The student is able to describe theory, equipment and design principles for physical separation processes. More specifically, the student must be able to: 1.describe thermodynamics of separation processes, convective mass transfer, mass transfer by diffusion, film theory 2.describe single equilibrium stages and cascades 3.present examples of separation processes 4.describe principles and design methods for equipment used in equilibrium stage separation processes, such as distillation, absorption, stripping (desorption), extraction, crystallization and mechanical separation processes, such as sedimentation, filtration and membrane separations Lecture Simulation of performance of distillation trays wb4433-05, wb4403 Course material: Handouts with lecture notes, J.D. Seader, E.J. Henley, Separation Process Principles, J. Willey & Sons, 2006. References from literature: J.M. Coulson, J.F. Richardson, Sinnott; Chemical Engineering Vol. 6, Ch. 7,11 Two design assignments to be completed (written part) and upon delivery defended (oral part). Assessment by appointment. Basic priciples of dimensioning of equipment used in the above mentionned processes 3mE Department Process & Energy
Education Method Computer Use Course Relations Literature and Study Materials Assessment Design Content Department
Page 161 of 186
WB4438-05
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Summary
Technology and Sustainability

Prof.dr.ir. A.H.M. Verkooijen Prof.dr.ir. B.J. Boersma 0/4/0/0
Course Contents
2 2 2 3 English This course gives a thorough introduction in the world of energy, the technologies to use energy and the effects on sustainability of our society. The course wants to show the importance of energy in our society and especially the interdependencies between energy and worldwide developments in our society, economy and requirements towards sustainability and environmental protection. The course covers the worldwide energy supply and consumption, discusses resources of fossil and renewable energies, and describes technologies of fuel exploration and the variety of energy conversion technologies in large, medium and small scale. The course has been completely renewed and presents the world of energy on the basis of fact sheets, figures and tables. The following subjects are treated: Energy in our society: relation between energy, economy, environment and sustainability Illustration of sustainability with examples Fundamentals and definitions of energy economy and conversion: forms of energy, thermodynamics like 1st and 2nd law, exergy, entropy, Carnot cycle, energy balances, Energy supply and consumption in the world and in NL Fossil and renewable energy resources Energy economics: static, dynamic cost calculation, calculation of electricity production costs Exploration and production of fossil fuels: exploration of oil and gas, oil and gas production technologies, surface and underground coal mining Nuclear energy conversion: physical principles of fusion and fison, nuclear power station technologies, safety aspects Heat and power from fossil fuels: combustion and steam generation, coal fired steam power plant, gas turbine and combined cycles, combined cycles for solid fuels, fuel cells, combined heat and power, household heating systems, heat pumps, use of energy in the steel industry Renewable energy technologies: solar thermal, solar power, wind, water, biomass Environmental aspects: targets for CO2 reduction, possibilities for implementation, CO2 reduction and separation technologies, possibilities for disposal of CO2, NOx emissions, SO2 emissions, particulates, hydrocarbons The student is able to understand the interdependencies between energy and worldwide developments in our society, economy and technology requirements towards sustainability and environmental protection are discussed. More specifically, the student must be able to: understand and explain: 1.the role of energy in our society: relation between energy, economy, environment and sustainability 2.fundamentals and definitions of energy economy and conversion: forms of energy, thermodynamics like 1st and 2nd law, exergy, entropy, Carnot cycle, energy balances 3.primary energy supply sources and final consumption in the world and in NL 4.the characteristics of fossil and renewable energy resources 5.energy economics: static, dynamic cost calculation, calculation of electricity production costs 6.exploration and production of fossil fuels: exploration of oil and gas, oil and gas production technologies, surface and underground coal mining 7.nuclear energy conversion technologies: physical principles of fusion and fission, nuclear power station technologies, safety aspects 8.technologies for heat and power production from fossil fuels: combustion and steam generation, coal fired steam power plant, gas turbine and combined cycles, combined cycles for solid fuels, fuel cells, combined heat and power, individual and district household heating systems, heat pumps, use of energy in the steel industry 9.renewable energy technologies: solar thermal, photo voltaic, wind, water, biomass environmental aspects: targets for CO2 reduction, possibilities for implementation, CO2 reduction and separation technologies, possibilities for disposal of CO2, NOx emissions, SO2 emissions, particulates, hydrocarbons Lectures Search of information on the Internet Lecture notes and sheets none Written 3mE Department Process & Energy
Study Goals
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites Assessment Department
Page 162 of 186
WB5400-08
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr.ir. A. van Beek 0/0/2/2
Mechatronic System Design 2
3 4 3 none English wb2454-05 wb3201 In this course you are asked to carry out a small research project related to the mechanical design of precision machines and equipment. Examples are - The preparation of an experimental research project that may include the design of a test rig, setting up a test procedure, making a time schedule and the budgeting of costs. For example, the design of a test rig to measure stick in MEMS devices. - Performing an experimental research project that may include to set up a test with data acquisition (labview), to carry out some experiments and to evaluate the results. For example, testing the limitations of an ultra high speed rotating spindle, testing lubricants or testing materials of slide surfaces and evaluating the results. The student is able to - Apply design principles for high precision test rigs, machines or measuring equipment. - Set up experimental research projects (selecting the experimental method, planning, budgeting) - Set up data acquisition programs (labview). - Perform data analyses (Evaluating measuring data, applied statistics). Personal coaching Labview, Pro Engineer / Solid Works, Comsol Multiphysics Beek, A. van, "Advanced Engineering Design: lifetime performance and reliability", 534 pp., edition 2009, available at Leeghwater References from literature: see references in the course book Written report as a small paper with attachments Topics treated in the course wb3201 are to be applied. 100% 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Page 163 of 186
WB5414-08
Responsible Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr. T. Tomiyama Dr.ir. J.L. Herder 2/2/0/0
Design of Machines and Mechanisms
Study Goals
Education Method
1 2 1 2 English 1. Introduction (Grouping, Assignments) 2. Conceptual Design of Machines (first quarter) - Design Methods - Requirement Analysis - Function Modeling and Function Decomposition - Generating Concepts - Evaluation of Concepts - Selection of Solutions 3. Design of Mechanisms - Diagram of Motion - Diagram of Goal Functions - Available Mechanism Types - Type- and Dimension Synthesis of Mechanisms 4. Presentation of Assignments 5. Industrial Application of Mechanization and Mechanisms (Factory Visit) The student must be able to: 1. describe the conceptual design process for systematic design - perform requirement analysis and build function structure - derive physical phenomena necessary for achieving required function and combine different options to systematically develop different candidate solutions - compare different candidate solutions and choose the best solution 2. describe the basic design process of mechanisms - calculate the performance of various kinds of mechanisms (such as four bar link, cam, gear pairs, etc.) with software packages for mechanisms design - determine the dimensions and other design parameters of a mechanism 3. employ these design methods for a real industrial problem in a teamwork environment - perform the design task at the both conceptual and basic design levels in a team - present their design in drawings or as a CAD model Project: Students will be divided into groups of 4 to 5 students and each group is given its assignment. At every lecture, in principle, first half of lecture hours is used for presenting students homework and the other for instructions. During presentation of homework, students are expected to participate in discussions actively. Use of dedicated PC software. Software programs will become available for downloading from the blackboard. Lecture notes wb5414 (in Dutch available from the blackboard). Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J., Grote, K.-H: Engineering Design, A Systematic Approach (Third Edition), Translated by K. Wallace and L. Blessing, Springer, London, ISBN: 978-1-84628-318-5, (2007). Available from TU Delft Library as an e-book. Other appropriate literature and software programs will be specified during the lectures and uploaded to the Blackboard. Lecture notes wb5414 (in Dutch available from the blackboard). Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J., Grote, K.-H: Engineering Design, A Systematic Approach (Third Edition), Translated by K. Wallace and L. Blessing, Springer, London, ISBN: 978-1-84628-318-5, (2007). Available from TU Delft Library as an e-book. Attendance (compulsory) including a factory visit scheduled at the end of the semester or the beginning of 2A: if you are absent twice, the end of the story. Written reports (intermediate and final). Final presentation (taking place during the exam period). Since this course involves team working, good command of English is required. In particular, foreign students should make sure that their English level is high enough for intensive communication with teachers and other students. While any specific knowledge about machine design is not required, it is desirable that students have some experiences of machine design (such as BSc mechanical engineering design courses and projects). During the course, a real industrial design case will be assigned to a group of students. Attendance is obligatory, including a factory visit planned at the end of the lecture. The project has two parts, conceptual design (largely following the Pahl & Beitz method) and mechanisms design (using various analysis and synthesis software). 100% Design of industrial machinery for discrete production (mechanization). Design aspects: technical and economical demands, conceptual design, finding mechanisms to perform the required motions (synthesis), analysis and evaluation of solutions. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Books
Assessment
Enrolment / Application
Remarks
Page 164 of 186
WB5430-05
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Expected prior knowledge Course Contents Dr. T. Tomiyama 0/4/0/0
Engineering Informatics
2 2 2 English Machine Intelligence (Wb 5435-05) Computer programming courses The aims of this course are twofold. One is to give fundamental knowledge about computer systems including both hardware and software. The other is to give theoretical foundations behind computer-based engineering tools and systems which play an increasingly important role in mechanical engineering. The course comprises of lectures in a classroom and practices in the form of homework. It emphasizes homework (mostly programming) that will be included in the final evaluation. While no preference is given to a particular programming language, basic programming capabilities are needed. Topics: 1. Fundamental Logic and the Definition of Engineering Tasks 2. Fundamentals of Semiconductors and Logic Gates 3. Fundamentals of Computer Architecture 4. Fundamentals of Operating Systems 5. Data Representation and Data Structures 6. Numerical Computation and Computational Errors 7. Computational Complexity 8. Object Representation and Reasoning 9. Databases Concepts 10. Constraint-based Problem Solving 11. Optimization and Search 12. Discrete Event Simulation 13. Geometric Modeling and CAD 14. Industrial Engineering Information Systems (PDM, ERP, SCM, LCM) The student must be able to: 1.describe fundamental principles of computers systems including both hardware and software -illustrate mechanisms for digital computers -explain software architecture and its working principles -illustrate data representation methods and data structure -analyze computational errors and computational complexity 2.describe theoretical foundations of modeling and computing behind computer-based engineering tools -explain such data modeling principles as object oriented representation and programming, relational data model, and entityrelationship data model -explain an appropriate computing algorithm for constraint-based problem solving, optimization, search, and discrete event simulation -explain fundamentals of geometric modeling -illustrate architecture and functionalities of industrial engineering information systems such as PDM (Product Data Modeling), ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning), SCM (Supply Chain Management), and LCM (Life Cycle Modeling) Lectures (4 hours per week) plus regular homework assignments (around ten homeworks, individual work), final-homeworks (three final-homeworks, individual and creative self implementation of the techniques in programming enviroenments). Access to a programming environment (any language of your choice, such as C++, C, Visual Basic, Java, MATLAB, etc.) is necessary. Benny Raphael, Ian F. C. Smith, Fundamentals of Computer Aided Engineering, ISBN: 0-471-48715-5, (2003), Wiley & Sons. Assessment will be based on the three final-homework assignments and regular homework assigments. In order to pass this course, students have to submit all homework assignments as well as the final ones. (If you miss one, you don't pass.) In case a student did not pass in the previous year, he/she needs to re-submit all homework assignments and final ones on time even if questions are the same. There is no automatic carry-over of grades from previous years. Homework assignments (around ten homeworks, individual work), around 30%. Final-homework (three final-homeworks, individual and creative self implementation of the techniques in programming environment), around 70%. The ratio is variable year to year. The students will need on average and approximately ten hours per final-homework and two hours per homework. The finalhomeworks will test the practical and creative capabilities of implementation on computer; the homeworks will test the theoretical knowledge.
Study Goals
Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials Assessment
Remarks Percentage of Design Design Content Department
20% Although the course does not directly aim at "design of software", it will nonetheless include principles of building engineering applications. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Page 165 of 186
WB5431-05
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Course Contents Dr. T. Tomiyama 0/0/0/4
Life Cycle Engineering
4 4 4 English This course deals with fundamentals and technology of life cycle engineering that require a systematic and holistic approaches to product life cycles, rather than just end-of-pipe technologies. First, we will discuss the fundamental concepts of life cycle engineering, in particular, the relationships among environment, design, manufacturing, and economy. Second, we will look at details of life cycle stages including marketing, design, production, logistics, operation (use), maintenance, recovery, reuse, remanufacturing, and recycling. Third, we will discuss the motivation behind life cycle engineering and its philosophy. We will understand that in particular design has a big influence on any other aspect of product life cycle. Fourth, we will particularly highlight maintenance and remanufacturing. Fifth, we will look at design methodologies (Design for Environment) as a technology. Homeworks and excersises are important part of evaluation. Contents 1. Introduction 2. Environment, Design, Manufacturing and Economy 3. Basic Concepts 4. Product Life Cycle Stages 5. Business and Environment LCA, Tools (SCM, Green Purchase, ISO 14000 Series, Benchmarking) 6. DfX (Design for X), DfE (Design for Environment) 7. Maintenance and Self-Maintenance 8. Recycling 9. Remanufacturing and Reuse 10. Life Cycle Simulation and Life Cycle Design 11. Service Engineering and Product-Service Systems 12. Summary The student must be able to: 1.describe fundamental principles and philosophy toward a sustainable society from the viewpoint of manufacturing -explain the relationships among environment, design, manufacturing, and economy -classify and compare various strategies toward a sustainable society -explain various tools related to sustainability, such as LCA, Green Purchase, ISO 14000 series, etc.) 2.identify the motivation and background philosophy of life cycle engineering 3.illustrate details of product life cycle stages, including marketing, design, production, logistics, operation (use), maintenance, recovery, reuse, remanufacturing, and recycling -explain, among other things, the roles of design in a product life cycle -explain, among other things, the roles of maintenance in a product life cycle -explain, among other things, the roles of remanufacturing, reuse, and recycling in a product life cycle 4.explain various methods of Design for Environment through concrete examples Lectures (4 hours per week) including homework assignments (around 5) and a design for environment exercise (group work). Powerpoint presentations. A copy of the presentaiton will be available through the Blackboard. Any other handouts. Recommended Book: T.E. Graedel and B.R. Allenby: Industrial Ecology (2nd Edition), Pearson Education, Inc., New Jearsey (2003), ISBN 0-13-046713-8 (58 at Amazon) Assessment includes three components. 1. Homework (individual, around 20%): Students need to submit all homework assignments on time. If you did not pass in previous years, you still need to re-submit homework assignments. If the question is the same, you can resubmit your old assignments. 2. Design for Environment exercise (group work, around 20%): Students will be given a DfE task and will need to present during the lecture and to submit a mini report. 3. Final exams (individual, around 60%): Written/Oral exams. The ratio is variable year to year. 75% A large portion of the course deals with sustainability issues in design. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Assessment
Page 166 of 186
WB5435-05
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Dr. T. Tomiyama 0/0/4/0
Machine Intelligence
3 3 3 English Computer programming courses Engineering Informatics (Wb5430-05), not a must but recommended This course firstly gives an introduction to computational aspects of intelligent systems, in particular, artificial intelligence, logic, and knowledge based systems. These techniques form symbolic computing techniques for advanced reasoning and embedded intelligence. Secondly, the course discusses some soft computing techniques that have been hinted or inspired by daily languge, biological phenomena or physical phenomena, such as fuzzy logic, genetic algorithm, artificial neural networks, and simulated annealing. Thirdly, the course illustrates some techniques for intelligent systems to deal with real world applications. The course will not only describe the theoretical aspects but also demonstrate the applications of these technique to intelligent systems and engineering. Topics 1. Fundamental Theories and Techniques 1.1. Artificial Intelligence, Pattern Recognition, and Robotics 1.2. Logic 1.3. Knowledge Representation 1.4. Fundamental Reasoning Techniques 1.5. Knowledge Based Systems 2. Soft Computing and Bio-Inspired Computing 2.1. Fuzzy Logic 2.2. Genetic Algorithm 2.3. Simulated Annealing 2.4. Artificial Neural Networks 3. Intelligent Systems 3.1. Model-based Reasoning and Qualitative Physics 3.2. Machine Learning 3.3. Self-Organization and Emergence The student must be able to: 1.describe fundamental logical computing techniques and soft computing techniques -explain principles of logic, knowledge representation techniques, and reasoning algorithms -explain principles of fuzzy logic, genetic algorithm, simulated annealing, and artificial neural networks 2.describe fundamental mechanisms and architecture of reasoning systems and embedded intelligence -explain mechanisms and architecture of knowledge based systems, model-based reasoning systems, machine learning systems -explain mechanisms of self-organization and emergent systems 3.implement intelligent systems using these techniques to deal with real world applications -compare different computing techniques -select an appropriate method for the application, based on the comparison -compose an algorithm for the chosen method -demonstrate the algorithm in some way (not necessarily in the form of programs) Lectures (4 hours per week), homework assignments (around six homeworks, individual and self implementation of the techniques in programming enviroenments). 1) Negnevitsky, Michael (2005), Artificial Intelligence - A Guide to Intelligent Systems, Harlow: Addissson - Wesley, England, 2nd. Edition. [Available in TU Delft Libraray, in the section of "Studioboeken", ISBN: 0-321-20466-2 .] 2) Raphael, B. and Smith, I.F.C., (2003), Fundamentals of Computer Aided Engineering, John Wiley and Sons inc., Corwall, great Britain. [Available in TU Delft Library, ISBN: 0-471-48715-5, is included in the standard VSSD collection. See http://www.vssd.nl/winkel/studieboeken.html for more info. The price is Euro 58,00.] 3) Mitchell, Tom. M. (1997), Machine Learning, McGraw Hill International Editions, Singapore. [Available in TU Delft Library, ISBN: 0-07-042807-7.] Handouts. Other references will be specified during the course or obtainable from the blackboard. Computer programming courses and familiarity with MATLAB. Engineering Informatics (Wb5430-05) is not a must but strongly recommended. Any lectures on Artificial Intelligence can help you, but there could be inevitable overlaps. Assessment will be based on the final exam and homework. In order to pass this course, students have to submit all homework assignments. (If you miss one, you don't pass.) In case a student did not pass in the previous year, he/she needs to re-submit all homework assignments and final ones on time even if questions are the same. There is no automatic carry-over of grades from previous years. Homework assignments (around ten homeworks, individual work), around 40%. If you submit homework reports with your friend, you will get a total score divided by the number of students involved. Final exam, around 60%. Final exam questions will not be published in the blackboard, because basically homework assignments are hints. During the lectures, exam questions can be suggested. The ratio is variable year to year. The students will need on average and approximately four hours per homework. The exam will test the theoretical knowledge and analytical capabilities; the homeworks will test the practical capabilities of implementation on computer. 20% The course helps to understand how to design "intelligent systems." 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Course Contents
Study Goals
Prerequisites Assessment
Page 167 of 186
WB5451-05
Responsible Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Ir. J.J.L. Neve 1/1/1/1
Student colloquia and events PME
Start Education Exam Period Course Language Required for Course Contents
1 2 3 4 1 none English Mandatory for all students doing the ME track PME Presentations by PME students about their research assignments, followed by an academic discussion. Presentations are held throughout the year. The student: - is able to communicate verbally about research and solutions to problems with colleagues, non-colleagues and other involved parties in the English language. - is able to generate a well-structured multi-media presentation to colleagues, non-colleagues and other involved parties in the English language. - is able to take part in an academic dispute. Presentations and mini-lectures. Learning by example. Academic discussions. Optional. The student might benefit from literature on preparing multi-media presentations and on presentation skills. Students have to present a research topic, in which they have contributed and attend at least 20 presentations by fellow PME students and selected guestspeakers. 3mE Department Precision & Microsystems Engineering
Study Goals
Page 168 of 186
WBP202
Responsible Instructor Instructor Instructor Instructor Contact Hours / Week x/x/x/x Education Period Start Education Exam Period Course Language Expected prior knowledge Summary Course Contents
Haptic Experiment Design

Dr. J.J. van den Dobbelsteen Dr.ir. D.A. Abbink A.J. Knulst Ir. D.J. van Gerwen 0/x/0/x 2 4 2 4 Different, to be announced English Admission to MSc phase Haptics, master-slave, control, manipulator, psychophysics, human-machine interaction In this course, students carry out self-contained projects which contribute to the realization of haptic (force-feedback) interfaces for medical or automotive applications.
Key in this course is that students, in groups of two, identify their individual assignment themselves. You (together with your team partner) will select and define a sub-project that will contribute to solve a part of the very complex problems encountered in above-mentioned research fields. You will set up your own experiment and investigate how users respond to your experimental manipulations and from that you should be able to draw conclusions that are relevant for the development of a haptic interface for automotive or medical applications (e.g. feedback or control requirements). Different experimental set-ups are available, including FCS Haptic Master, Omega, Phantom, Falcon Novint, Steering wheels and custom made haptic devices. Often other hardware needs to be build for specific experiments. The student must be able to: 1Formulate a self-contained subproject within the framework of a given long-term research project in the field of haptics. Get acquainted with background knowledge on the research subject. Identify a subproject that has sufficient profundity and that can be completed in the allotted time. Formulate the Research Questions or Objectives without reference to methods or solutions. 2Execute the self-defined subproject. Select and apply appropriate Research Methods. generate a variety of Research Questions. Select the most appropriate Research Question. Create an Experimental Platform. Use suitable methods to analyse the data. Present the results in a concise report and podium presentation. Self-reflect on intended and actual project outcome. Students preferably work in groups of two. They acquire basic knowledge through self-study, guided by instructors. Subsequently, they define a project that fits in the overall project that is (a) sufficiently profound, and (b) doable in the allotted time. Finally they execute this self-defined project and conclude with a presentation and a brief report. The underlying educational idea is that students not only familiarize themselves in a subject that is new to them but also obtain hands-on experience in handling big projects by subdividing them into multiple smaller ones. This experience is useful in their graduation project and future profession. Depending on individual project between 20 and 80% Course material: Blackboard References from literature: Depending on individual assignment, Reports from previous students, materials in 'Course Documents' folder in Blackboard. 1. About one page containing self-defined project (background, problem statement, research objective, limitations, relevance to overall project) and planning. 2. Intermediate progress presentation. 3. Final presentation (10-15 mins). 4. Written report (around 4 pages, two-column scientific paper format). The course incorporates a fair amount of self-reliance, and is intended to be Self-Developing in two senses. Firstly, this term emphasizes the responsibility of the students to acquire the appropriate knowledge. Secondly, it indicates that students do not execute predefined yearly repetitive projects but rather define and execute small, not previously conducted research projects within the framework of the innovative overall projects. Thus, the course aims to bridge the gap between regular courses and the graduation project. Meanwhile, the students efforts add up to the completion of major research projects. 60% Students will be familiarized with the following aspects, all of which are important for the design of the haptic systems: specification of demands, conceptual design, optimization for the human operator, kinematics, dynamics, control (master-slave), identification, modelling, biomechanics, psychophysics. Every student group specializes in one or more of these for their selfdefined assignment. 3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering
Study Goals
Education Method
Assessment
Remarks
Percentage of Design Design Content
Department
Page 169 of 186
Dr.ir. A. Abate
Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Hybrid & Distributed Sys&Con +31 (0)15 27 85606 E-4-190 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Hybrid & Distributed Sys&Con -
Dr.ir. D.A. Abbink

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Biomechatronics & Biorobotics +31 (0)15 27 82077 F-1-010
B. Adouane Dr.ir. I. Apachitei

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng BioMaterialen +31 (0)15 27 82276 F-2-320
Dr. P.V. Aravind

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Energy Technology +31 (0)15 27 83550 1-430
Prof.dr. R. Babuska
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Intelligent Control & Robotics +31 (0)15 27 85117 E-3-330
Prof.dr. H.L.M. Bakker

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Process & Energy +31 (0)15 27 86687 1-030 Techniek, Bestuur & Management Tech Strat & Ondernemersch -
Dr.ir. A. van Beek

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Mechatronic Systems Design +31 (0)15 27 86984 G-1-460
T. van Beek Prof.dr.ir. H. Bijl

Unit Department Telephone Room Luchtvaart- & Ruimtevaarttechn Dean +31 (0)15 27 85373 NB 1.47.1
Ir. A.A. van der Bles

Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Ship Design, Prod & Operations D-1-160
Page 170 of 186
Prof.dr.ir. B.J. Boersma

Dr.ir. X.J.A. Bombois

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Model-based Measurem & Contr +31 (0)15 27 85150 E-2-270
Dr.ir. A.J.J. van den Boom

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Hybrid & Distributed Sys&Con +31 (0)15 27 84052 E-3-240
Prof.dr. R. Boom
Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Metals Proc.Micr. & Prop H-2-190
Ir. W. van den Bos

Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Transport Eng & Logistics B-1-250
Nabestaanden van O.H. Bosgra

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Support Delft Cent Syst & Cont +31 (0)15 27 85610 E-2-300
Ir. T.N. Bosman

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Ship Hydromech & Structures +31 (0)15 27 85923 D-1-330
Dr. A.J. Bottger

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Surface & Interface Eng. +31 (0)15 27 82243 H-4-210
Dr.ir. P. Breedveld
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments +31 (0)15 27 85232 -
Prof.ir. J.P. van Buijtenen

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Telephone Luchtvaart- & Ruimtevaarttechn Flight Perform. & Propulsion Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Energy Technology +31 (0)15 27 82179 1-03 Luchtvaart- & Ruimtevaarttechn System Eng & Aircraft Design +31 (0)15 27 83833 Page 171 of 186
Room
NB 2.52
Dr.ir. P. Colonna
Unit Department Telephone Room Luchtvaart- & Ruimtevaarttechn Flight Perform. & Propulsion +31 (0)15 27 82172 1-050
Dr. M. Corno
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics +31 (0)15 27 85242 E-4-170
Prof.dr. J. Dankelman
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments +31 (0)15 27 85565 E-1-330
Prof.dr.ir. B.H.K. De Schutter

Dr.ir. A.J. den Dekker

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Systems and Control +31 (0)15 27 81823 E-2-260 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Systems and Control -
Ir. N.F.B. Diepeveen

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Telephone Room Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Offshore Technologie +31 (0)15 27 88030 HG 2.84 Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Offshore Technologie +31 (0)15 27 88030 HG 2.84
Prof.dr. J. Dik
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Virtual Mat. & Mech. +31 (0)15 27 89571 H-4-270
Dr. J.J. van den Dobbelsteen

Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments -
Dr. D. Dodou
Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments F-2-080
Page 172 of 186
Dr.ir. W.D. van Driel

Unit Department Room Elektrotechn., Wisk. & Inform. Elektr Compon Techn & Mat -
Ir. M.B. Duinkerken

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Transport Eng & Logistics +31 (0)15 27 81790 B-1-260
Dr. J. Duszczyk
Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng 3mE General Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng 3mE General +31 (0)15 27 82218 8D-3-25-K
Dr.ir. A.C. van der Eijk

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments +31 (0)15 2784223 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments +31 (0)15 27 84223 8C-0-26-V
Prof.dr.ir. J. van Eijk

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Mechatronic Systems Design Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Mechatronic Systems Design +31 (0)15 27 85396 4B-1-29
Dr.ir. G.E. Elsinga

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Fluid Mechanics +31 (0)15 27 88179 F-1-470
Prof.dr.ir. L.J. Ernst

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng 3mE Algemeen +31 (0)15 27 86519 G-1-390 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Fundamentals of Microsystems +31 (0)15 27 86519 4B-1-33
P. Estevez Castillo
Unit Department Room Unit Department Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Mechatronic Systems Design Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Mechatronic Systems Design
Page 173 of 186
Telephone Room
+31 (0)15 27 86428 5A-1-03
Dr.ir. E.L. Fratila-Apachitei

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng BioMaterialen +31 (0)15 27 89083 E-1-300
Ir. J.W. Frouws

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Ship Design, Prod & Operations +31 (0)15 27 86606 D-1-190
Ir. N. Geerlofs
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Metals Proc.Micr. & Prop. +31 (0)15 27 84920 J-0-310
Ir. D.J. van Gerwen

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments +31 (0)15 27 86574 F-0-200
Prof.dr.ir. C.A. Grimbergen

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments +31 (0)15 27 83607 F-1-080 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments -

Drs. N.C.F. Groot

Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Virtual Mat. & Mech. -
Prof.dr.ir. M.A. Gutierrez De La Merced

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng 3mE Algemeen +31 (0)15 27 81610 G-1-320
Dr.ir. R. Happee
Dr.ir. R.G. Hekkenberg

Page 174 of 186
Prof.dr.ir. J. Hellendoorn
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Support Delft Cent Syst & Cont +31 (0)15 27 89007 E-2-220
Prof.dr. F.C.T. van der Helm

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Biomechatronics & Biorobotics +31 (0)15 27 85616 E-1-340
Dr.ir. J.L. Herder

Dr.ir. M.J.M. Hermans

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Metals Proc.Micr. & Prop +31 (0)15 27 82286 H-1-300
Dr. P.S.C. Heuberger

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Support Delft Cent Syst & Cont Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Support Delft Cent Syst & Cont +31 (0)15 27 85331 8C-3-08
Prof.dr.ir. E.G.M. Holweg

Unit Department Room Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Systems and Control +31 (0)15 27 89007 8C-2-12
Prof.ir. J.J. Hopman

Dr.ir. J.H. ter Horst

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Intensified Reaction and Separ +31 (0)15 27 86661 1-070
Ir. A.E.M. Huesman

Unit Department Room Technische Natuurwetenschappen ChemE/Algemeen -
Page 175 of 186


Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Thermodynamics +31 (0)15 27 84894 1-010
Dr. L.C.M. Itard

Unit Department Telephone Room Onderzoeksinstituut OTB Duurzame Woningkwaliteit +31 (0)15 27 86341 c3.260
Dr.ir. K.M.B. Jansen

Unit Department Telephone Room Industrieel Ontwerpen Product Engineering +31 (0)15 27 86905 B-3-070
Prof.dr. G.C.A.M. Janssen

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Micro and Nano Engineering +31 (0)15 27 81684 G-1-320
Dr.ir. M. Janssen
Dr.ing. D. Jeltsema
Unit Department Telephone Room Elektrotechn., Wisk. & Inform. Mathematische Fysica +31 (0)15 27 89277 HB 05.280
X. Jiang
Dr.ir. P. de Jong
Dr.ir. W. de Jong
Prof.dr.ir. P.P. Jonker

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Vision Based Robotics +31 (0)15 27 82561 E-0-340 Page 176 of 186
Prof.dr.ir. M.L. Kaminski

Prof.dr.ir. L.A.I. Kestens

Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Metals Proc.Micr. & Prop H-3-260
Prof.dr.ir. A. van Keulen

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Struc Optimization & Mechanics +31 (0)15 27 86515 G-1-430
Dr.ir. J.A. Keuning

T. Keviczky
D. de Klerk
Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics G-1-200
Ir. A. Klomp
Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Biomechatronics & Biorobotics -
A.J. Knulst
Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments +31 (0)15 27 85625 E-1-250 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments +31 (0)15 27 85625 8C-1-07
Dr.ir. H.J. de Koning Gans

H.J.M. Kramer
Page 177 of 186
Ing. C. Kwakernaak
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Surface & Interface Eng. +31 (0)15 27 82223 J-1-420
Dr.ir. M. Langelaar
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Struc Optimization & Mechanics +31 (0)15 27 86506 G-1-300
Prof.dr.ir. G. Lodewijks
Dr.ir. T.W. de Loos

Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Thermodynamics -
H. Meersman Dr.ir. S.A. Miedema

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Offshore & Dredging Eng +31 (0)15 27 88359 D-1-310
Dr.ir. J.M.C. Mol

Prof.dr.ir. F. Molenkamp
Unit Department Room Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Geo-engineering -

Ir. P. Naaijen
Ir. J.J.L. Neve

Dr.ir. L. Nicola
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Virtual Mat. & Mech. +31 (0)15 27 88806 H-4-320 Page 178 of 186
Dr.ir. S.E. Offerman

Z. Olujic
Ir. J.P. Oostveen

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Telephone Room Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Geo-engineering +31 (0)15 27 85423 KG 00.480 Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Geo-engineering +31 (0)15 27 85423 KG 00.480
Dr.ir. R.A.J. van Ostayen

Dr.ir. J.A. Ottjes

Unit Department Room Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Transport Eng & Logistics B-1-320 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Transport Eng & Logistics B-1-320 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Transport Eng & Logistics +31 (0)15 27 84318 8B-1-09-K
Dr.ir. R.H. Petrov

Prof.dr. S.J. Picken

Unit Department Telephone Room Technische Natuurwetenschappen ChemE/Advanced Soft Matter +31 (0)15 27 86946 0.027
Dr.ir. D.H. Plettenburg

Dr.ir. C. Poelma
Unit Department Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Fluid Mechanics
Page 179 of 186
Telephone Room
+31 (0)15 27 82620 F-1-470
Dr.ir. M.J.B.M. Pourquie

Ir. J.F.J. Pruyn

Ir. P.C.J. van Rens

Unit Department Room Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Mechatronic Systems Design Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Mechatronic Systems Design -
Prof.dr.ir. C. van Rhee

Prof.dr. I.M. Richardson

Prof.ir. J.C. Rijsenbrij

Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Transport Eng & Logistics B-1-240
Prof. D.J. Rixen

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics +31 (0)15 27 81523 G-1-455
Ir. M.G. van de Ruijtenbeek

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Precision & Microsystems Eng Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Struc Optimization & Mechanics +31 (0)15 27 81278 G-1-180
Dr.ing. A. Schiele
Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Biomechatronics & Biorobotics Page 180 of 186
Dr.ir. D.L. Schott

Dr.ir. A.C. Schouten

Dr.ir. A.L. Schwab

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics +31 (0)15 27 82701 G-1-370
Prof.dr.ir. J. Sietsma
Dr.ir. W.G. Sloof

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Surface & Interface Eng. +31 (0)15 27 84924 H-4-260
Dr. M.H.F. Sluiter

F.G.M. Smeele Prof.dr.ir. A.I. Stankiewicz

Prof.ir. D. Stapersma
Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Ship Design, Prod & Operations +31 (0)15 27 83051 D-1-230 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Transport Eng & Logistics Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Ship Design, Prod & Operations +31 (0)15 27 83051 D-1-230
E.F.L. Stok
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Support Marine &Transport Tech +31 (0)15 27 86839 D-1-290
Page 181 of 186
E. Stroo-Moredo
Dr.ir. A.M. Talmon

Prof.dr.ir. T.J.C. van Terwisga

Prof.dr. B.J. Thijsse

Dr.ir. M. Tichem
R.H. van Till

Ir. G. Tol
Unit Department Room Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Externenregistratie Ampelmann Operations Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Offshore Technologie Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Offshore & Dredging Eng +31 (0) 15 27 89250 7-1-132
Dr. T. Tomiyama
Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Intelligent Mechanical Systems +31 (0)15 27 81021 F-2-120 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng 3mE Algemeen +31 (0)15 27 81021 F-2-120
Dipl.ing. C. Trapp
Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Energy Technology -
Page 182 of 186
Dr.ir. G.J.M. Tuijthof

E.H.M. Ulijn
Ir. A.J. Valkenberg

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Transport Eng & Logistics +31 (0)15 27 85343 8B-1-07-K
Prof.dr.ir. E.R. Valstar

Unit Department Room Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments -
Prof.dr.ir. P.M.J. Van den Hof

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Model-based Measurem & Contr Technische Natuurwetenschappen IST/Algemeen +31 (0)15 27 84509 -
E. Vandevoorde Dr.ir. H.P.M. Veeke

Ir. M.L. Verbist

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Energy Technology Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Energy Technology +31 (0)15 27 87428 0-37
Prof.dr.ir. M.H.G. Verhaegen

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Systems and Control +31 (0)15 27 85204 E-2-330
C. Verheul Prof.dr.ir. A.H.M. Verkooijen

Unit Department Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Energy Technology
Page 183 of 186
Room Unit Department Telephone Room
Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Energy Technology +31 (0)15 27 86822 1-390
Ir. W.P.J. Visser

Unit Department Room Unit Department Room Luchtvaart- & Ruimtevaarttechn Flight Perform. & Propulsion Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Energy Technology -
Dr.ir. E. de Vlugt
P. de Vos
Ir. E.J.H. de Vries

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics +31 (0)15 27 86980 G-1-420
Ir. W.E. De Vries

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Offshore Technologie Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Offshore Technologie +31 (0)15 27 87568 HG 2.84
Ing. J.C. van der Wagt

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Ship Design, Prod & Operations Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Ship Design, Prod & Operations +31 (0)15 27 87430 7-1-105
Prof.dr.ir. J. Wardenier
Unit Department Telephone Room Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Gebouwen en Civieltech Constr +31 (0)15 27 85072 S2 2.58
Dr.ir. A.J.J. van der Weiden Prof.dr.ir. H.H. Weinans

Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Biomechatronics & Biorobotics -
Page 184 of 186
Unit Department Room
Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Biomechanical Engineering -
Ir. J.H. Welink

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Room Externenregistratie Delft Projectmanagement +31 (0)15 27 89205 H-3-210 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Support Materials Science &Eng -
Prof.dr.ir. J. Westerweel
Prof.dr.ir. P.A. Wieringa

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Medical Instruments +31 (0)15 27 89093 E-1-330 Universiteitsdienst Protocollaire Zaken +31 (0)15 27 86441 00.[230]
Ir. A.M. van Wijngaarden

Unit Department Room Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Ship Hydromech & Structures Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Offshore & Dredging Eng +31 (0)15 27 87643 7-1-139
Prof. C.A. Willemse

Unit Department Room Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Support 3mE D-1-360 Civiele Techniek & Geowetensch Offshore Technologie -
Dr.ir. J.W. van Wingerden

Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Systems and Control +31 (0)15 27 81720 E-3-320
Dr.ir. J.C.F. de Winter

Dr.ir. M. Wisse
Unit Department Telephone Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Biomechatronics & Biorobotics +31 (0)15 27 86834 Page 185 of 186
Room
E-1-240
Prof.dr. J.H.W. de Wit

Prof.dr. G.J. Witkamp

Unit Department Telephone Room Technische Natuurwetenschappen BT/Milieubiotechnologie +31 (0)15 27 83602 0.830
J.A. Woelders-van der Burg Dr.ir. P.T.L.M. van Woerkom

Unit Department Room Unit Department Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics G-1-420 Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng Engineering Dynamics -
Dr. Y. Yang
Dr. A.A. Zadpoor

Prof.dr. G.Q. Zhang

Unit Department Telephone Room Unit Department Telephone Room Elektrotechn., Wisk. & Inform. Elektr Compon Techn & Mat +31 (0)15 2789495 LB 01.480 Elektrotechn., Wisk. & Inform. Elektr Compon Techn & Mat +31 (0)15 27 82704 LB 01.480
Dr. J. Zhou
Unit Department Telephone Room Mech, Maritime & Materials Eng BioMaterialen +31 (0)15 27 85357 H-2-270
ontbreekt
E.P. van Luik
Page 186 of 186

3me Keuzevakken 2010 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

3me Keuzevakken 2010 en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3me Keuzevakken 2010 en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Program overview

Code 3mE Keuzevakken 2010

Omschrijving 3mE Electives 2010

3 2 2 3 3 3 3 8 3 3 4 4 8 1,5 2 3 1,5 6 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 11 4 4 3 6 3 4 6 5 4 4 4 3 0,5 0,5 4 5 3 3 3 3 6 6 4 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 4 3 4 4 6 3 5 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 3 4 4 4 7 3 Page 2 of 186

Year Organization Education

2010/2011 Mechanical, Maritime and Materials Engineering 3mE Keuzevakken

3mE Keuzevakken 2010

Orthopaedic Implants and Technology

Course Relations Assessment

Medical Instruments A: Clinical Challenges and Engineering Solutions

Automotive Crash Safety; Active & Passive Safety Systems

Study Goals Education Method Assessment Enrolment / Application Percentage of Design

3mE Department Biomechanical Engineering

Medical Device Prototyping

Education Method Assessment Percentage of Design Design Content Department

Education Method Prerequisites Assessment Department

Sustainability in Transportation Engineering

Education Method Assessment Department

Separation Processes, Design & Operation

Study Goals Education Method Books Assessment Department

Thermodynamics for Designers

Study Goals Education Method Assessment Department

Study Goals Education Method Literature and Study Materials

Reliability and Uncertainty Models in Engineering Mechanics

Study Goals Education Method Assessment Department

Tissue Biomechanics of Bone, Cartilage and Tendon

Education Method Assessment Department

Micro-Assembly, Packaging and Test

Semiconductor Principles and Devices

Summary Course Contents

Education Method Literature and Study Materials

Prerequisites Assessment Remarks Department

Summary Course Contents

Education Method Literature and Study Materials

Assessment Special Information Remarks Department

Computational Materials Science

Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites

Assessment Remarks Design Content Department

History of Materials Production and Usage

Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Department

Materials Degradation and Countermeasures

Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Department

Primary Metals Production

Education Method Literature and Study Materials

Prerequisites Assessment Department

Developments in Production and Processing

Education Method Literature and Study Materials Prerequisites Assessment Department

Education Method Computer Use Literature and Study Materials

Relation between Properties and Microstructure

Education Method Literature and Study Materials

Prerequisites Assessment Department

Total Performance Approach: Case Studies

Design Content Department

Corrosion and Protection against Corrosion

Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Remarks Department

Modern Analysis Techniques & Authenticity Research

Education Method Literature and Study Materials Assessment Department

Education Method Literature and Study Materials

Prerequisites Assessment Department